Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C2025-144 - 7/22/2025 - Approved
&s ES CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF LA RETAMA CENTRAL LIBRARY EXTERIOR RENOVATION [BOND 2022] PROJECT NUMBER: 23181 IN ' CORPORA ° 1852 TURNER � RAMIREZ A R C H I T E C T S 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 Phone: (361) 994-8900 TRA PROJECT NO. 2024-03 January 10, 2025 Record Drawing Number: PBG-940 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Note to Specifier: Verify that the Table of Contents includes all Specification Sections and Appendices that are part of the Contract Documents. Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 000100 Table of Contents 000101 Seals Page (Optional) Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement (Rev 12-2021) 000102 List of Drawings 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev 6-2021) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions(Rev4-2022) Division 01 General Requirements 011100 Summary of Work (Rev 10-2018) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances(Rev5-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment(Rev 5-2020) 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 01 35 00 Special Procedures (Rev 10-2018) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev8-2019) 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Rev 8-2019) Part S Standard Specifications 02 10 40 Site Grading 02 24 20 Silt Fence 02 52 05 Pavement Repair, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalk and Driveway Replacement 02 52 10 Lime Stabilization 02 56 12 Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways 03 00 20 Portland Cement Concrete 03 70 40 Epoxy Compounds TABLE OF CONTENTS [ADDENDUM 001] 00 0100- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovation -#23181 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section Part T TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 014100 Testing Laboratory Services 014200 References 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 73 00 Execution 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures T-DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 37 60 Drilled Footings 02 41 19 Selective Demolition T-DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork (Structural) 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement(Structural) 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete (Structural) 033100 Epoxy Related Work(Structural) T-DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 04 23 00 Reinforced Unit Masonry(Structural) T-DIVISION 05 METALS 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings T-DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry TABLE OF CONTENTS [ADDENDUM 0011 00 0100-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovation -#23181 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section T-DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 92 00 Joint Sealants T-DIVISION 08 OPENINGS 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 42 28 Sliding Automatic Entrances 08 42 29 Impact Rated Sliding Automatic Entrances 08 80 00 Glazing T-DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 24 00 Cement Plastering 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling 09 91 13 Painting T-DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 10 14 80 LED Message Center 10 71 13 Exterior Sun Control Devices T-DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 00 10 Special Provisions for Electrical Work 26 01 11 Conduit and Fittings 26 01 20 Wire and Cable—600 Volts and Under 26 01 31 Junction and Pull Boxes 26 01 34 Outlet Boxes 260140 Wiring Devices 26 01 70 Disconnect Switches 260190 Supporting Devices 26 04 50 Grounding 26 05 01 Lighting Fixtures 26 09 96 Electrical Systems Startup TABLE OF CONTENTS [ADDENDUM 0011 00 0100-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovation -#23181 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section T-DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Grates 32 84 23 Underground Sprinklers 32 90 01 Common Planting Requirements 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 32 92 23 Sodding 32 93 00 Plants APPENDIX All Testing Reports as Applicable Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation and Recommendations for the Proposed La Retama Library Exterior Renovation, Report No. G124133; dated May 7, 2024 (26 pages) END OF SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS [ADDENDUM 0011 00 0100-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovation -#23181 Rev 1/2022 DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) A�" CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCEGs cs 05/14/2025 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT Tina Gallion NAME: RSC Insurance Brokerage,Inc. PHONE (503)820-3404 FAX A/C No Ext: A/C No): 160 Federal St. E-MAIL tgallion@risk-strategies.com ADDRESS: 4th Floor INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# Boston MA 02110 INSURERA: Gemini Insurance Company 10833 INSURED INSURERB: Canopius US Insurance,Inc. 12961 Crawford Henrichson&Crawford Construction,LLC INSURER C: Texas Mutual Insurance Company 22945 16775 Addison Road INSURER D: Ironshore Specialty Insurance 25445 Ste 350 INSURER E Addison TX 75001 INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: CL2551458316 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFYTHAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACTOR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAYBE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. ILTR TYPE OF INSURANCE INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER MM DD/YYYY MM DD/YYYY LIMITS X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 DAMAGE TO_7 CLAIMS-MADE Fx_]OCCUR PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ 100,000 MED EXP(Anv one person) $ 5,000 A Y Y VCGPO33435 02/12/2025 02/12/2026 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'LAGGREGATE LIMITAPPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 X POLICY ❑ PRO JECT ❑ LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $ 2,000,000 OTHER: $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ Ea accident ANYAUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ A OWNED SCHEDULED Y Y VCGP033435 02/12/2025 02/12/2026 BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS X HIRED �/ NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY /� AUTOS ONLY Per accident X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 B EXCESS LIAR CLAIMS-MADE Y Y CUSXU23000105-00 02/12/2025 02/12/2026 AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 DED I I RETENTION$ $ WORKERS COMPENSATION X1 SPERTATUTE EORH AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY Y/N 1,000,000 ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ C OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? N/A Y 0002090981 02/12/2025 02/12/2026 (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes,describe under 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ Pollution Liability Each Occurrence $1,000,000 D Y Y ICELLUW00600096 08/07/2025 06/30/2026 Policy Aggregate $2,000,000 Deductible Per Occ $5,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) Certificate holder is included as additional insured as required by written agreement. Refer to the attached endorsements for Blanket Additional Insured, Waiver of Subrogation and Primary and Non-Contributory for specific policies. Pollution Liability is per project for the Library at 805 Comanche St,Corpus Christi,TX 78401 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City of Corpus Christi-Procurement ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. PO Box 9277 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi TX 78469-9277 `I @ 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD ADDITIONAL COVERAGES Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date WC&Employer's liability WCEL Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium 1,000,000 1,000,000 1'000,000 Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Blanket Waiver of Subrogation Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium $1.00 Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Increased employer's liability INEL Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium $1.00 Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Schedule Credit/Debit CRDBT Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium -$6.00 Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Premium discount Sched XAssigned Risk PRMX Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium -$1.00 Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Healthcare Network Option Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium -$8.00 Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium Ref# Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium [HEV Copyright 2001,AMS Services,Inc. Policy Number: VCGP033435 CG 24 04 12 19 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson & Crawford Construction LLC Number: 39 Effective Date: 02/12/2025 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US (WAIVER OF SUBROGATION) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: Commercial General Liability Coverage Part Schedule Name Of Person(s) Or Organization(s): Any person or organization you have agreed in a written and executed contract, prior to an "occurrence", that you would provide such person or organization a waiver of transfer of rights of recovery against others to us on your policy. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. The following is added to Paragraph 8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us of Section IV—Conditions: We waive any right of recovery against the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule above because of payments we make under this Coverage Part. Such waiver by us applies only to the extent that the insured has waived its right of recovery against such person(s) or organization(s) prior to loss. This endorsement applies only to the person(s) or organization(s)shown in the Schedule above. All other terms and conditions of this Policy remain unchanged. CG 24 04 12 19 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2018 Page 1 of 1 Policy Number: VCGP033435 VE 09 73 04 20 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson & Crawford Construction LLC Number: 45 Effective Date: 02/12/2025 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY - OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: Commercial General Liability Coverage Part The following is added to the Other Insurance Condition and supersedes any provision to the contrary: Primary And Noncontributory Insurance This insurance is primary to and will not seek contribution from any other Commercial General Liability insurance available to an additional insured under your policy, but only if: (1) The additional insured is a Named Insured under such other Commercial General Liability insurance; and (2) You have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that this insurance would be primary and would not seek contribution from any other Commercial General Liability insurance available to the additional insured. Coverage granted to an additional insured remains subject to all terms, conditions, limitations, and exclusions set forth in the endorsement form that conferred the additional insured status. In the event of conflict between this endorsement and an endorsement conferring additional insured status, then the endorsement conferring additional insured status shall govern the scope of coverage available to the additional insured. All other terms and conditions of this Policy remain unchanged. VE 09 73 04 20 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. Page 1 of 1 with its permission Policy Number: VCGP033435 CG 20 10 07 04 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson &Crawford Construction LLC Number: 36 Effective Date: 02/12/2025 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSORS OR CONTRACTORS - SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: Commercial General Liability Coverage Part SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Organization(s): Location(s) Of Covered Operations Any person or organization when you have agreed All locations for which you have agreed in a written in a written and executed contract, prior to an and executed contract prior to an "occurrence "occurrence", that such person or organization be added as an additional insured on your policy Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. A. Section II —Who Is An Insured is amended B. With respect to the insurance afforded to to include as an additional insured the these additional insureds, the following person(s) or organization(s) shown in the additional exclusions apply: Schedule, but only with respect to liability for This insurance does not apply to "bodily "bodily injury", "property damage" or injury" or"property damage" occurring after: personal and advertising injury caused, in whole or in part, by: 1. All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with 1. Your acts or omissions; or such work, on the project (other than 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on service, maintenance or repairs) to be your behalf; performed by or on behalf of the in the performance of your ongoing additional insured(s) at the location of the operations for the additional insured(s) at the covered operations has been completed; location(s)designated above. or 2. That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. CG 20 10 07 04 ©ISO Properties, Inc., 2004 Page 1 of 1 Policy Number: VCGP033435 CG 20 37 07 04 Insured Name: Crawford Henrichson & Crawford Construction LLC Number: 38 Effective Date: 02/12/2025 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - COMPLETED OPERATIONS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: Commercial General Liability Coverage Part SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Location And Description Of Completed Or Organ ization(s): Operations Any person or organization when you have agreed in All locations and completed operations for which a written and executed contract, prior to an you have agreed in a written and executed contract "occurrence", that such person or organization be prior to an "occurrence." added as an additional insured on your policy. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. Section II — Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an additional insured the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused, in whole or in part, by "your work" at the location designated and described in the schedule of this endorsement performed for that additional insured and included in the "products-completed operations hazard". CG 20 37 07 04 ©ISO Properties, Inc., 2004 Page 1 of 1 COMMERCIAL EXCESS CUS 90 18 07 24 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies Insurance provided under the following form: COMMERCIAL EXCESS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART This policy is amended as follows: Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth herein, Section III. CONDITIONS, is amended to include the following: In the event of any payment under this Policy for a loss for which you have waived the right of recovery in a written contract entered into prior to the loss, the Company herby agrees to also waive its right of recovery. This waiver shall only apply with respect to a loss occurring due to operations undertaken as per the specific contract in which you waived the right of recovery This endorsement does not change any other provision of the policy. Includes material 0 ISO Properties, Inc., used with its permission. Page 1 of 1 COMMERCIAL EXCESS CUS 90 02 07 24 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. AMENDMENT OF OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION - PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY FOR ADDITIONAL INSURED This endorsement modifies Insurance provided under the following form: COMMERCIAL EXCESS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART Section III —CONDITIONS, 8. Other Insurance is deleted and replaced with the following: a) This insurance is excess over and will not contribute with any "other insurance" whether primary, excess, contingent or any other basis. However, "other insurance" does not include: 1) Insurance specifically written as excess over this policy; or 2) Insurance held by an additional insured defined by "controlling underlying insurer" for which they are listed as a named insured, but only under a written contract between you and the additional insured: a. Requiring a specific limit of insurance that is an excess of the "controlling underlying insurance"; b. Requesting that your insurance be primary insurance and not contribute with that of the additional insured; and c. Executed prior to the loss In such case as described in sub-paragraph (2) above, we shall not seek contribution from the additional insured's primary or excess insurance for which they are a named insured for amounts payable under this insurance. Section IV— DEFINITIONS is amended to include the following definition: 7. "Other Insurance" means insurance, or any type of self-insurance, or any type of self- insurance or other mechanism by which an insured arranges for the funding of legal liabilities, which is available to any insured and covers injury or damage to which this insurance applies, other than: a) "Controlling Underlying Insurance" b) Insurance which is specifically purchased by you to be excess of the insurance afforded by this insurance. This endorsement does not change any other provision of the policy. Includes copyrighted material of ISO, Inc. with its permission Page 1 of 1 j. s� 00 61 13 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND NO.GSA01700035 Contractor as Principal Surety Name:Crawford Henrichson&Crawford Construction LLC Name: The Gray Casualty& Surety Company Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 16775 Addison Rd P.O. Box 6202, Suite 350 Metairie, LA 70009 Addison,TX 75001 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner 1625 West Causeway Approach, Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Mandeville, LA 70471 Mailing address(principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: LA Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number):(504) 888-7790 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations 23181 Telephone(for notice of claim): (504) 754-6711 Local Agent for Surety Name: David Grillo Award Date of the Contract:July 22, 2025 Address: Contract Price: $2,027,560.00 P.O. Box 6202, Metairie, LA 70009 Bond Telephone:(201)463-4644 Email Address: dgrillo@graysurety.com Date of Bond: August 6, 2025 The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained C(Date Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the of the Contract) following toll free number.1-800-252-3439 Performance Bond 00 61 13-1 Rev 5/2025 RFB 6346 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations 23181 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves,and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work through the Warranty Period required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. The Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor is incorporated by reference into this Statutory Performance Bond,pursuant to Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Surety agrees to be bound by the mediation clause in Article 22 of the Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor,said Contract Documents are incorporated by reference in this Bond. Contractor as Princi Surety __11// 'VI Signature: Signature: ( yc dt1l(Lt* Name: I e�i✓� 2v�V slp�V� Name: Lauren K. Burkhart Title: �GIyIU I Vl G t " r e y Vey- Title: Attorney-in-Fact M bonds@risk-strategies.com Email Address: �yl nA ic� S00,0 C��L' Email Address: (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Performance Bond 00 61 13-2 Rev 5/2025 RFB 6346 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations 23181 00 61 16 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO.GSA01700035 Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Crawford Henrichson&Crawford Construction LLC Name: The Gray Casualty& Surety Company Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 16775 Addison Rd, Suite 350 P.O. Box 6202, Addison,TX 75001 Metairie, LA 70009 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner 1625 West Causeway Approach, Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Mandeville, LA 70471 Mailing address(principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: LA Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone (main number): La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations (504) 888-7790 23181 Telephone(for notice of claim): (504) 754-6711 Local Agent for Surety Name: David Grillo Award Date of the Contract: July 22, 2025 Address: Contract Price:$2,027,560.00 P.O. Box 6202, Metairie, LA 70009 Bond Telephone:(201)463-4644 Email Address: dgrillo@graysurety.com Date of Bond: August 6, 2025 The address of the surety company to which any (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date notice of claim should be sent may be obtained of Contract) from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll free number.1-800-252-3439 Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-1 5/2024 RFB 6346 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations 23181 Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer,agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void,otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Princj,p Surety Signature: Signature: a � 1 Name: Devi Name: Lauren K. Burkhart Title: A4 N /r,,,,AA`e-�v\O C v' Title: Attorney-in-Fact Email Address: CJV4 ck , "M Email Address: bonds@risk-strategies.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-2 5/2024 RFB 6346 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations 23181 RSC Insurance Brokerage,Inc.dba Risk Strategies Company 08/06/2025 08:34 5650452011910 THE GRAY INSURANCE COMPANY THE GRAY CASUALTY&SURETY COMPANY GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY Bond Number:GSA01700035 Principal:Crawford Henrichson&Crawford Construction,LLC Project: La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations 23181 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS,THAT The Gray Insurance Company and The Gray Casualty&Surety Company,corporations duly organized and existing under the laws of Louisiana,and having their principal offices in Metairie,Louisiana,do hereby make,constitute,and appoint:Laura Scholze,Courtney W.Judge,Lauren K.Burkhart,Melody Gist,Justin Silva,Brian Whipple,Rebecca Pena,Zachary Dixon,and Douglas Dixon of Hunt Valley,Maryland jointly and severally on behalf of each of the Companies named above its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact,to make,execute,seal and deliver,for and on its behalf and as its deed,bonds,or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond,as surety,contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law,regulation,contract or otherwise,provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the amount of $25,000,000.00. This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of both The Gray Insurance Company and The Gray Casualty & Surety Company at meetings duly called and held on the 261"day of June,2003. "RESOLVED,that the President,Executive Vice President,any Vice President,or the Secretary be and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings,and all contracts of surety,and that each or any of them is hereby authorized to attest to the execution of such Power of Attorney,and to attach the seal of the Company;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile,and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company now and in the future when so affixed with regard to any bond,undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,The Gray Insurance Company and The Gray Casualty&Surety Company have caused their official seals to be hereinto affixed,and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 41h day of November,2022. �g tl R AV �T Y,d,SSP SEAL President President Wi ..3 �e SEAL i� BY: Michael T.Gray Cullen S.Piske W. o `D t. a y''• '2 < The Gray Insurance Company The Gray Casualty&Surety Company •......... ........... State tie State of Louisiana ss: Parish of Jefferson On this 41h day of November,2022,before me,a Notary Public,personally appeared Michael T.Gray,President of The Gray Insurance Company,and Cullen S.Piske,President of The Gray Casualty&Surety Company,personally known to me,being duly sworn,acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney and affixed the seals of the companies as officers of,and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed,of their companies. Notary Public Leigh Anne Henican Notary ID No.92653 Notary Public,Parish of Orleans State of Louisiana . Orleans Parish, Louisiana My Commission is for Life I,Mark S.Manguno,Secretary of The Gray Insurance Company,do hereby certify that the above and forgoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by the companies,which is still in full force and effect.IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Company this 5 day of August 2025 I,Leigh Anne Henican,Secretary of The Gray Casualty&Surety Company,do hereby certify that the above and forgoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by the companies,which is still in full force and effect.IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Company this 5 day of August 2025 � gURgNO P�TY6S� ej SEAL '=i SEAL 3 ................ *.. gYUS O v �N�OgPORPtE� 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on July 22, 2025, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Crawford Henrichson &Crawford LLC (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: City of Corpus Christi La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovation Proiect No. 23181 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: ARCHITECT OF RECORD Turner I Ramirez Architects 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 Contact:Jay Porterfield,AIA I iav@trarch.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson—Assistant Director, Construction Management 4917 Holly Road, Building 5 Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 JosephJ2@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 300 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Agreement 00 52 23- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 12/2021 Conditions within 330 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400.00 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$400.00 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 2,027,560.00 Agreement 00 52 23-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 12/2021 C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 12/2021 L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts,vouchers,memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI ]]jj �&b&ac4,H"-P� Je eM yEdmonds( 2513:00:40 CDT) Rebecca Huerta IAue 2D.2D2511:D2:09 CDT) Rebecca Huerta 08/20/2025 Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E 08/19/2025 City Secretary Director of Engineering Services M2025-094 AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL 7/22/2025 iric�o R H/S B Ja et Whitehead(Aug 19,202511:54:35 CDT) Assistant City Attorney 08/19/2025 ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR lWhah Frown Nathan Brown(Aug 13,2D251D:51:23 CDT) (Seal Below) By: Nathan Brown Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: Director person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President Vice President Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 16675 Addison Road Financial Officer Address Addison TX 75001 City State Zip (214) 247-6632 Phone Fax nbrown@chc-gc.com EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 12/2021 CIVCAS, RFB 6346 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations 23181 Report Created On:4/23/2025 7:04:22 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total PART A-GENERAL $369,639.00 PART B- EXISTING CONDITIONS $40,973.00 PART C-CONCRETE $50,430.00 PART D- MASONRY $4,237.00 PART E- METALS $42,917.00 PART F-WOOD, PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITE $21,500.00 PART G-THERMAL&MOISTURE PROTECTION $4,638.00 PART H-OPENINGS $325,500.00 PART I- FINISHES $560,648.00 PART J-SPECIALTIES $240,500.00 PART K- ELECTRICAL $55,800.00 PART M- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS $90,778.00 PART N-ALLOWANCES $220,000.00 Total $2,027,560.00 ALTERNATE 1 Total PART M- BID ALTERNATE 01 $20,138.00 Total $20,138.00 PART A-GENERAL No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al MOBILIZATION LS 1 $74,039.00 $74,039.00 A2 STORM WATER POLLUTION LS 1 $5,600.00 $5,600.00 PREVENTION A3 GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS LS 1 $290,000.00 $290,000.00 A4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $369,639.00 PART B- EXISTING CONDITIONS CIVCAST RFB 6346 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations 23181 Report Created On:4/23/2025 7:04:22 PM No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price B1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION LS 1 $40,973.00 $40,973.00 Subtotal: $40,973.00 PART C-CONCRETE No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price C1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LS 1 $16,675.00 $16,675.00 C2 CONCRETE FORMS AND LS 1 $30,255.00 $30,255.00 REINFORCEMENT C3 CONCRETE FINISHING AND CURING LS 1 $3,500.00 $3,500.00 Subtotal: $50,430.00 PART D- MASONRY No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price D1 UNIT MASONRY LS 1 $4,237.00 $4,237.00 Subtotal:$4,237.00 PART E- METALS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price E1 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS LS 1 $42,917.00 $42,917.00 Subtotal: $42,917.00 PART F-WOOD, PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITE No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price F1 ROUGH CARPENTRY LS 1 $21,500.00 $21,500.00 Subtotal: $21,500.00 PART G-THERMAL&MOISTURE PROTECTION No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price G1 SEALANTS LS 1 $4,638.00 $4,638.00 Subtotal:$4,638.00 PART H-OPENINGS CIVCAST RFB 6346 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations 23181 Report Created On:4/23/2025 7:04:22 PM No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price H1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS LS 1 $5,500.00 $5,500.00 H2 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES LS 1 $250,000.00 $250,000.00 H3 SLIDING AUTOMATIC&IMPACT RATED LS 1 $55,000.00 $55,000.00 SLIDING ENTRANCES H4 GLAZING LS 1 $15,000.00 $15,000.00 Subtotal: $325,500.00 PART I- FINISHES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 11 CEMENT PLASTERING LS 1 $240,000.00 $240,000.00 12 CERAMIC TILING LS 1 $10,396.00 $10,396.00 13 PAINTING LS 1 $310,252.00 $310,252.00 Subtotal: $560,648.00 PART J-SPECIALTIES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price J1 PLAQUES, DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND LS 1 $2,500.00 $2,500.00 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE J2 LED MESSAGE CENTER LS 1 $38,000.00 $38,000.00 J3 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES LS 1 $200,000.00 $200,000.00 Subtotal: $240,500.00 PART K- ELECTRICAL No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price K1 ELECTRICAL LS 1 $55,800.00 $55,800.00 Subtotal: $55,800.00 PART M- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price M1 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES LS 1 $16,500.00 $16,500.00 M2 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS LS 1 $36,646.00 $36,646.00 M3 SOIL PREPARATION LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 RFB 6346 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations 23181 Report Created On:4/23/2025 7:04:22 PM M4 SODDING LS 1 $37,632.00 $37,632.00 M5 PLANTS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $90,778.00 PART N-ALLOWANCES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price N1 BONDS AND INSURANCE AL 1 $85,000.00 $85,000.00 N2 UNFORESEEN BUILDING CONDITIONS AL 1 $100,000.00 $100,000.00 DURING CONSTRUCTION N3 RECONDITION FOUNTAIN AL 1 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 N4 GRAPHIC CONCEPTS(MURAL AL 1 $25,000.00 $25,000.00 INSTALLATION) Subtotal: $220,000.00 PART M- BID ALTERNATE 01 No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price M1 WATERING FOR INSALLED LS 1 $20,138.00 $20,138.00 LANDSCAPING Subtotal: $20,138.00 CIVCAS, RFB 6346 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations 23181 Report Created On:4/23/2025 7:04:22 PM ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA NAME ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DATE Addendum No. 1 04/22/2025 22:59:05 PM Addendum No.2 04/22/2025 22:59:04 PM Addendum No.3 04/22/2025 22:59:03 PM Addendum No.4 04/22/2025 22:59:03 PM Addendum No. 5 04/22/2025 22:59:02 PM CIVCAS, RFB 6346 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations 23181 Report Created On:4/23/2025 7:04:22 PM REQUIRED DOWNLOADS TYPE NAME DOWNLOAD DATE Plans Drawings/Plans 4/7/2025 10:01:16 AM Invitation To Bid Invitation to Bid: RFB 6346 4/4/2025 10:16:44 AM Addenda Addendum No. 1 4/4/2025 10:18:48 AM Addenda Addendum No.2 4/4/2025 10:19:10 AM Addenda Addendum No.3 4/4/2025 10:19:48 AM Addenda Addendum No.4 4/22/2025 5:58:42 PM Addenda Addendum No. 5 4/22/2025 5:58:49 PM 00 30 01 BID FORM Project Name: LA RETAMA CENTRAL LIBRARY EXTERIOR RENOVATION [BOND 2022] Project Number: 23181 Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: Joseph Johnson,Assistant Director,Construction Management Designer:ITurner I Ramirez Architects By its signature below,Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement,acknowledges receipt of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees,if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: Crawford Henrichson &Crawford Construction LLC (full legal name of Bidder) Signature; (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name: Na (printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title: Director (title of person signing Bid Form) Attest: (signature) State of Residency: Texas Federal Tx ID No. 88-2210391 Address for Notices: 16775 Addison Rd., Suite 350 Addison, TX 75001 Phone: 214-247-6632 Email: nbrown@chc-gc.com Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 1 of 4 LA RETAMA CENTRAL LIBRARY EXTERIOR RENOVATION-23181 [Addendum 002] Rev 8/2019 E SaowaS 6uu88ui6u3 jo luawpedad 213A00 Co O o 15 F o �$ o o Z3211 0 Ml 11 V o .4ss Y 3 1 1 H a d St1X31 aN 8 N Ild� £ m FO ? �' 1151i1H�SfIdaO�'153H�NbW0�S09 ~ `o m LL wva I a3Nani IlSIaHO SndaO�l AllO .— o (D o L (aaoa 0 ) 0 ON32i 2i0Ri31X3 o m g Noli—s3a ne 3iva I ON Nolsln38 Nolidla— ne 3iva oN Nolsln?• C N U " r W W C r_ x N x Z z z a a = w CD ¢Co 14 a z $ W 2; w > a g �� o ;; U Sp �G Nzo 2 Q LU W a� ISM 4O z z w M � _8 g M I � s3 6 T wmCzT Z iRl444 W;; o- x - X RFl W 9�tlgG CN CN C) N N a Q Wx 6 4 g Q 0047�d0 = J m Q W ��� c♦�) Q z °° N 7 vJ O N m W O Z L 5 _ �1 a_ ui W a " } Q Q w > o w w o J 77 O z ¢ L U W a J z U F— LU r— M W R a m Q w W o o w W wE o (D U y o d c $ ya E o a] E o o c_ m AVMOtl08r3ddn' O U 9 A _ tl HVON 0 _ d E Q y o 3 0 o rn g m tlnH ONtll o d o o m o a E m � x a- m a OZI Advo 2 ma 8 m y 3 m 3o 0 i 2 m ya � c agm Z VI 31NV Om Q U `5 o m d c c a Z > v m m m a`� a M. o w Za m a�`i ro m E i�doE o m _ ca E� d me u`� OC ° nca mo'u. o o a a w E« 9 N Z m e _m FU) NaU s E! o saOwag6uuaeuiBu3}alueupedea SONRI30NM o " SVA3l o USIHHO SndHO`J io A113 m `— o Ua 'f,0 S1�311H7tltl z IO"LXl'I1sr&o S(VJMM'1s3H3NtlYMQ9 N o zaaiwva I aaNanl \ I (ZZOZ ONOO)NOUVAON321210IHIM CO C 6� 0 o W d „ 5~ AbV'dBll 1"IN30 dW`AH t9 a NOLLdV]530 19 3va ONNq— Ngldltl�534 A9 3LYO 'ON N!MSI/dN W Sao K 'wog ■ ' <�=g ■ e LU Le �¢a ■ o 5N aa� U yY U. N r e3�sr ■ IN z ■ MO. �a p ova — I z z oo lu r n �t ¢a 5w ■ ■ ■ AV z o J t LL ■ w� ■ AN 25 o sa�wag 6uua(a�u/i6/u�3}a lueugiedea S1dH30X3 Z 10Z SH1 o ' sw 3 w T 4 gb .....,.,,..................: 1 r 5 1 3 3 1 1 8 fill I o CD USIHHO Snda00 io A1I0 1MLXI'US1LH'JS(WMW'1s3HONVYM9W cn o ZMIWa I a3Nanl (ZZOZ ONOO)NOIIHAONM b0WRX3 s ~� A2imon AWIN30 MUM T a wouatp53o ne atw ox N>Isuan raouaixs3a we 3<va oxrAlSln3a $ E E a 5p . - F �8ge F it MPH Hill s� € o� �$ �� I � $�� / �€e$ �efr � f EB�€�y��Aa H. ®€ ® e� g x H.eg $Sty ezm = x HH H. UI Hui H. M11 a t e a 6 83 a .� X $a u �'` gi-e, 4gi - t S E ® e zti iws gg EEz 4 E_ € .Eg _gesso; � � se88 i " e fc' � °3 � s�E, ;-���g6®ci ���=9 ��� f=rfa " 5I ot B"'102 €c'aH = a 6 a P � 9 be - �sg �4a�a� eae®eEsfi a gels i § a z; � EL .� a"e E I< H nx i' s pg _ & e" MINIM $ ®Q sx�a s g sa E= gE �s l q i $v =€ � e§ xsE� j e JIG aE in fi§ � .`a e $ L--- g s e z a 3! s � � L IL --_ � g@ ; gyp( r-- y �tl � 'NIA � s He Doi $ e�RRn' 3 sg _B;�g, g�.�$$9 s - <gm ms nnx E m - & Nltl ?✓ i R��C � pe � a g,- ��e � g � � � 5 � R e�! H1 3 O x e 6 a E WTI ax Y�@ aS ao; $� r r . �€e' ai€fig$sE�, ILI ; N ES lull! �`� ME HIM $ a x Q➢ 15 I . Hp sOfi a P s� f$� � x m�fil a 1 ce ms N � � a i1 fi $i ;gx�s �3sz"Es i §1 1 Lq p 11 ? ae sx g€ I g of a 4 € ;€ E g • ; ;€E i g ;�' _ �� 3 ++� � �_ 9s - e � 9s � �e� �: •� a �= @� � 1 HIM f E� E � �e E � ge �s a E 4 $ of $G s e " PxnBs� H g5 �� =Ea g, �6 i �+9e�p �` ��Hgfie a_a aB �" 3. 1 iae= B e� �'=£n a=e $' 2E Q € a a ! Ba 56� a_��'e a3 f a;r s y� x�E ax® gee& =9WHINHHO�"` f g � "s^=� g i� �` mfib�eE a�� � ip < e��€$�¢ 1H1 a €�` 4s=® "_ �r. �a �Fiz'',2 E �_® e %ys� a " 9 �� l�'e-e2aa��q':Ix� e� if N � €@ �_ 1 9 a1 � ae6e� e e € spa• $Hui x� oH; � y g� xm s,g �.Wa-a� �xsfigs � ��aIM �� � � a �sfl� F€ ss ��s ��€ a� ag g 1_�'m a we3 <gme1<e� <a�m9�F pa<,m� <m <�F a <m :m <mEP &o a xa .. e Run Ao a §E es � ag � 3� E a �• 1 JHH eazn $ � � e € � �fE dos ��z gE � -[ a a Li ' � ;�A a ®afi xe ae n ;_ �E i I � S �. • 3 a gi � a loam 81! j` �% p ma s _ all ! a �E` i � e$aE 90 a n qq a ; a ge n F 'e H e � '€ a i` u Elii<U"� -$ ';sQsil !1'H gg E8ixg ®� @�gn '� >,�� 5e � ull ref 1111 >a cx x a fifi ase e�"e�y �"4 'i� esa�z � P� � E $ ia-_as ; s a Ei 2 =� xeE{F� jFs1 PE. ' a� s '„Soso e e R Ea;a:®��Qe e" Es ��ra=5;$ie Fsg g�� Rho ��e e1= �€ c '-if i m < m e�_a�H R < Vim" a�wlx�<�mer<�<�®�<am� <Ia<me�<m o sa�wag 6uua(a�u/i6/u�3}a lueugiedea S1dH30X3 Z IOZ SH1 o ' � r 5 1 3 3 1 1 8 fill I o CD USIHHO SndHO`3 io AlIO WKLXI'US1LH'JS(WMW'1s3HONVYMWO d. o ZMIWa I a3mnl (ZZOZ ONOO)NOUVAONM 2JOIHRX3 s ~� Ammon AWIN30 VHV13M%9 a wouat�o ne atw ox xasuaa rtouaixs3a we 31va ox wisin3a Ea = E a g"J E ril 11 RM ME �� � 4 a Im! n� » ��e�i.s Hum i` k s@ ®�,e fl a� &wi=e�" FE g E_ c r a l gg€ € 56= €EE=�a. EF=w 'Into!o f..s Pse Hun aa a® n u=�l 8E nSn�, Mum ��"s P� € P =Fe$ e €. gp_ S3r Eilf� � g�as 4es°e; ��;= Ha � 6re2=ea��`€a - -g�?i , 6raq `Mal" n n" a< =Ee f `a �l �p�a�g� I'aa� € E �e_g- �g 9 9 gg - E a kEa g$S asf ' Erb= fle€ 9sFE =Eg €'°�`a gds lie? €s s E€ a` ash €es9�®sly ae 2® �€� a �_" � � �<ml �vEF<abm. w�a€ma <�EmE <Em.,ewPF< ilk A�`s v€�lfsF Fa�_€€$`g� �JsRag� 1ga=a $ W�: &apEAfislE aliI x�l§€_ €Q§§pp 'siY2t atE raa g-�FiaE� I.ny�€S;eg, � Xrr °Minsn Ulu in'; R lit 1 l €M W " �1111 ❑1 - a. a ----3----,J e so eP€ pal , fs -if } a HAI s� - �` . a ke sm' I e a . I���i 48 eke➢ - f p�E $. �E F � ---- alot! � EH 4E m l Via fig"- H w 4 9za = �a _ ��= aids` E € §8srsu,�°o E➢ !€ " s� aF lilt; $Fe 1 €1 1U a HI inn E $€5 E auE a€' € I;3seg fi �nx I g l EEg�B- 8 _ � lg<l #Eea Ya$ye �_ aglaEf��l sA l O- sea €€`l .�F af°,E$eclss� IzPE aE_ l I- g wPgeve I€��F�� Q tg €�gg, � a gN € Ell E F=ag B� S �EaE alfi'gn �i-Pe�®gF s €� 8' a J � Pgll °E'� .a€E' ci= =i $= 3sa ggg '$^gg "�IIc Ejut " k aP. s§ �� � H�§ rlla�i qq} s Stl c= as P e Pb § S°4 F 01 €`2 ww�K� wrnsu� g 8 E g A `°� a l ¢ g warm gp a- � a s ai _ I ei 4s Es x a Pi -® „ P p €fie CIF AN!sew � � die sag= -g lu, € € € aye® � s'��H1 egg l � s� E �"yE�ia 3 9 esg€ngg ww'�"`rxaun � €a�g".aY:y_ la la ®;� s t y*INNcgs E 1111ay$�. s `F€_ FP_-gW�e�= -xc �€gs 'M� ege_. g s 3 =agy8 -l9 lEE a la= Fg� as E€ fiee - s Sfi°a re-gE 11, # v _ Hui �HN Ul�'ga'�=g x -r®®rza� � ri.R dal =aa vEl S -teams e € <aR�•E Mf� fun g E" � �i � _• � �� i $l s � eon �. a i€ a e s" a gg s �a a irea "EB lll aF lfi a ai €HI F � d> I s $l ev ® 5 - .e Efi.E rs a €re" aif F_<. �P■ E. fia°gyp , sin!Fe f € � g��p� gg ��e e'a�i'Ag Palm Hui RH el ��=P�'a!HIM �� § gl-1 P ��EyEH #g - - '1 = tp saOwaS6uuaaui6u310jueuWedea N011`dW210dN1 cfl O w T4 3000'SNO11`dIA32189V(INVSIOBWAS _ " „..,..,. SVX3i "d. o Ua sb'fd S1�311H7tltl \ I cj) � HMO Snda00 io A118 W"M'uSIaNOJSMeW'1e3VYON 009W � o Z3a1wva I Muni (ZZOZ ONO8)NO1iVAON3N 2101a31X3 s ~� CO A2it21811 WHIN30 VVYVAH V1 a NOLLdtl]530 19 3vo "ONNq— Ngldltl�534 A9 3LYO 'ONNAa/aN n p Z < € 0 £ F Q 0 gwy§ vi z_ a W 'yy y�' s 1, 9 $umua _ z W SEA � `A 5 8 98 -9 Q 9g m C^ `� $ n� ¢ O � `g y 2 0 9 1 � e Z a ��" P.— luUf �q 0 Z R € J 9C�8�1Id80*2H y�"a 5 m"- 0 wa6 asa a ¢ NJ„0 old\ r y 5: �g� �� sag X�H�mWm �w w Ewa$ a S wH H. HIMos „e Vag � Es. s �q S a $ a4 gg$jp!ilf s€ a � O EEC W E H gnu $sgj5 e4 " fig 33333333� ir 88 h 2?9 �$ �'g � ;Yf $ � � ;2-1 �'� 3333333 � ' e >Y s �:gg -a F �.� - y"'Ww s=U rc " S2 Ug$$w �cUi cUi� �� Jq ,,i Qad �M-tm] w o c w 8 rc��`� F �� HER ri r Scs5r F0 �toow F ru 5LL-°doz o��� aww x$wg � �$$$5 a H H. �oo��w o�w �w� R =wwww� ��awa�a��aa���ga ��g�===���s��g �����HH���H��wH��y� a F,000�� »>� q Y o>So o�oo o�$ wwwa .,., m m z O � > o 9 i$ S w 0000 g '�e�=�g � 3 mg g 33o= « NGff H & o$ a� w S& - wow wg s €oo g � _ e = s wwW w�LL� LLwwwwLL�ass � aa � _ _ asSwas§ Nsss ¢ w wwwwwwwww-wwww ��LL�ii��LL�3������ _ __ __ _ �t i 4c_L'�tY�f3�s�������`�� � a Ed S aN =<k's$G�w = o $$ &So og d F� �=ii��� wwo szsoos�z - u ry<- oo = �a= GIs b=o w�ww y o��R� w =_ Gm�� ~$�� v=. 3w=-w� �SS&� i �=s w � Nw'J w39xmGGG == �< � ���' a ��g� s wgw�ooyx€� �� �5�=Nws <�s asss <a��« �mmmmmm ssssmmm o 00 0o owwwwwwww� w Jmmm= u `.... =a u-...... www <-- Y Noo wwwwwww b�� <ss's«�����< mmm mmmsmmm ����� � � �� ����� .............00 SaO!Ng Buuaaul5u 0 Uam oda ,a I s 3I u a CD SVXII 1 S310N LINO v o N "o S i 0 3 1 H`aa v I1SIaHO Sf1db001 AllO � ~ m Q lOVSC Xi sndaoo'1S 3HONMNI00209 zaaiwna I aaNanl �,� C� a pPo S~� �a (ZZOZ ON08)NOIlb'AON3U UOIU31X3 w m o a, e AHVH811 IVb1N3O VWVl3d VI 0 Noudiaosea ee eivaoN Naan3a Noudiaosaa we eiwoN NoisNea as -�€ - 65 - p - o a - �s� aLLNp �w a�b�a Oy -1 u� - - oY� of xa wboE2 h3; �o - z6ap � o w 5a mL2 Fpz_ - Ei - = n- aim OFo - - _x�w - o � O _ _ okm"op�o op`x CW�o ado Iry `�`�a - oow - - _�y= �£4aa2�Gm�� �w p maoQ = - o€ - €�em8`o'o�€ ��� - 'oz ohm a6z mkt 8400 �o - m� ��ma���„x, � � - - � No~ma�wN3a��wN��oz i�Vz�Y`wr� g��ao -- �z - aYz� - a5 pk� 06_ o�o`� wzxiGi ��wx��p ax 30 p�po�oz - ¢���� _��owos�o�x.,ow< _ �Y�oo<�000� G E -oY� ommz�wmVao�o� F o �m`x'm�oh�mG�`�`za�EmFmoz3 _ _ O� w m y m e h m m O� - o uln a 8 Tap �p -6 = � N aQ,z o oho LLm = �R EGa FAG a E_ EZy _� �yppawa`W' - - - G - og z _ - - - - �_�a�= T - - - � � -w�`� - _ 99 Kp '^Gsa Oodp _ sso _ a54 z a - _ - _ _ K� zpm o Kn �LLx _ _ Oo _ ____ _ _ Q��Ya - `"gyp N - - - - _ p h _wgxow — - 3o�p�o��ao�w�ap _ Y N 10 Sa91Ala Buuaaul5u 0 Uam oda ,a I s 3l u a Nz CD SVX31 II S310N 1A10 v o N 1 a 3 1l H Ntl % 0 � m I1SIHHO SnddOO to AJO lOVSC Xi snd3oo'1S 3HONMNI00209 3 U o Z381HYN I a3Nanl � � ( a (ZZOZ ON08)NOIlb'AON3U UOIU31X3 w m o e AHVH8I1 IVHiN3O VWVl3d VI Noudiaosea ee eivaoN rvaan3a rvoudiaosaa we eiwoN NoisNea ¢ - �YG� LLB" EawN LL w�ow���o=mwo� f�ppJ� - m�a 12 - „�., - oho - p�a -- - o � p�o o� -ado - - >> - - - oo cooMdo�owo" - - - - m - S -Z Q - �m Qa _ �'�2o - o" _ _ C - - - - - - �Gm U'�p - —23H- - - - - K� - - - Q� U o s� - - - U F 3� saovuag buua VXI oluamueaa4 31f143HOS ONUS31 ONV S310N 11AIO v o N a� I _ z m S 1 0 ltl H ^ I ' o zaaiHna aaN I1SIHHO S1ddOO to AlO OV8C xl1AdHO sndaoo'1S 3HONMNI00209 U o, ND a (ZZOZ ON08)NOliVAON3U a01a31X3 N o m o ^' e AHVH811 IVb1N3O VWVl3d VI Noudiaosea ee e G roN NJM Noudiaosaa we eiw oN NoisNea Z 3 - �tv�� mH = oa w a �ta - <� ___ �a - o��� o - - - — ��� 9 _op� w �w5. a - - - a �LL NNE az w ass - opo op _ -------w�a - mho-- -w5€��soe. oLLoao�opamka zo mp�d a - - -o o o o o 0o - m�pz � � - G� oG mho T s - - b a � �m - _ <Uu - - _B n- -- o o x9Z o=- �F- U -- _ - Yz- - y� ow - - _ - d'z - _ Zw - mho saoi agBuuaauiBu3 JO uamueaa4 NV/ d MdV?190d01'8 SNOLION00 9NIISIX3 v o ,1- SVX31 0 � � N m 13WHO SndHOO to AilO [MlXl'I1513HOsnd9os'IS 3CNVwo05o9 rn � o U o Z38INVU N3NNf11 (ZZOZ ON08)NOIIVAON3d a01a31X3 w o m AM8111VHIN3O VINVAH VI NOI1dl d A3 31tl0 'ON Ngjl NOI1dIi1— A3 31W 'O�3il pi3a Z 3Q — 3a W - - - a a 8aI tlm° Q LLhN + 3 3 w N T A N C A H U A S T m ?s I I I I �I I xx J 11 W a li I = � � �Illa�ll J- N� ®N� .%P� g � - WTH O \ o N _ 0 C , 1 N I J t- -�f W I r i - +— Is 0ZINav0 S_ J cC saovua. , ,, . sBuiaaaul5u3 o uaw edaa CD NOUIOW30 o fSVX31si031iH7ati, Z381HYN I a3Naf11 (ZZOZ ON08)N011VA0N3li a01a31X3 I1sIaHO sndaoO>o ulO av V o s co Y. '{�� ^'` AHVH811 lVa1N30 VHV13a VI NOUIa0s30 A9 31tl0 'oN Na SYA3tl NOLLdIa0s3a AA 31W 'oN N0191�3a _ Z ° p s q qv N -- N a 76 E - `- sa is v n H V ON1 IN soo4oaxF - zs o yry o W _ QZOw o�o�Wop�� IR ° �Yp pow m ua ........ hd � a as \ m cc \k3 G V J G J \ \ m ®so say Goo I - - - -- —————— W I. 1Ill ILL N m saovuaS buuaaul5u3�o juawa joda4 NV1 d 311 S O o t o s.i 0.3,1,i,H..�,.a.ti, SVX31 N Z381HY! 1213N21f11� I1SIaH0 Sndb00 to AllO OVRL Xi(ZZOZ ON08)aN011VA0N3liv100209 a01a31X3 � 3 V o s N Co a ^' AHVH811 lVa1N30 VHV13a VI NOUIa0930 AB 31tl0 'oN NaaA3tl NOLLdIa0S3a AA 31W 'oN N0191�3a z �$s o Z _ U � o � ' W lz 0 � o — _ T. s s 1S tlf1Htl�1 �N� W — — Ts,LTL � ■ ao a m� - ' m Ww 3 N O Z �m J J N u w x z s a - a z a W 9 9 9 op J e e e ---------- -----J ■ ■ 11 r N °a s s s w Is 0ZI m m v 0 s u ' m SaOING Buuaaul5u 0 Uam oda ,a I s 3 u a CD 10211NOO WN01SNINCI 311S o f SVXII "o s i 0 3 1 1 H`a W. I1SIaHO Sf1db0O l ulO � ~ z Lf1 m _ Q lOVSC Xi sndaoo'IS 3HONv V100205 3 V o Z381HYN 1 a3Nanl o o CNN ONOB)NOIIVAON3U UO1a31X3 w m e AHVH811 lvdiN30 VWVl3a VI NOUIa0930 IS 31tl0 'oN NaaA3tl NOLLdIa0S3a AA 31W 'oN N0191�3a Z K z e W HHP °p o -_ Z _ _- 0 mNOLLm is vn V3N'Vl N- o a W 3 F = LLI m J N a w x �c s a - a z a m o u o � J SD SQL SOl \o�. 1❑ a ---®------------- � New r N s �a s s s w 1S 0zIaatl0 s u ' m Saovua UUI1aaUl5U o uam eda � ,a I s 3 u a NVId JNIOVaJ o ; o s.i 0.3,1,i,H..�,.a.ti. SVX31 <1O° Z381HYN I a3Naf11 I1sIaHO sndaoO>o uIO OVRL Xi(ZZOZ ON08)aN011VA0N3liv100209 a01a31X3 m 3 V o s N m a '{�� ^'` AHVH811 lVa1N30 VHV13a VI NOUIa0s30 IS 31tl0 'oN NaaA3tl NOLLdIa0S3a AA 31W 'oN N0191�3a Z K w N �$s \) 6 0 — ST 1S vnHtl_ONVI N N TANCAHUA Y bb n r � ca 3 W 3 Z fl U F I 3 VI a m ¢g N \ J LL o W 2 U V 7 ° I r R N N & s s I S<..0 z N N V�0 *S m saoindag 6uuaaui6u3 JO juamueda4 II NVId`JNldt/?19 m SVX31 z _ m F m 5 1 3 3 lal H tl tl I 13WHO SndHOO 10 A110 v J U o Z38INVU M3Nmni oroelxi usiaH snaaou'IS 3H Ntiviousos UI o (ZZOZ ON08)NOliVAON3a a01a31X3 w o m AM8111VHIN30 VINVAH VI L NOI1dl d A3 31tl0 'ON Ngjl NOI1dld— A3 31W 'O�3il 4 4 'W Q N 6 wj — — LLI O Z - - lz —pa ;t000000 w IH Ti Z ry o o a I a Z U u5 fq SaOI g buiaaaul5u3 jo juawa jodad �p CD I SlIVl30 Sf103NV113OSIW v o N o s. ..,31.I,H.�,.a.� SVX31 0 <v° Z38INV8 83N8n1 I1SIHH`J Sndb00 to AJO OVRL Xi(ZZOZ 4N08)aN0I1VA0N3li 001a31X3 z ,.s �J N m ^' AHVH8I1 lVHiN30 VWVEH VI Noudiaosea 1e 7— roN Nasn3a rvoudiaosaa we eiw oN Noisv`ea Z o cc w � Z md� z W a.� J W d IN LU F w ¢�LU p 0 � 6 F Z IIIp yW00 a J w 53�ad,��a�MN,yM3a�s � o 6-9 `b o o W �� <aa C� W O a Q 0 m /\ 5 0 V_� a Q z C- o N— N11 3 W W J III=�=III= W p 6 Uj " W G - III FpZ 9_ W W OC Z - a a z� oda a z C1p pduj K N W Z F V 5� O C a o Q a W W z 6 6 y p IL r w V .ssox a KLU o �w <s N n m � W ao E� Nld 3d _ PV cN5 - IF I III > oap p W w W W r L1.1Q W W - IIII LL� CAW F IILI J J W IIII J LLI In v j O V ZLLI _ V> SaO!NgS Buiaaaul5u3Io juaw oda(] CD SVX31 II SlIVi30 Sf03Nb1130SIW v o N S10311H7W % 0 0-) <�m z381HYN I a3Nanl I1SIHH0 Snddd0010A1I0 (ZZOZ ON08)aHO N011bAON3li a01a31X3 z s �J N m ^' AaVa81l lVb1N3�VWVl3a tll 0 NOUI osea 1e 7— rory rvasn3a rvoudiaosaa we eiw ory rvoisNea Z K w N �$s rL _c�or EP 0 - ova _ wow xL - oQ 5 W — O 0 6 _ G mg6 " a N � 'A k9K AN, 1 �"a � m o - Daw T n �' � � -ter �� \ W 6 H a� _ O a� 0 6 o dz Viz. N +Q 1-0 J—I T IWII F �¢ v V o o mpm oW Cal 6 Z� po �a� � �a >� � a� a M SaouvaS 6uua8ui6u3 jo juawyedap NVId 3dVOSONV1 V' s1O311HONV SVX31 38 PtIVI1 H3NHnek I1S1dHO sndHO3 10 ALIO lMLX1'LLSPJHOsndHOO'1S3H3lM009w n o 3 ^^ (ZZOZ 4N09)NOIlVA0N3a 2i01b31X3 o am g zo 'Vr MY89I1 WHA30 VWVl32J V1 1mudMO530 Ae alva 'ON NOISIn3a Ig11dItlOS30 AB 31ra 'a+Homnaa W310NMIW93d0OSSMD'A36'SNU30N3AYd'000 'J'tl SdOL9l14 l yy �a d6 �' C",i ter` Cii ii xd r`c W a a y u Z c S 0 m x =w z a ao9 ° I3o2 LJ.J I Jm oo a Kd�� ao�ow MO ® QSw �g < �$a°O6 p "�°d�io sn°om ��u w WU� z&Wuuo�p-o o, < - ou u` 000s �®�� Wmo o wmF °dpssssos .®o= ®o ssss a _ =s °z $ 5 W zoy /I" z wp m o W z ° w ;wow K 3m w N m m �z a ° a LL ° zom M w z a cx7 rc cYi>w a w § a a y>o a a uma� S a o a o ° z x is vnHVONtl1 N z w m..Q...... w_ m o a ° z p 0 ,0 z ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ E F :•: iii ®_b1115® � Iu ¢¢ ;:;:;:;.:;:•:•: z LU d z o zc '<z r F r00 aFQ OO° , inmz NKmm HLLr H._ A G �� • _ �� 4 � ywwxwz0 a ❑ ---- z z > O K a •: iii z ;: �i o ❑1 ❑ '�4 w z lit ll IIIII❑nIIII J I IIIII❑nIIIII IIIIIIp�IIIII o ••�••'•'• Ili n 5 � i l � 'J ••••�fm III lit UggZZ 6nWO x,TFq WQ 3x°w =m _ �w o w w � °� I K r a a 5 a� o ` 3 0 a z > 3 C IL .................. ........ LL1 x J Q w `) dJ w Uo e F w U) Jy saowag6uueeu16u3;oluawyedep S11`d13G V S31ON 3d`dOSGNV1 m $®dX31 LSYBL X1 o go CD1311H 11SMHO SnaOO'1S 3HOt"00 SOO c �z 3aiwv8 a3Nl '1S�iF^Sfda0n 10 Alln (ZZOZ 4N08)NOIlbAON3212101a31X3 g a ol Aa1 t 911 lV�1N30`dVWAH dl NpIdIM�530 AB 31V4 '777 MOI1dIM AB - 'OMMOISIA3M Ie31tlMMM-W19d00SSStlMO'A3M'SW130M3AVd'Gav '0'M SWmit l ¢a dew c�ca� w p Q N z. N m Q t °t p goa 1- —III III�� g �w g IIII IIII111111" o o f `� $ y m �' u u u mi�i� I.- [O III-t LU p aW 5 5 § § 5 OILL Q a y 3 3 3 3 3 y ° J W 3 w y Wa —III: U m F pz III_ Zw ti - aco a o. "•� 111 l pig z 2 J WW w ap wz _ -° Waa' s= a = IrF, Zw ,o�EaE n g II oIf TLi --a� - z ° w =11 �W c e w s9E _ - a °'na �o 3n�c° ME m m m- E o - - v t.io # L �aaao y nz vs A O 2m zoo z { } 3Z €A agn `o SQL4`o52� a6a •° E A'4=a H n mmn E" Z-d, °w o 'I „�"�Eo a `off -ems€wm ° "_�� III � � m wo wW g ;w "Y'„a;a 'Eac Q o> �a II- flIg " 3aQ3s Ta== t- o m s gmH =11 iww � ws .S� �m a �9c = - Ha„ III- w x o c2 'd A� m ms;,-a�A'w a°E s p=a a° `; —II >w €i zwa 1 ni= `°'aa�° III= aUEwY�' x ` o� sQ sv° z gt EeA�s �.� poH3 —II a" x��mg� aX /1 is �A ��2$� -a w dvotsx�Amgmd -mr_gw map= �� III- ay g moa wa 8 w �3 €` as= �p wa � �tnJ¢8o o s`=o„� w BN ETA€g ap m'Enga'aE',g �" o��o;rc: W g6 Q9�EG m iqn= 2v5 «,a no6€ w °'arc�owrcYrc '� 3� 5 u w a.`PT '` ooa$9p�1°„we Ed ma'Awn aY�zs��uww� - 5gpb"m °wln8 /1 �$ gym? 'vac-= ma5>u cW °=ms- �3� owzy3 one gc�- o � now saowaS6uuaaul6u3JOjuawuedaa SlNil(]'8 S310N 3dVOSONVI = M31 g C N sia3iiHoav I1SIHHOsndHOO AlIO rn rn e 3NIWV21 183Naf11 008LX'LLStlH�e dtlOJ')33HJNtlW07S08 o m o a �ZZOZ ON08)NOIIVAON3a NOINKX3 l bV2i811 lV2ilN30 t/WV1321 HlSo N rrrrr..........��� rawiax3a Ae 3Lva oN noisin3a Nouaia°s3a Ae 3Lva 'a nasin3a d cWy� fed � W 6 S Q w0 203 �w � uQ�� � to 1 Illllll�" z Illll FIR- 0 5g�= =LL 3 How. O wPo°�E8§I' 12 S \ III W3mso � isO z �<°aY �faw s N z3���Q�o °FW4 z N �i g�ya�8$ 3 �€ .ZZ —III U w°rosm€ � `�� �I Z W12, �o ° � m . III w d� 3G"§w o�w« m IN _ �!Snx 3 az€ylpi E x� IIIIIIRII---11f � I Z gH�rv_=i+,pm°N°° a — 1 IIL II vJ I I1-1I _ w Cd OP _I.-:. ZD _JIIz LLI VA%/AA%VA% EI_I I I� 00 I iiiiiiiiiiiTH zQ \i z p \! LL y LL w o \\ J s l w Y IL3 t w III—I III III= > w —I III III=11 ¢ /\\//. wow w It: 1 1= a¢ \ \ \ gm z 1=11 wW off Q�w r' III- " - a o =1_I Z z \/ Lu II— \/\ p " l =1 III II ~ w \ \ \ g s }II II III 1 = ULU p ° ti` III III III III— o.w U w ) -1 oz o - — — �Fp i' Z¢= X i'e° o N aw LL z� $m w 0 o a oa� 5 � O�" a a <s= 5 a saO!l 6uua8ul6u3 jo juawyedap NVId NOUVONHI SVX31 0 m s 110 3 1 1 H 0 8 V IISIHHO sndHOO I AlIO Q' ❑ 38 HVI1 U3NMf11 U ^^ �ZlOZ dOiBI%'LLSMHaSadtlaa'1S3HaNrVaaS00 NOG)NOIIVAON3a o KIH3IX3 R p a g •Vr A21` 811 It HA3O HWVl32J V1 aouenbs3a Ae aiva va raisinsa raueiaasaa xe azra a+Homnaa 53WZ C a3oBo 'J'tl s7A7i91ro l UW� � wx Sa C 4P{ rc7 �� "s:'� ❑ o b ZZ v m o G = b z ° _> ❑ w 0 ❑d a> 'a a 3 Q WO O in UI f 2 m �x V oUwO U UKUyg ti ❑ ? nF�Ua a OO W>> zhOS zmW UW aKx ' O x O>a O w O0 jQz >? bf �IS qg Z pN❑❑ = K i❑ o Np j zz. Z p 'w wa w _ u,3 a z_x x x x _ Zoo ao ®* m N m 0_ z N F a z y � a of a o o5 0 0 �it U O 0 NZ pm -0-0 � 0 0 gg ❑- o r° ❑ ; P m rc a o a hw rc �o 0 ❑ � a � ma 'is vnHVA.IN m M — — — — 0 III I I -- — — m p� ;• Y1 I I I I I I S -- ` II IIII - v 'yr,_ IIIII h p O n 1 i� IIIIIIuI I ®lJ®® p �4�- ,c I�+I III I 4==__a____�___� ;_. •�-r = Al I. E13 H _ ~ �Ie• io I I I I + � •r cL IIIIII IIII __ y IIII IAM IIII ty`- ` p O o y\ I'1 III o k;.='\ rl ;+? m IIIIIII t z# r 3m ❑ s � \ i z,e II I> n ❑� , n a r t ❑nII z o Wry i� ;III �i a0 ❑O Fi R'J�;jC'\` mN 0 3 ® IlLlll ❑i N a 5 i'�- IIIIIII rc +n' IIIII I IIII O e m n E H h` III rc � Jp - " .vn o a a n J '2it n I l o e ill a omum a o � � � Jr ❑ ❑ o o o o 0 0 0 r 0 3 o J O p 'i a a w p> i1 00 d �w m ❑ h '`i Z Yi �..V/�♦ 1 i yy \ J > ❑ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ O O wF m j y .�� � EW C Ro �N <❑00— saow8S6uu88ul6u3JOjuawpedaa SWil(I'8 S310N NOUVJIddl c M31 g N s 113 3 1 i H o a v I1SIaH0 Sf1da00 lLlO ° 6' _ 3211WV21 1213Naf11 008LX'LLStlHJS d OJ'1S3YJNtlY0JS08 N CD � a �ZZOZ et aN08)NOIIVAON3a NON11X3 a l bV2i8111V2JA30 VVIVA3 l Vl rrrrr..........��� rawlaxsa 'qi IAISIA3tl NOIIdIao530 AB 3ltld 'ONHois— AB3Gtl0 dW� fed 6 E $12 „ ig c� 5 m a a o III— a I III I— = EEW s m 0 3 IIII asu Em„ ;° A; co V j p I -a W T. 1.2. c =a,�„ = nL L R (n ia o g Q w s5c- Ev` m --_- cE E_ $o..c =n my `mn = ZU p w =mkt'' 3� �rn �'uaw==o on° mq Eim =�Wom �m `60m ° maw= ��sn° ddd ; I 11= W €dmN °E;o „g° a8Es�` wa= �ogr� �� t I =11 a o� ma�Ed`�am. amn���a amw daac�am€.v_mS s.ane�.o -6 6 W= m a � � ==� , w sa - D E �c .. -s as6 ; w °wma EASoga � _o �dE = > t -o„m000 E m_ L p 4r I I—I 11= s§� O p U tlw� m�i O o O $ ooa z l - �m - �tl x= a Y $ S Bff m"Y „ IIo r z a a So H — _ =1 d w C �o a b� x m wz a f€ a0 6 W z n aP co saaWag6uuaauI6u3}ojuaugiedaa SNVId NOI1dONf103 O w _ €(M a .......................... St1X31 NVII H�H V J 1 z3aiwva I a3Nan1 r`■ IlSIaH3 Sfldlf00 10 Ally I�LXl'LLSMHoSfIdtl07'1S3H�NtlWD�508 N a (ZZOZ ONOS)NOUVAON321 HM13. ,lMS111HN1N30 MVAU Hl y a Ngla}p530 AB 3Ltl0 'W N0151/aY NglddOS30 AA 3lM 'ONNOISIn3M g tr Q) .4.cex 0 F s 0 3 � Q to ,0y y,6 � A 1 saoWaS6uuaaulBu3}oluauliedaa SlIVINN011VONf103 v w SVX31 0) a N si�3iiw�av � w C" m I1SIUH0 sndHOO 10 A110 �LX'LLSNH�S dtl0�'1S3H�NtlW0�S9B ch <n Z3211WtlM 12l3N21f11 w 3 (ZZOZ 4N08)NOIlt/AON3212101831X3 AM9111HN1N30 MVAU Hl y a Nd1dN M AB al M NgaA3N KKMIdq�530 AB 31tl0 'ONNpN3N .9�F�, a � aw Q ip � 8 = o LLU � CV CV CV V — mSl i Q mgn IRE LU cy a � o F q 5 sao Bu aau 6u o ua eda to m was u i 3� � Wv a Slldl34 N011t/aNf103 � NVU H�N V J 1 ", A N m r`■ IlSIIiHO Sf1da03 to A.LI0 LD�L Xl'LLSMHoSfIdtl07'1S 3H3NtlWDO508 <Y v� z3aiwva I aMun1 N (' a (ZZOl aN08)NOIlt/AON321 a0R131X3 � � m ,lMS111HN1N30 MV13N Hl N a Ng1a1p534 A6 3Lv0 'ON Ntl$Vatl lglldM�s30 AB 31tl0 'ON NOISN3M un N 8 g�r �8a 0 �• 4 ry 4 \ l .9 �2 _J w EL 9 4 WONaS 8uuaaU16U31owewwaa S310N IVAN30 O w sysi d a N HEav 0) Z3211WtlM 2l3N21f11 1iS1dH0 sndd00 to A110 0/BL%'LLSBH�S d807'1S3H�NtlW0�508 n w u� 1 N o (ZZOZ ON08)NOIlt/AON321 a0R131X3 Ald 4 911 IVUiN30 WWd13N Hl y a Ng1a1p534 AB 3Ltl0 'W�'014/3tl lglldM�s30 AA 3lM 'ON NpS1IaM qd� i vIs jig QV k lit MUM i 121 IMEE m its g 31. to tad "fig oag y k' 9_vaH'm q. E u �o E c � ��N 3_ Sv p F o.ge S S=° 5ei a8=s U �� Y fill vo v�i @= U ugi o r 3_ rc n$w$=v$ 8 ill;l; all 1 1 N m o g Y8 a aO� v3 all, e ham� a 8 OF s' g g E 8 ys M oil ! g a g £ g 8s€ g na ill ills. a oil mrE z _ "E E In -1E �� z `aa RV 6*211 j� So n� oq co oa q aE t >> o a oya g =yo o�d a� scar o �As .go$E e a= g s`8 Eeo s ��i go "o gII of "s ..�dyE a:' t lit p Rig 9� N c�i Boa a v_ 'in HAosHalo y l H J31 � s- a" 8ja t ai _ ems pi Aot m � a�g gel= oot � �.�q� z a$ a ate€ a 8w Dm8 € §� yF wm k' g$�o l-" 1 WE fl Hill- Hil fig88sL E � $� "sE fie= g 'E� 3 g�a a= z � s d o e �o g�` Pa g= m E � as � ""`9 as g � s Eat aw E�� z M I 1-I lit �g m �e oEFM ov € A e 4g aoso P €� 1a Q _E'a„a` o.E l c m o AA °' M g $'- 8 8a 2 E' z, $€a � 'o oE'ce $ CS N $a c il m a o o g=E 6 H Ong $m LEf f U! o$ =a B'�= `'YsB `3�sj E W 8 E AYY Ed a t y�od„ �� 1. sx-. ZI EEghE �sg " o.e$_ _t gill; 8 g FE= E= a" aQ .s � mg MIN o �o .oL &ag !pit a=-a g 5,P _ 8= a Eg A go!!! E 8- °'m _ 1 . N �1"8= E 8` a &=s = a " S 1 9lh-._ as gie `° s2 .gam E.ga'� oI' E a `o § s �.o waov " �= MoA�= q a4 vd �s -11 1. 1s 1 a g sgoi8"T q gag m o1 "sx�� "a HIAll gig � e � �� SIR ` x o tin" _ �aA ffia `dg� -q.1 it 1 alas® �A �§ € "� �L Ito ; s 8 E ��m w d E n S' R q �u.�9 o d o�'� E "F g No s g =a a$ tie - 9.4 y$ full " � �gE �z vo Aq o �y LLxo - `sl`' 1111 as _a o_a eta . MUSH ��:�d q8� �" _ �� � a �sj€ �.l HIM ��s fag e — � �� � 1h HIM €"E 2 1 a� 6= E B. a mill,a T $ �% „� she ag ` � AIM� gal r o 3 gA! ? m �� 12. a11 s E 1g"1`8g_1m aN o$ boo _LF.� �aog<� g�oa= g 33 U- o S i c" a 2=s K, m 1 E E fill -c�°�E'€ .S ms�� Nam$ �R 6°g �a-'� 'Sa os@ gE` " �ooEo�S=`�S J A o ygaq � sgs a' � 1m _N as 3< < m o m1a1V m$a` - sp ° a a gad xa rngE �m� g m.2"a=a sad is m - as �PME E= a�gsgAs ilia, =t=m� g=Ae h g it?g �g `$lmf =gas -.1 s gNvh1E.a�e slag asB;.�E H H: lilt !a G1= all � -��o `aes> gE'`s a Ada mij 8 so W �UEsas$ " EsBE�E &E�ss� gSd.= a � �� oe�mo gg25 1 mo.e'i "�o o._�s $m�`eq= o�� o =o .a �� �Wdoa g11U 1 �`«< .gP'� m ms=E' � a �9s $� E ��➢.ya�s�� "fig=in �1.1; �9 3� � � . � g�= ��" � " a"� Im1U9_ zd a 9sas".ea 1114 a m 0 8am�dw 1 LLw1 laa 111 1 ��s"_�€1a 10 o SOONSS 6uueeui6u310lueuwedeo NVId 311S NOI111OW3a v o C H Tcsb StlX31 z m 51331Is3 ? fill I o CD "s Il MO SndaO`d io A113 W"Lx1'USIMHOS(WNW'1S3HOWd GIN cfl � o z3aiwva I Man, ONOO)NOIIHAONM 2101a31X3 `V COW d „ 5 AbV'dgll WHIN30 dW`AH t9 M a wouatl�o ne atw .�xolsuan Houalxs3a we ova ox rAlSln3a A its 5 � $ 62, . J Z §yw9 3 Y3 6 f W 0 C 5�' �3osS8gs 'S g�8g 006 `-, maJykf M S �w c��aw- Aso os�a w�o�o�e�a R�p R^RoR z � n 1S Vf1HHONtll N fig? ----------- ------ -------- — ---- -- -- --�—__---- --- o<� ows \ II " ® \ 111a® \ A El J�r� r � I 0` 4 Ii d 1 A ❑ e` 1 \ i a U k A U \ II \ T4-11101 101 0 o Vol 14 0 o 0 0 0 0 II I o I 1 I 1 \1 I i I \J1V. I I I I __ J a� o� N sao!m@S 6upo@w5u3 jo luawjaedad cD C NVId 31lS-MAA0 o ry wva a3Nan \ I SHX31 ¢Q m �Z sr o Z3a�� l IlSIliHO Sn o da001u1J Oh8LX1'1151bHNSnd 00'153HONtlW005frfr N o (n w �bm "�° == (znz aN08)NOIIHAON3a KNIIX3 0 �mf ),2]VRJ81l IV?J1N30 VWVA3 J dl a NOIAaJs3a A9 31tl0 'ON W11— NOI1dl—K AH 31V0 'ONNMI— oNwnONaaav szoz/9��a U) 5 a< Z LU ? a. LU LU Lj w =- PE ww 358� gasy= — 21 s a � Ufa r - -------- - �= T IF .iS VnHVONVl N - a � oho � 0 0 ❑ ❑ - 0 r 0 0 0 --a--- -El--- �-- ElA \' o a t 74 w I I l Q 0 ] . 0 — o I El El El El El El IIIIIITL 0 0 �e I, p 1rw FEWo -s l- ---- = a, - o c rww m do.mam -1- - z 5 - a a Ix Ewa �� Ix '1S OZIJJVO'S w ,, a // 04 o saOwag 6uua(a�u/i6/u�3}a luewUedea SlIVA0 311S ONV NOIS HOltJ31X3 v o CD i w T4gb .....:,.,,�..................: SVX31 r "� o Ua 'f.0 S1�311H7tltl \ I o � � � s" USIHHO sndHOD io Ally 1009LX1 IIHHJ sndNW'1s 3HONVYMWO ao 3 �b �� z3aiwva I aaNanl (ZZOZ ON08)NOIIHAONM 21 NRX3 `� o CO NOLLdtl]530 19 3va NV01SV.3V Ngldltl�534 A9 3LYO 'ON WISI/dtl 3 xmaus a.z nuua,i i a a� i a W 6 � Q = z J ~ 2 —TT LU U Y Mi Y�L J I N Q W= LS W c Q U w z w > @ U > O I R J §T4�r A R" @na g Q 5 a N N b g wo P uj k c ga gg 43 3 ;� m z u wq og a w N z tC 1 7, wN N .c of Q a h W z.r a,c z Lu gz w J o W rr Zi- iy � 2 U b y�' V—va.���•'i�w. y�i � 8 o seOweS 6uueeui6u3 JO luewpedea 2100131SIN-NVId NOOIJ 311SOdW0O v o C H T4sy .....:.....:................,.: SVX31 o z m `— o U�' 'f.0 S1�311H7tltl \ I � N s" USIHHO SndHOD io AID Io"M'uS aN'JSIIdeW'1S3HOWMMGW rn o z3aiwva I Muni (ZZOZ ON08)NOUVAONM 21 NRX3 `V (/�D/'� 6� 0 o W d „ 5~ A2it21811 IVHIN30 VNVAH t9 a NOLLdtl]530 19 3va ONNq— Noualx A9 3LYO 'ON N051/dtl Z CL "gab o ff���a wce 5'i yg yqg" LL �Is wyw33b'�SB� �_ 684 S O as �' c w AR)-� w w �^o ° ® O I d� 6® �m$ +H1111 ® ° �I 4 F- 1 oI a O fir . O LL t1 y'14 �O i , r _____— &� V b� \ 3 w "+ a - cn O Q d w W' 1 C7 K Z W c \ R �a.P F seOweg 6uueeui6u3 JO luewpedea WOld ON003S-Wd W01d 311SOMOO _ N .asb+ s,l•,�a i'i SHX31 O)H a ore usawasnaaa isawuwausoc" Q z3aiw va aaNan CD USIHHO sndHOD io A11O ' l — (ZZOZ ON08)NOUVAONM 21 NRX3 o CO 6��3tl s Ab"8111"IN30 VNVAH VI � a NOLLda]530 19 3va NNgSN3a Ngldla�53a A9 3LYO 'ON N051/da Y S g �� i p �� SF jgFBuG J o EaBgb'Yw G�'GYo�F`��g V�°a O � V V 0 0 0 1p A0 0 pp A0 z a 1p �� O LU `� y e IL 0. pP O QA r 1p J 1p po c�- lp A0 1p AIDlp AID p 0 $ 0 uLL o seOweS6uue(e�UIBU�3JOjuewpede( NOONaulHl-WdNOOl3RISOMOO o C i w T 4 gb .....�,.,,�..................: SVX31 r "� o Ua 'f.0 S1�311H7tltl \ I o � CY) � N < s" USIHHO SndHO`d io AIDW"M'uS HH3SnaaW'1SeH'N+vv MGW o o z3aiwva I Muni (ZZOZ ON08)NOUVAON3N 21 NRX3 °' cD s ~� CO AbV'dBll IVHIN30 VNVAH t9 a HOuaK530 19 3va NNgSN3V NgldlipS34 A9 3LYO 'ON N051/dtl 8g 4y 30 .9�F? ¢a W�ss�LLz � ai LL J gyo Yw' elLL HIM O 6 V o! O 0� O 00 O M Y J a c o`\ O LU f 1, W_1 aAID� 0 w AIDv U QO po OD OD op po O � O� g O e O O 0 # n *_sue«_ < gI1V2 + aC-) a§ � a , e% ; _ _ � : % S1 , ; 2 (/ / 2 i13311 � � 51 »ogam @ Ug _e__«aw__ C-4 ; % � U2 am)No»nG�a� gaAg c § C / 22e11IAA30d«k« > u � \ § ; / \ w , ; !! ) »p \ \ \ k LU ! §4 . )! irI § » § . ! } . - -�\-- B) N . .« ; It (( � ■ ! - k | §It / ; a 2 ) §)( )! . : ; — ------- - � --- _ \ � k , . w o saOwag 6uuaaui6u3}a luewUedea SNOIIVA313 UO1H31X3-N011110W3a cmo CD H Tasb SVX31 z m `— o Ua 'f.0 S1�311H7tltl \ I o � s" USIHHO SndHO`D io A11� lML1u'u81LH'JSfWMW'1s3H3NV?MQ8 r� o zaaiwva I aaNanl (ZZOZ 0N08)NOUVAONM 2101H31X3 °' /�/'� 6� 0 o W d „ 5 A2it21811 WHIN30 VNVAH`9 a NOLLdtl]530 19 3va ON-- Ali l E I Z UJ IM II II I I I I II II 1 j I J II aj II N r N I �il I of I I g�U I I I I I u � I a tcW a rtcW ic a� 11 II o; `S �R2 �0 5ig3 I �g� - I � a cm c L I <a aN g �s Ed I I I - .� I I I I I I I I � I,•• I I �%�--3 I I I I I I I I •� � I II II I I I o saOwag 6uua(a�u/i6/u�3}a luewUedea SNOIIVA313 210R131X3-N01111ONT] � o "i w T 4 Sy .....�....:..................: S V A31 o r "N o Ua 'fi S1�311H7tltl \ I � � � s HMO snda0D io A113 wreLxi'USILH'JS(WMW'1s3H3NVVMQ8 � o zaaiwva I Muni (ZZOZ 0N08)NOUVAONM 2101a31X3 s ~� CO Ab"8111"IN30 VVIIVAH t9 a NOLLdtl]530 A9 3l ON NgSN3V Ngldltl�534 A9 31YO 'ON N051/dtl I to �g II LU II W I W ICI III I I I I N a Ip� r I I I I I I I I Ip� I II I I I I r IFA77 I I I I I T I I I I I I I ®TAN I I I I na -- I II III II II I I I � j I I �o� I I I I I I I IQI ` I I I I g l II L �F l- _____ I Igo I I I I I I I I I I I I II I I I I I I � I I I I I I I IIII III l i i I ii � o seOweS 6uue(e�UIBU�3 JO juewpedea SNOI-LVA313 HOW31X3 v o C i w T 4 gb .....�,.,,�..................: SVX31 r "� U Ua 'f.0 S1�311H7tltl \ I o � c � I1SlHH3 SndHOD io A110 loreLXl'uslHHOSndeW'1S3H3WfflWGW o z3aiwva I Muni (ZZOZ ONO8)NOliVAON3N WNRX3 °' s ~� CO A2it21811 WHIN30 VNVAH t9 a NOLLdV]530 19 3va ONNq— Ngldl� A9 3LYO 'ON N!MSI/dN nk a3g a II I I I I I J b I I I I 5 Zf� c bap N ° 3 Wz I I Ic I I p I as WTI _ I I £g y7iw t o w *M� g � EH5�-8 �g� *71 Q33gg Epp 4 p s 4 p wa ca - @ I �� a V w�8 g L3Y �o S � h El d lQ ICEz E I5YYEl 1 Zoo - 12 Iwwl ; 40 I� Igpl — g y _ w o o C-bI I I - �g ---- ----- - g I J I I I it f gi I I ��od I I I I I I I I I I I o saOwag6uuaaui6u3}alueuyedea SNOI-LVA313 HOW31X3 � o " "d• � Ua T4sb+d S 1�3 1 1 H 7 a tl � I StlX31 0 � HMO snda00 io A1I� s" W"LWUSlaN'JsndMW'1s3H3NtlYWQ9 cn � o zaaiwva I Muni (ZZOZ ON08)NOUVAONM WNRX3CO s ~� A2it21811 WHIN30 VNVAH t9 a NOLLd11J530Q ype 19 3Lw 0NNOISN3tl Ngldl� A9 31Y4ON WISI/dtl o II I II II J I I I II Z U Er UA I I I I I I I I =tl W 5 l o t o o l o w N I I I I I I I I I I I I 1U3� I CEU 5 -® -E] �wl<. �� cola Ewa g3 y�o, 1 cem 0 Ell 1 T 1 1 �4 IS w2 ® _07 p$ 04 II om II a � y gw d s (Dal w I I I I I Y I I ao� aa� 5 a Y / 1 Q 1 0 1 1 1 K I a- ------------ I I I I 13 I I I I I � I I Iaaw I I I I I I I owl I I I � I I I I I I I I agwl 1 I 11 1 I 1 1 1 II II I pg� I I I II 2 o seOweg 6uue(e�U!6/U�3 JO lueu pedea S11V13a(INV SNOUVA313 NOR131X3 � o C T 4 I i w ' •....,„...,...a.,,.....,.: StlX31 r 5 1 3 3 1 1 8 3 a tl \ o CD - s" IlSIliH�Sf1da0�io Ally yore x'usaaOsnaaoO.ls3 OavwoOsoe r, o zaaiwva I Man 2l (Zzoz ONOB)NOUVAONM IURX3 °' 2 a s ~� A2it21811 WHIN30 VNVAH V1 . a wouati�o ne atw .W xasuan aouaia�a we 3<va ox rAlSln3a s: w8w G was all wain z O Z \ \ Z O W ¢ W IRA W J J W W W O Ky Owl - (7 rx Ow- '_ � � 1 6LL 5� Z m 'JI1 9�L ly K k Z � O F h Z W w '� „ O 3 r a \ Y� y Q o s J f w � , as wM" WEll ` � a \ \ wN O ¢ 6 b f W � \ J N W d K � a= 0o to ~ O W U O a � W k Q `1 Q J W m J a W d i O 4 V too -' EN N o saOwag 6uuaaui6a3}a luewUedea SN01103S lldM ONUSIX3 " o H Tasb „..................= SVX31 o m `— U Ua 'fi S1�311H7atl \ I � r < s" IlSIliHO SndaOO io Ally yore xi'usaN�snaao�'issN�Nvwa�soe co o z3aiwva I Muni (ZZOZ ON08)NOIIHAONM 2101a31X3 CO C W d a 5 AbV'dBll 1"IN30 VNVAH t9 a N0LLda]530 19 3va 0NNq— Ngldl� ffi A9 3LY0 'ON N!rsvaa ti LU y9� ru ' R 3 S4 Q Oil 'WH n C9 I\ m a o i U= ro ss ?h k'g � io off¢ is bn o�F�o his I .y7 .5.i- .5�-• �� 99 E a } IF kj w55 s_I A;A firma w �` 3 �I - w4q Z •1� e H FL n W W� ql o SOOII6uua(a�u/i6/u�3 JOlueugiydea SN01103S lldM ONUSIX3 v o CD i w T 4 gb .....,.,,..................: SVX31 r "N U Ua 'fi S1�311H7tltl \ I o � cj) � r < s" USIHHO SndHOO io A113 IyreLxi'uS HH3SfWNW'1s3H3WfflW9W rn o Z3aiwva I a3Nanl (ZZOZ ON08)NOIIHAONM 210WRX3 °' CD s ~� CO AbV'dBll WHIN30 VNVAH t9 a NCfidtlp53p Ap 3va 0NNq— Ngldltl�Sip Ap 3LY0 'ON N!MSI/dN W U Q K F �y bS Z� al SV Z4 r W r �f i/N � 8g1{py p gq - r 1 N W K tl� J U) ® p% z 9 o S U Q WA d ® Z �H � J `� -----ii------ I W 71 sI a 77-51-1 \§ �� ;.,_;•. „� .. -,�, �° �"g �, �I '�� iij/ Ili � � o N toF � 4 4�� Mry o � a -� a J ' yq u w - � Z� U o M o seOweS 6uueeui6u3 JO luewpedea Slltd130 MOONIM V 2I000 ONUSIX3 v o C H T4sy .....,.....................: SVX31 z m `— o Ua 'f,0 S1�311H7tltl \ I o � USIHHO � SndHOD io A110 (ZZOZW"M'uHH3SnaaW'1S3HJNvMGW z3aiwva Muni ON08NOIHAONM IOlH31X3 CD CO d HOuaK530 19 3va oxxa—I �,, Ngldltl�534 A9 3LYO 'ON N051/dtl E63bgg8 gig g �g� • s E•W w .w•a F .. 7 k F N � O � F— 'n 8 Z" Ai �90 ® oa f y n _ J a Alay W W / _ _ N r i§ g F LU o� w -- -- .w• .wa CV) Y .w .�. ti Wv 47-1 I•. 3 n� A Y Uzi71K, c —TT K w F 7 U) b .fi g Mq in _ oa' cz I 0) gg r �• =s = r a� �� � �9E♦•z pgtvz � S situ V �a �g • o'• , G y t o m ' am ' •6• -- 2� fn� _ _ ,•o - M — --- N a �� o SOOweS6000OUI6u3JOluewpedea SlId13O M00NIM'R KOO MIN to o C—) i W T4gb .....,.,,..................: SVX3i r "N U Ua 'fi S1�311H7tltl \ I o � cj) � IlSlHHO SndHOO io Ally W"LXVusaHOS(WHW'iS313Wffl GW o z3aiwva I Muni (ZZOZ ON08)NOUVAON3N 2JOIH 1X3 CO s ~� Ab"811 1"IN30 dW`AH t9 a nouaa�53o ne 3tw .�xasuan Houaia�a we ova 'ox robtn3a 0 a a � p� » off , Q... o raw B fn ` N -1 6 w fall J -'k 00 ti Ofl J_ Q F rc W Q bo p w c� D =6 ' x Rr3 o oy3 0 O O /J a p p Q 7Q y b b W W p1J' 2 2 W§ _- W ' > W�° �p x� R o � �k r � b3�� �g p T - .are w�aa3,�a3N�s ---------- m W v�eW � ass = r'- J J1 nall IU Up Q O $ o O N Q 'N Q � W _ C r r W o seOweS 6uue(e�UIBU�3 JO luewpedea SlIV130 T S3VMJ/S3dAl MOONIM/21004 o C i w T 4 gb .....�,.,,�...,...a.,,.....,.: SVX31 r "� o Ua 'f,0 S1�311H7tltl \ I o � CY) � USIHHO SndHOO io AID loreLXl'usHHOS(WeW'1e3H3WMMGW c i o Z3aiwva I Muni (ZZOZ ONOB)NOUVAONMN 2JOIHRX3 CD s ~� CO AbV'dBll WHIN30 VNVAH t9 a NOLLdV]530 19 3va ONNq— Ng1dI� A9 3LYO 'ON N!MSI/dN xu-s U H 03 a s w xN as o3 03 a rwn _ L N Z a J g g \ \ \ O Ya Z a \ o E w li b< F W . g \\ \ w a a o p� O cos os xa-z w o3 03 - G" L la rnn 7 w o Z F 1 sg W 33 •.® s ZS y z \ w z z — s w s g oNp - x �I. W LL w w - wog z `L g \ Ofe=e w o 00 1? zg�g u 0 3 3' $�G \ 40 U) o3�°�� N K \ O pO m W5 �o Q J 3w W6 y Z ��----- H 3 M N z� was zwrz �� �F w otom F— Qz _ 9S 8 G� 9 Z i G 5y F- ,.�. w - W w \ \ I g \ \ w- § J§ wrs dD w=' w W� Z, Z ZN a= Cfl LC� w yr r a ? ui wz y y= o F- w z p U G Sw O O O O W U) U) w s \ \ bg ti S� y $o o O O O b� a w rc C) W w. W �. Zg Z N f b Z'� Z Z Z ZIR Hj w� w< W� N 0) 00 ti rs w W --aSbuuaauibu3joluawuedaa NV-ld IVOIHIO3D3 OW3a co 3 I , ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,a ,,.a,,.,.,,,, SHX31 n � a a4 m 0 §§§$$$ C e �i S 1 7 3 1T1 H �tl VXL 'e z W m Z38IWtla a3Nani 11SlHH0 Snda00�O hll0 LOb9_X1'I1513H�511dlIOd 153HONMI+Io0�08 o m o o 0 o I1sh p. (ZZOZ GNOS)NOliVAON321 21O2131X3 o a M:JV2i81-1_MJiN30 VNVi32i V-1 NOI1dItl0530 'ON N77 NOI1dl—K 'ON N0151�3tl w ran rvmz m�a ¢ ,w unm�x a uwt vii�nn memo w wm+w 60 OII 4 RH. El W J d ¢a -- - - - a LU x w ri LSG `--------J � a! E]❑ s a � ( <0 8p O� a w 0` IIfi 88 p 8 ❑ J � O j Uo ¢¢ U II t J m W W \ El I K � U f Ln 0 I I I I ¢fl o I o - II o I ------------------------- n ^� I I w p Ia4 --agbuuaauibu3jojuawuedap NV-ld 31lS IVORilO3�3 Cl)" SH X31 Oros_ ' v =o o si ,aia aav usaHosneeooisaONri+iosJu Z321WV2 2 IlSldHO Sfda00 hll0 3N8n,i 0 m o (ZZOZ GNOS)NOliVAON321 21O2131X3 o a M:JV2i81-1_MJiN30 VNVi32i V-1 NOI1dItl0530 'ON N77 NOI1dl—K 'ON N0151�3tl �ran' 5p - S� b 89 b o Egg Bw �� =gig &� irk o =s H z yp >Cl A % w �z _ F ONE O O 'is vnHVONvi N --------- ------- -- -- ---------- — a-------- ---- - ------- -------- o O =11 -- FT5 s 0 .9 i D O � a 1 ° ----------- ---------- El EEs - — �� `�' �- U ❑ I ❑ J o w I o El El El El El El °o I � slaoff p a ®U FI61FWI > L mom buipeouibu3 jo juaw1judea Nd dew @i3 32 OgE d N3 ° ° ' / ® agl J ® ? : dzaw/ate}� lgmegammdo m=.:Ind=: as \ \ @ § �� C) v (22 ONo2\oLd\N�dM0i 3 , . \ " •= } ) / § d S1-1_MJiN30iw i 5 V - ,ran 6 --.� | ® ! \ } \ ! \� § 4 \§ / § �| - , - § !!/ ! §!| \| §; !§ � ( ; §§` )§ r! ° `;; !; 4� ; . e a e @ e ; . ; ; � = 6 % LLJ H §t ° e \ ! \ \ < © Ld \ ° } ` »� . , } w© / \/ / / » \\ ! 5 ; . z § . a k � 3� .. �. � ;� w p Ia4 --aSbuuaauibu3jojuawuedap STMODHOS -WORilO3l3 o 3 , ....,,,.",T� ,,.a,,,,.,,,, SHX31 0 C e �rj S 1 3 1�1 H tl V liSIHHO SndH00�O h110 LOb9_X1'I151NHO SndI0O 1S3HONMI+IMM Oq ¢ m N C0 1 a Z3211Wtl2! 83N8ni g `wo 0 __ o ys p` �ZZOZ GNOS)NOliVAON321 2 M0iX3 o a M:JV2i81-1_MJiN30 VNVi32i V-1 NOI1dItl0530 'ON N77 Ndidl—K 'ON N0151�3tl ran 728 8 W W '� i.�� � �� - •Pii eP i•si Pr � b�� ; S �rlgp S 2 1 1 y� i e,caul',.s. J CI s $s3 -A $F 44 3 1LU 3 = Q Q Q Q Q Q w 1 Q 7 $ w w 1 i w1 141 " Q _ 8 •SPEESSSSiiiP E Pfii EPii PEii Si Eiiitli s _ Bill, PPE P E Si Cii8 E6tcR SCR 66 J o 3 O — g 8 _£ $ s s " z s s s s z Z. E E E E E oz 3 z z w W z fi�=� s�&Y 2 o k p J a a M s a a _ = o g W go�p ERHUR f � p N 8 0 o �o Q o g _ - apw (`a W z C y a Z. ZZ. . o � soda g�8 ff s d ®® m m W 6b y m A #= db ® ® ® g €n A rn ��'', CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF LA RETAMA CENTRAL LIBRARY EXTERIOR RENOVATION [BOND 2022] PROJECT NUMBER: 23181 IN ' CORPORA ° 1852 TURNER � RAMIREZ A R C H I T E C T S 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 Phone: (361) 994-8900 TRA PROJECT NO. 2024-03 January 10, 2025 Record Drawing Number: PBG-940 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Note to Specifier: Verify that the Table of Contents includes all Specification Sections and Appendices that are part of the Contract Documents. Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 000100 Table of Contents 000101 Seals Page (Optional) Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement (Rev 12-2021) 000102 List of Drawings 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev 6-2021) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions(Rev4-2022) Division 01 General Requirements 011100 Summary of Work (Rev 10-2018) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances(Rev5-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment(Rev 5-2020) 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 01 35 00 Special Procedures (Rev 10-2018) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev8-2019) 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Rev 8-2019) Part S Standard Specifications 02 10 40 Site Grading 02 24 20 Silt Fence 02 52 05 Pavement Repair, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalk and Driveway Replacement 02 52 10 Lime Stabilization 02 56 12 Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways 03 00 20 Portland Cement Concrete 03 70 40 Epoxy Compounds TABLE OF CONTENTS [ADDENDUM 001] 00 0100- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovation -#23181 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section Part T TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 014100 Testing Laboratory Services 014200 References 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 73 00 Execution 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures T-DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 37 60 Drilled Footings 02 41 19 Selective Demolition T-DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork (Structural) 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement(Structural) 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete (Structural) 033100 Epoxy Related Work(Structural) T-DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 04 23 00 Reinforced Unit Masonry(Structural) T-DIVISION 05 METALS 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings T-DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry TABLE OF CONTENTS [ADDENDUM 0011 00 0100-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovation -#23181 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section T-DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 92 00 Joint Sealants T-DIVISION 08 OPENINGS 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 42 28 Sliding Automatic Entrances 08 42 29 Impact Rated Sliding Automatic Entrances 08 80 00 Glazing T-DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 24 00 Cement Plastering 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling 09 91 13 Painting T-DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 10 14 80 LED Message Center 10 71 13 Exterior Sun Control Devices T-DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 00 10 Special Provisions for Electrical Work 26 01 11 Conduit and Fittings 26 01 20 Wire and Cable—600 Volts and Under 26 01 31 Junction and Pull Boxes 26 01 34 Outlet Boxes 260140 Wiring Devices 26 01 70 Disconnect Switches 260190 Supporting Devices 26 04 50 Grounding 26 05 01 Lighting Fixtures 26 09 96 Electrical Systems Startup TABLE OF CONTENTS [ADDENDUM 0011 00 0100-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovation -#23181 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section T-DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Grates 32 84 23 Underground Sprinklers 32 90 01 Common Planting Requirements 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 32 92 23 Sodding 32 93 00 Plants APPENDIX All Testing Reports as Applicable Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation and Recommendations for the Proposed La Retama Library Exterior Renovation, Report No. G124133; dated May 7, 2024 (26 pages) END OF SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS [ADDENDUM 0011 00 0100-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovation -#23181 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 00 0101 -SEALS PAGE ARCHITECT: ED ARC' PHILIP RAMIREZ 3•RA y/ TURNER,RAMIREZ,&ASSOCIATES 3751 S.ALAMEDA ST. —� CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 t!N 9�p Q� V 1361.994.8900 TF O F I'-,'+ 1/10/25 E I philip@trarch.com STRUCTURAL: ROBERT E.MARTINEZ, P.E. * * REM ENGINEERING 2218 BASSE ROAD ROBERT ENRIQUEZ MARTINEZ •• •••••• ......• ... SAN ANTONIO,TX 78213 89387 t�SS..CENS��G�� V 210.320.1199 E robert@remengineeringcorp.com MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/PLUMBING: L- �LNX� RALPH S.PITZER,P.E. *;•`• •;*�ri GPM ENIGINEERING, INC. 4444 CORONA DRIVE,SUITE 212 % 'µ•'R. S. PITZER' '* CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 65986 . �` V 361.852.2342 ONAt- .'� E pitzer.ralph@gpmeng.com D111012025 CIVIL: T��tt 01/10/25 ••.....• 'F s44,t RAM MUNOZ, P.E. * *�� MUNOZ ENGINEERING ./...:.........................•.....A RAMIRO MUNOZ III X 1608 S.BROWNLEE BLVD -o• CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78404 100346 S G� V 361.946.4848 E ram@munozengrg.com SEALS PAGE 00 0101- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: ROBERT GIGNAC,ASLA GIGNAC LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE s 3833 S.STAPLES STREET,SUITE N119 RD E?T E' � ��ss CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 • r V 361.853.0795 E gignaelandscape@adl.com END OF SECTION 00 0101 SEALS PAGE 00 0101-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 S CgA_ O v �NOONPDXPSE� 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on [insert Award Date], is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: City of Corpus Christi La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovation Project No. 23181 ARTICLE 2— DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: ARCHITECT OF RECORD Turner I Ramirez Architects 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 Contact:Jay Porterfield,AIA I jay@trarch.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson—Assistant Director,Construction Management 4917 Holly Road, Building 5 Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 JosephJ2@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 300 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Agreement 00 52 23-1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 12/2021 Conditions within 330 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay(but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion:Contractor shall pay Owner$400.00 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$400.00 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ Agreement 00 52 23-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 5— PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6— INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 12/2021 C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.1) and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 12/2021 L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence,instructions, drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E City Secretary Director of Engineering Services AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Address City State Zip Phone Fax EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 12/2021 SECTION 00 0102— LIST OF DRAWINGS 1.01 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS A. DRAWINGS: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled "100%Signed &Sealed Design Submission", dated January 10, 2025, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract Modifications. Sheet No. Drawing Title FRONT END A0.0 COVER SHEET A0.1 RENDERINGS A0.2 TAS 2012 EXCERPTS A0.3 TAS 2012 EXCERPTS A0.4 SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS, CODE INFORMATION CIVIL C1.0 CIVIL NOTES I CIA CIVIL NOTES II C1.2 CIVIL NOTES AND TESTING SCHEDULE C2.0 EXISTING CONDITIONS&TOPOGRAPHY PLAN C3.0 DEMOLITION PLAN C4.0 SITE PLAN C5.0 SITE DIMENSIONAL CONTROL C6.0 GRADING PLAN C6.1 GRADING PLAN II C7.0 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS I C7.1 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS II LANDSCAPE 1-1.0 LANDSCAPE PLAN L2.0 LANDSCAPE NOTES AND DETAILS L3.0 LANDSCAPE NOTES AND DETAILS L4.0 IRRIGATION PLAN L5.0 IRRIGATION NOTES AND DETAILS List of Drawings 00 0102- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10,2025 STRUCTURAL S1.1 FOUNDATION PLANS S2.1 FOUNDATION DETAILS S2.2 FOUNDATION DETAILS S3.1 GENERAL NOTES ARCHITECTURAL A1.1 DEMOLITION SITE PLAN A1.2 OVERALL SITE PLAN A1.3 EXTERIOR SIGN AND SITE DETAILS A2.1 COMPOSITE FLOOR PLAN—FIRST FLOOR A2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR PLAN—SECOND FLOOR A2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR PLAN—THIRD FLOOR A4.1 DETAILS A6.1 DEMOLITION— EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A6.2 DEMOLITION— EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A6.3 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A6.4 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A6.5 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A7.1 EXISTING WALL SECTIONS A7.2 EXISTING WALL SECTIONS A8.1 EXISTING DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS A8.2 NEW DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS A8.3 DOOR/WINDOW TYPES/FRAMES AND DETAILS ELECTRICAL DE1.1 DEMO ELECTRICAL PLAN E1.0 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E1.1 ENLARGED ELECTRICAL PLAN E1.2 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES END OF SECTION 00 0102 List of Drawings 00 0102-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10,2025 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology .....................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology................................................................................................................................15 Article2—Preliminary Matters...................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents..................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse.................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents.................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents...................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work..............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress..................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions...............................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site .............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..................................................................................28 General Conditions 00 72 00-1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage...............................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice .......................................................36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities.....................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence..............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties...........................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee .........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work.................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination ...............................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 00 72 00-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities...........................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor ..................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications..............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities .........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR's and Designer's Status During Construction ..................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives...........................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments.........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ....................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents.......................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times.......................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ...................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management ..............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification...................................................................55 General Conditions 00 72 00-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 12.04 Substitutions...........................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements.......................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates.........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense.........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work.....................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances..............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work.......................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work....................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work.......................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment.........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values..................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments..................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.......................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs ...........................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment.........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative...........................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................76 General Conditions 00 72 00-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.11 Substantial Completion...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection.......................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment.................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims.....................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination.....................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management...............................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits ....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site..........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations..............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements ...............................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points.........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction.................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control..............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires.......................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements...................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources...............................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies..........................................................................................88 General Conditions 00 72 00-5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 20—Project Coordination................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project...............................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings.....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article 21—Quality Management...............................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ..................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT..................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports..................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation .......................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects..............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan ......................................................................100 Article 22—Final Resolution of Disputes..................................................................................................101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations .....................................................................................................101 22.02 Mediation..............................................................................................................................101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy................................................................................102 23.01 Policy.....................................................................................................................................102 23.02 Definitions.............................................................................................................................102 23.03 Goals......................................................................................................................................103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................104 24.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................104 24.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................104 General Conditions 00 72 00-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................105 24.05 Document Numbering ..........................................................................................................105 24.06 Document Requirements......................................................................................................106 Article25—Shop Drawings.......................................................................................................................107 25.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................107 25.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures....................................................................................110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures..........................................................................112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products...............................................................................................113 25.10 Requests for Deviation..........................................................................................................113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities......................................................................................................114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements.................................................................................................116 Article26—Record Data...........................................................................................................................117 26.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................117 26.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................117 26.04 Record Data Requirements...................................................................................................118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures.......................................................................................119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities....................................................................................................120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................121 27.03 Schedule Requirements........................................................................................................121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................123 27.05 Float Time..............................................................................................................................123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation ..............................................................................124 General Conditions 00 72 00-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................124 28.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................124 28.04 Photographs..........................................................................................................................125 28.05 Video Recording....................................................................................................................125 Article 29-Execution and Closeout.........................................................................................................125 29.01 Substantial Completion.........................................................................................................125 29.02 Final Inspections....................................................................................................................126 29.03 Reinspection Fees .................................................................................................................126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ...............................................................................................................127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.........................................................................127 Article30-Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................128 30.01 Computation of Times...........................................................................................................128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records.......................................................................128 30.03 Independent Contractor.......................................................................................................129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ...........................................................................................................129 30.05 Limitation of Damages..........................................................................................................129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................129 30.08 Survival of Obligations ..........................................................................................................130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................................130 30.10 Assignment of Contract.........................................................................................................130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity........................................................................................130 30.12 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue...................................................................................130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury...........................................................................................................130 30.15 Attorney Fees........................................................................................................................130 30.16 Compliance with Laws...........................................................................................................131 30.17 Enforcement..........................................................................................................................131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation.......................................................................................................131 30.19 Contract Sum.........................................................................................................................131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy....................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.21 Notices. .................................................................................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act,42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous,toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications,and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and c. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work -The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies,agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 00 72 00-12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; c. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed - A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner-The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents-A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings,whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion - The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions -The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or C. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 00 72 00-14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive -A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to "at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense,"or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day' mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 00 72 00-15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 00 72 00-16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall,therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; c. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 00 72 00-19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error,ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 00 72 00-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 5—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment,and the operations of workers to the Site,adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 00 72 00-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 00 72 00-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site, and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 00 72 00-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 00 72 00-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods,techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition,and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 00 72 00-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 00 72 00-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-Vill or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 00 72 00-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 00 72 00-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Claims for damages,other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 00 72 00-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations,whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 00 72 00-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 00 72 00-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance bythe OPT, named insureds,or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds" for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 00 72 00-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 City of Corpus Christi— Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 00 72 00-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 00 72 00-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent,suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 00 72 00-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors,Suppliers,or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 00 72 00-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 00 72 00-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 00 72 00-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections,tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 00 72 00-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 00 72 00-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released,waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 00 72 00-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 00 72 00-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. General Conditions 00 72 00-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays,disruptions,and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 00 72 00-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS;CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 00 72 00-50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions,or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 00 72 00-51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 00 72 00-53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies,fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 00 72 00-54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 00 72 00-55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 00 72 00-56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Any time extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 00 72 00-57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex. Gov't Code§2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 00 72 00-58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b)— Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or c. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits, which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers' compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave,vacations, and holidays; and c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers'field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 00 72 00-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at SO% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities,fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 00 72 00-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 forthe Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 00 72 00-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 00 72 00-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim,seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained bythe Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 00 72 00-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION,REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Pay claims, costs, losses,and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work; and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 00 72 00-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR;SET-OFFS;COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 00 72 00-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 00 72 00-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim,demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up,training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; General Conditions 00 72 00-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 00 72 00-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical,temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 00 72 00-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion,show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 00 72 00-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount,up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 00 72 00-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 00 72 00-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 00 72 00-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 for this part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 00 72 00-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 00 72 00-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or General Conditions 00 72 00-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor's performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR's request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 00 72 00-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen,skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches, recordings,and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 00 72 00-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports,including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees'vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 00 72 00-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 00 72 00-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 00 72 00-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 00 72 00-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 00 72 00-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 00 72 00-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use "Notification by Contractor" form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 00 72 00-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions,traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 00 72 00-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 00 72 00-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 00 72 00-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 00 72 00-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 00 72 00-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 00 72 00-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control,verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 00 72 00-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties' senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 00 72 00-101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit,either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy,the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 00 72 00-102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy,women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual:Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities.The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example,a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 00 72 00-103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project,the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 00 72 00-104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CID Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 00 72 00-105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Certified Test Report Article 25 for approval of product Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 00 72 00-106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general,to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 00 72 00-107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials,catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 00 72 00-108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors,textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 00 72 00-109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 00 72 00-110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 00 72 00-111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 00 72 00-112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 00 72 00-113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences,or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. c. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 00 72 00-114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 00 72 00-115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 00 72 00-116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication,installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 00 72 00-117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement,model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 00 72 00-120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Cancel -Not Required." No further action is required,and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 00 72 00-121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 00 72 00-122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.OS Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 00 72 00-123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter, utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication,or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 00 72 00-126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 00 72 00-127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract,then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to:accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 00 72 00-128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B. Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 00 72 00-129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys' fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. General Conditions 00 72 00-130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein,and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year,the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments,is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. General Conditions 00 72 00-131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.22 Public Information A. The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION General Conditions 00 72 00-132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi,Texas ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.1) are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 Supplementary Conditions [ADDENDUM 001] 00 73 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 3/2023 3. A total of 43 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 43 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: a. Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation and Recommendations for the Proposed COCC La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovation, Corpus Christi, Texas; Report No.G124133 Published by Rock Engineering&Testing Laboratory on May 7, 2024 (26 pages). - The Contractor may rely on the Technical Data in this document. 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) include the following: NONE SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE NOT APPLICABLE ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Broad Form 2. Premises—Operations 3. Underground Hazard 4. Products/Completed Operations $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 5. Contractual Liability $2,000,000 Aggregate 6 Independent Contractors 7. Personal &Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $500,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers' Compensation Statutory Supplementary Conditions [ADDENDUM 001] 00 73 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 3/2023 Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental ❑X Required ❑ Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation > 5 ft or asbestos present Builder's Risk(All Perils including Collapse) Coverage limit shall be in the amount of the total cost of the project. Required for vertical structures and bridges ❑X Required ❑ Not Required Installation/Equipment Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment or storing contractor equipment on city- ❑ Required X❑ Not Required owned property ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.02 LABOR; WORKING HOURS A. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of person or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. B. Coordinate work hours with La Retama Central Library Staff regarding special hours and/or events. B. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Juneteenth June 19 Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November Supplementary Conditions [ADDENDUM 001] 00 73 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 3/2023 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS,AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor's goal is to perform at least 30 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination Construction Type Project Type (WD) No TX288 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) Supplementary Conditions [ADDENDUM 001] 00 73 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 3/2023 "General Decision Number:TX20240288 01/05/2024 Superseded General Decision Number:TX20230288 State:Texas Construction Type: Building Counties:Aransas, Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act are generally required to pay at least the applicable minimum wage rate required under Executive Order 14026 or Executive Order 13658. Please note that these Executive Orders apply to covered contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but do not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(1). If the contract is entered . Executive Order 14026 into on or after January 30, generally applies to the 2022, or the contract is contract. renewed or extended (e.g., an . The contractor must pay option is exercised) on or all covered workers at after January 30, 2022: least$17.20 per hour(or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in 2024. If the contract was awarded on . Executive Order 13658 or between January 1, 2015 and generally applies to the JJanuary 29, 2022, and the contract. contract is not renewed or . The contractor must pay all extended on or after January covered workers at least 130, 2022: $12.90 per hour(or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher)for all hours spent performing on I I that contract in 2024. The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. If this contract is covered by one of the Executive Orders and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination,the contractor must still submit a conformance request. Supplementary Conditions [ADDENDUM 001] 00 73 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 3/2023 Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the Executive Orders is available at http://www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/05/2024 BOIL0074-003 07/01/2023 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER......................$ 37.00 24.64 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELECO278-002 08/27/2023 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN......................$ 29.50 8.94 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENG10178-005 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1)Tower Crane.............$ 32.85 13.10 (2) Cranes with Pile Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Crane 60 tons and above.....$ 28.75 10.60 (3) Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under..............$ 32.35 13.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- I RO N 0084-011 06/01/2023 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL...........$ 27.51 8.13 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2014-068 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$ 20.04 0.00 CARPENTER........................$ 15.21 ** 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 15.33 ** 0.00 Supplementary Conditions [ADDENDUM 001] 00 73 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 3/2023 INSULATOR- MECHANICAL (Duct, Pipe & Mechanical System Insulation)...............$ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 12.27 ** 0.00 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 22.16 5.26 LABORER: Common or General......$ 9.68 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender- Brick...$ 11.36 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender- Cement/Concrete..................$ 10.58 ** 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer..............$ 12.49 ** 2.13 LABORER: Roof Tearoff...........$ 11.28 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 14.25 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader................$ 13.93 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.............$ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: Drill.................$ 16.22 ** 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift..............$ 14.83 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade..........$ 13.37 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader................$ 13.55 ** 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic..............$ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete).........$ 16.03 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller................$ 12.70 ** 0.00 PAINTER(Brush, Roller, and Spray)...........................$ 14.45 ** 0.00 PIPEFITTER.......................$ 25.80 8.55 PLUMBER..........................$ 25.64 8.16 Supplementary Conditions [ADDENDUM 001] 00 73 00-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 3/2023 ROOFER...........................$ 13.75 ** 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only)...............$ 22.73 7.52 SHEET METALWORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct Installation...........$ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER....................$ 11.22 ** 0.00 TILE SETTER......................$ 14.74 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 12.39 ** 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck.....$ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck............................$ 12.50 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck.......$ 12.00 ** 4.11 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ WELDERS- Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ** Workers in this classification may be entitled to a higher minimum wage under Executive Order 14026 ($17.20) or 13658 ($12.90). Please see the Note at the top of the wage determination for more information. Please also note that the minimum wage requirements of Executive Order 14026 are not currently being enforced as to any contract or subcontract to which the states of Texas, Louisiana, or Mississippi, including their agencies, are a party. Note: Executive Order(EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO,the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member(or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (iii)). ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Supplementary Conditions [ADDENDUM 001] 00 73 00-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 3/2023 The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination.The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of""identifiers""that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198.The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate,which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA)governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based.The next number,007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100%of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state.The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year,to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter?This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination Supplementary Conditions [ADDENDUM 001] 00 73 00-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 3/2023 * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour National Office because National Office has responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory,then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes,then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.)that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.)All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- END OF GENERAL DECISION" Supplementary Conditions [ADDENDUM 001] 00 73 00- 10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 3/2023 ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES A. For the Contractor's convenience, the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Turner Ramirez Architects 361-994-8900 Jay Porterfield,AIA 361-278-5006 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 Water/Wastewater/Stormwater 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks& Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div.for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department(City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AE P 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Centu ryl-i n k 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Refer to Section 0133 01 Submittal Register. SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. Supplementary Conditions [ADDENDUM 001] 00 73 00- 11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 3/2023 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: Turner I Ramirez Hourly Rates (2025-2026) Principal $265.00/hr Director $235.00/h r Senior Project Manager $215.00/hr Project Architect II/ Interior Designer II $205.00/hr Project Architect I/ Interior Designer I $195.00/hr Project Manager $185.00/hr Associate II $175.00/hr Associate I $165.00/hr Project Administrator $110.00/hr ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: Refer to Section 0133 01 Submittal Register SC-30.21 Notices. A. Strict compliance is required for all notice provisions in this Contract. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions [ADDENDUM 001] 00 73 00- 12 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 3/2023 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. The project scope consists of exterior improvements.The intent of the project is to re- establish the exterior views of the library front and to upgrade the property.The following major property features will be addressed. a. Redesign the front yard with new landscaping and hardscape; add hardscape at rear of building. b. Create a new free-standing Library sign and upgrade building wall signage. c. Create a new accessible walk from the existing bus stop to the front door. d. Repair the building plaster wall finish and paint the plaster. e. Replace all the windows and storefront entrance. f. Improve the area lighting to deter after-hours loitering. g. Create an exterior deck facing Blucher Park. h. Relocate the book drop to improve a conflicting traffic pattern. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.04 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. Summary of Work 01 1100- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 10/2018 C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01 1100-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 10/2018 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. Allowances: 1. Include specified allowance amount in the Contract Price. 2. The amount of each allowance includes: a. The cost of the product to the Contractor less any applicable trade discounts. b. Delivery to the Site. c. Applicable taxes. 3. Include in the Contract Price all costs for: a. Handling at the Site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage per Article 19 of SECTION 0172 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. b. Cost for labor and equipment for installation and finishing. c. Cost for related products not specifically listed in the allowance required for installation, including consumable supplies and materials. d. All overhead, profit, and related costs. 4. Assist Owner in the selection of products. a. Identify qualified Suppliers. b. Obtain bids from qualified Suppliers. C. Present available alternates to the Owner through the OAR. Notify OAR of: 1) Any objections to a particular Supplier or product. Alternates and Allowances [ADDENDUM 001] 01 23 10- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 5/2020 2) Effect on the Construction Schedule anticipated by the selection of each option. 3) Cost of each option. 5. Upon selection of the product: a. Purchase and install the product. b. Contractor's responsibilities for products shall be the same as for products selected by the Contractor. 6. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS to adjust Contract Price if the net cost of the product is more or less than the specified amount. a. Adjust the unit cost applied to the quantities installed per the method of payment described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for products specified as Unit Price Work. b. Do not perform Work until selection of alternate has been approved by the Owner. C. Provide actual invoices for the materials. C. The Lump Sum Bid Items described as "Allowances" have been set as noted in Section 00 30 01 Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner's discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the allowance in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate Bid Item 1: Provide 90 days of watering for all installed landscape planting via trucking in Type 1 reclaimed water and providing temporary piping as required. Refer to Sheet L2.0 for detailed requirements. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance L1—Bonds and Insurance: 1. A Lump Sum of the bid price to be used for the purchase of bonds and insurance required for the Project. 2. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique Alternates and Allowances [ADDENDUM 001] 01 23 10-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 5/2020 insurance as required and obtained specifically forthis Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. B. Allowance L2 - Unforeseen Building Conditions During Construction: 1. A maximum of $100,000.00 to be used for Unforeseen Building Conditions During Construction. 2. Upon acceptance, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the item.The unit measure for the basis of payment for this allowance item will be on a percentage of completion verified by the Architect. C. Allowance L3—Recondition Fountain: 1. A maximum of $10,000.00 to be used for Reconditioning the Existing Fountain into a working water feature. 2. Upon acceptance, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the item.The unit measure for the basis of payment for this allowance item will be on a percentage of completion verified by the Architect. D. Allowance L4—Graphic Concepts: 1. A maximum of $25,000.00 to be used for Graphic Concepts (Mural Installation) including materials and installation of Architect-provided graphic concept, and copyrights for maintenance, repair, and/or removal at Owner's discretion. The Owner shall assist the Contractor in issuing a Request for Proposals during construction. The Contractor shall contract with the selected artist, paid for out of this contingency, provide access to the building and coordinate the mural installation with their schedule. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances [ADDENDUM 001] 01 23 10-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 5/2020 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1—Mobilization (Maximum S%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices,sheds, and storage facilities; c. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment [ADDENDUM 002] 01 29 01- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 5/2020 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A2—Storm Water Pollution Prevention 1. Payment shall include but not be limited to furnishing and submitting the SWPPP to TCEQ and Owner and updating the Plan during the Project as needed. All permits and required fees related to the SWPPP will be included in this item. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: The initial pay application will include 50%of the lump sum bid amount minus retainage. The balance will be paid according to the percent of construction completion after 50%completion has occurred, minus retainage. C. Bid Item A3—General Site Conditions: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. D. Bid Item A4—Temporary Facilities: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. E. Bid Item 131—Selective Demolition: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit of measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. F. Bid Item C1—Cast-in-Place: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. G. Bid Item C2—Concrete Formwork and Reinforcement: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment [ADDENDUM 002] 01 29 01-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 5/2020 H. Bid Item C3—Concrete Finishing and Curing: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. I. Bid item D1—Unit Masonry: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. J. Bid Item E1—Pipe and Tube Railings: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. K. Bid Item F1—Rough Carpentry: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. L. Bid Item G1—Sealants: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. M. Bid Item H1—Overhead Coiling Doors: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. N. Bid Item H2—Aluminum Framed Entrances: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. O. Bid Item H3—Sliding Automatic& Impact Rated Sliding Entrances: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment [ADDENDUM 002] 01 29 01-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 5/2020 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. P. Bid Item H4—Glazing: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. Q. Bid Item 11—Cement Plastering: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. R. Bid Item 12—Ceramic Tiling: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. S. Bid Item 13—Painting: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. T. Bid Item J1—Plaques, Dimensional Letters and Room-Identification Signage: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. U. Bid Item J2— LED Message Center: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. V. Bid Item J3— Exterior Sun Control Devices: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment [ADDENDUM 002] 01 29 01-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 5/2020 W. Bid Item K1—Electrical: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. X. Bid Item L1—Decorative Metal Fences: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. Y. Bid Item L2—Underground Sprinklers: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. Z. Bid Item L3—Soil Preparation: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. AA. Bid Item L4—Sodding: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. BB. Bid Item L5—Plants: 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. CC. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections, Construction Drawings and/or SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM. Measurement and Basis for Payment [ADDENDUM 002] 01 29 01-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 5/2020 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment [ADDENDUM 002] 01 29 01-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 5/2020 0133 01 Submittal Register Specification Paragraph Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description No. Product Sample or Operations Information Mockup Data 01 41 19 Windstorm Construction Requirements 1.5 Record Data 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 1.4 Record Data Mockup 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings 1.2 Record Data 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings 1.2 Shop Drawin 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 1.2 Record Data 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 1.3 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 1.2 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 1.2 Shop Drawin 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances&Storefronts 1.3 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances&Storefronts 1.3 Shop Drawin 08 42 28 Sliding Automatic Entrances 1.6 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 08 42 28 Sliding Automatic Entrances 1.6 Shop Drawin 08 42 29 Impact Rated Sliding Automatic Entrances 1.6 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 08 42 29 Impact Rated Sliding Automatic Entrances 1.6 Shop Drawin 08 80 00 Glazing 1.3 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 09 24 00 Cement Plastering 1.2 Record Data Sample 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling 1.2 Record Data Sample 09 91 13 lPainting 1.4 Record Data Sample 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Si na e 1.2 Record Data Sample 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Si na e 1.2 Shop Drawin 10 14 80 LED Message Center 1.3 Record Data 0&M Manual 10 14 80 LED Message Center 1.5 Shop Drawin 10 71 13 Exterior Sun Control Devices 1.5 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 10 71 13 Exterior Sun Control Devices 1.5 Shop Drawin 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 1.3 Record Data Sample 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 1.3 Shop Drawin 32 84 23 Underground Sprinklers 1.4 Record Data 0&M Manual 32 84 23 Underground Sprinklers 1.4 Shop Drawin 32 90 01 Common Planting Requirements 1.3 0&M Manual 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 1.4 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 32 92 23 Sodding 1.3 Record Data 0&M Manual 32 93 00 Plants 1.3 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual Submittal Register 01 33 01-1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 10/2018 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence stipulated below: 1. Access to the Library by Patrons shall be safely maintained throughout construction. This includes facilitating alternate entry and exits through east and west emergency exit doors should Work require closing of the main library entrance. 2. Main entrance shall remain in operation until at least July 26, 2025,to facilitate previously scheduled events. B. Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items: Description Time Close main entrance Short as possible C. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. D. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times. 1.02 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; Special Procedures [ADDENDUM 001] 0135 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 10/2018 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and C. Submit plan 4 weeks (1 month) prior to beginning the Work. 1.03 CRITICAL OPERATIONS A. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum time out of service and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in the table below: Liquidated Critical Operation Max.Time Hours Operation Damages Out of Operation can be Shut Down ($ per hour) None B. Submit a written plan of action per Paragraph 1.02 for approval for critical operations. C. Work affecting critical operations is to be performed on a 24-hour a day basis until Owner's normal operations have been restored. D. Provide additional manpower and equipment as required to complete the Work affecting critical operations within the allotted time. 1.04 OWNER ASSISTANCE A. The Owner will assist the Contractor in draining the existing pipelines as much as possible through existing blow-off valves. The Contractor will be responsible for providing dewatering pumps, etc. required to completely dewater the facilities and handle any leakage past closed valves,gates or adjacent structures. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures [ADDENDUM 001] 0135 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 10/2018 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including OPT's field office and the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the OPT's field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2. Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3. Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT's field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 8/2019 3. Prevent freezing of pipes, flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES A. The Contractor must furnish the OPT with a field office at the Site. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. There is no separate pay item for the field office. B. Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor's use. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 10 people. C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. D. No monthly partial payments will be processed until OPT's field office facilities are completed and approved. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times,and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 8/2019 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor's and the OPT's field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the "Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. The Owner will furnish two Project signs to be installed by the Contractor.The signs must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The locations of the signs will be determined in the field by the OAR. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 8/2019 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings, sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping) for the OPT's field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT's field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 8/2019 015700 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 25 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 01 57 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 8/2019 B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Temporary Controls 01 57 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 8/2019 Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent,SWPPP,and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods,techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an Temporary Controls 01 57 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 8/2019 uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS—NOT APPLICABLE A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING—NOT APPLICABLE A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. Temporary Controls 01 S7 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 8/2019 C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream, the Oso Creek. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a "no cost" permit from the Owner's Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER—NOT APPLICABLE A. An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials, tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. Suggested disposal facilities would be [US Ecology (USET) in Robstown, Texas or Texas Molecular in Corpus Christi, Texas]. B. The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering, which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER—NOT APPLICABLE A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory Temporary Controls 01 S7 00-S La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 8/2019 agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, Contractorshall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 01 57 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 Rev 8/2019 SECTION 02 10 40 SITE GRADING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for back fill and grading of the site to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to site grading, the site shall be cleared in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 021020 "Site Clearing and Stripping". Unless specified otherwise on the drawings, the existing surface shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than six(6)inches. The loosened material shall be recompacted with fill required to bring the site to the required grades and elevations indicated on the plans. Fill shall be uniform as to material, density and moisture content. Fill shall be free of large clods, large rocks, organic matter, and other objectionable material. No rill that is placed by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated into a layer in that position; all such piles and windrows shall be moved by blading or similar method. All fill shall be placed in layers approximately parallel to the finish grade in layers not to exceed six (6) inches of uncompacted depth, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The fill shall be compacted to a density which approximates that of natural ground unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The Engineer may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction. All irregularities, depressions and soft spots that develop shall be corrected by the Contractor. Excess material from excavation, which is not incorporated into the site as fill, shall be become property of the Contractor and disposed of away from the job site, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, site grading shall not be measured for pay but shall be considered subsidiary to other work. END OF SECTION 02 10 40 SITE GRADING 02 10 40- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 02 24 20 SILT FENCE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for providing and installing silt fencing required to control sedimentation and erosion during construction of the project. 2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Geotextile shall meet the requirements for temporary silt fence per AASHTOM288. B. Fence Reinforcement Materials: Silt fence reinforcement shall be one of the following systems. Type 1: Self-Supported Fence- This system consists of fence posts, spaced no more than 8- 1/2 feet apart, and geotextile without net reinforcement. Fence posts shall be a minimum of 42 inches long, embedded at least one (1)foot into the ground, and constructed of either wood or steel. Soft wood posts shall be at least 3 inches in diameter or nominal 2 x 4 inches in cross section and essentially straight. Hardwood posts shall be a minimum of 1.5 x 1.5 inches in cross section. Fabric attachment may be by staples or locking plastic ties at least every 6 inches, or by sewn vertical pockets. Steel posts shall be T or L shaped with a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per foot. Attachment shall be by pockets or by plastic ties if the posts have suitable projections. Type 2: Net-Reinforced Fence - This system consists of fence posts, spaced no more than 8-1/2 feet apart, and geotextile with an attached reinforcing net. Fence posts shall meet the requirements of Self-Supported Fence. Net reinforcement shall be galvanized welded wire mesh of at least 12.5-gauge wire with maximum opening size of 4 x 2 inches. The fabric shall be attached to the top of the net by crimping or cord at least every 2 feet, or as otherwise specified. Type 3: Triangular Filter Dike- This system consists of a rigid wire mesh, at least 6-gauge, formed into an equilateral triangle cross-sectional shape with sides measuring 18 inches, wrapped with geotextile silt fence fabric. The fabric shall be continuously wrapped around the dike, with a skirt extending at least 12 inches from its upslope corner. C. Packaging Requirements: Prior to installation, the fabric shall be protected from damage due to ultraviolet light and moisture by either wrappers or inside storage. D. Certification and Identification: Each lot or shipment shall be accompanied by a certification of conformance to this specification. The shipment must be identified by a ticket or by labels securely affixed to the fabric rolls. This ticket or label must list the following information: a. Name of manufacturer or supplier b. Brand name and style SILT FENCE 02 24 20- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S C. Manufacturer's lot number or control number d. Roll size (length and width) e. Chemical composition 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, silt fence shall be measured by the linear foot. Payment shall be at the bid price for the unit of measurement specified and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.Payment shall include,but not be limited to,placing,maintaining and removing the silt fence. END OF SECTION 02 24 20 SILT FENCE 02 24 20-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 02 52 05 PAVEMENT REPAIR, CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK AND DRIVEWAY REPLACEMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the removal and replacing of all types of pavements and surfacing required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, materials and proportions used along with this specification shall conform to the respective following specifications: City Standard Specifications Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities" Section 022100 "Select Material" Section 025223 "Crushed Limestone Flexible Base" Section 025424 "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement" Section 025610 "Concrete Curb and Gutter" Section 025612 "Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways" Section 025620 "Portland Cement Concrete Pavement" Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Class "A" Concrete Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel" Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 3. METHOD OF CUTTING The outline of the trench shall be marked upon the surface of the pavement to be cut,and all cuts into the pavement shall be saw-cut as nearly vertical as it is possible to make them. All unwanted materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor and shall not be used as backfill material. 4. BACKFILL OF TRENCH Excavation and backfilling of trench shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." 5. REPLACING STREET AND OTHER PAVEMENT All pavements, driveways, sidewalks, and curbs and gutters which are cut shall be replaced in a workmanlike manner,with like or better materials or per pavement repair details to be provided on the drawings. Pavement cuts in a street for any utility requires a permit from the Director of Development Services in accordance with City Ordinance 030040, Article III Cuts and Excavations (12-17-2013). The PAVEMENT REPAIR, CURB, GUTTER,SIDEWALK,AND DRIVEWAY REPLACEMENT 02 S2 0S- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S installation of a utility that crosses the ROW at a perpendicular or near perpendicular angle and has an OD of 6" or less will not be permitted to be installed by cutting the road section. Street excavation/cut for a utility in an asphalt roadway shall include a full lane overlay or pavement repair for parallel cuts, or a 12' wide pavement repair for perpendicular cuts. Street excavation/cut for a utility in a concrete roadway shall include full panel replacement. The drawings and/or permit application should include a site specific pavement cut and restoration plan that indicates the general nature of the pavement and roadway (for examples, concrete arterial, asphalt residential) to be cut and restored, the existing pavement section (if known), the location and approximate area of the excavation/pavement repair, including the approximate length and width of the pavement repair in relation to the roadway travel lane(s). 6. REPLACING DRIVEWAY PAVEMENT On all concrete driveway pavements, the replacement shall consist of a reinforced Class"A"concrete slab with a minimum thickness of six(6)inches. The type of finish for the replaced section shall be the same as that appearing on the old pavement. Reinforcement shall be #4 bars at 12 inches each way with additional diagonal bars as indicated on the drawings. Any other type shall be replaced with like or better replacement. Replacement shall, in general,be to original joint or score mark. 7. REPLACING SIDEWALKS On all sidewalk pavements, the replacement shall consist of a reinforced Class "A" concrete slab four(4)inches thick. The type of finish for the replaced section shall be the same as that appearing on the old sidewalk. Replacement shall,in general,be to original joint or score marks. Reinforcement shall be 4" x 4" - W2.9 x W2.9 welded wire fabric located at mid-depth in the stab. 8. REPLACING CURB AND GUTTER On all curb and gutter, the replacement shall consist of a section conforming in all details to the original section or to City of Corpus Christi Standard curb and gutter section, if required by the Engineer. Cuts through the curb shall be replaced with Class "A" concrete. Preserve the original steel reinforcing and reinforce all new curbs with three#4 bars. Adjust grades for positive drainage. Replacement shall,in general,be to original joint or score mark. For jointed concrete roadways,the joints in curb or in curb and gutter should match the concrete roadway joints. 9. REPAIRING STREET SHOULDERS AND UNIMPROVED STREETS On streets or roads without curb and gutter where a shoulder is disturbed, it shall be restored to like or better condition. The shoulder surface shall be rolled to an acceptably stable condition. The requirements of City Ordinance 030040 as stated above apply also to unimproved streets unless a specific variance is granted by the Director of Development Services. PAVEMENT REPAIR, CURB, GUTTER,SIDEWALK,AND DRIVEWAY REPLACEMENT 02 S2 0S-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 10. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,pavement repair shall be measured by the square yard of the type of repair specified; curb and gutter replacement shall be measured by the linear foot; and sidewalk and driveway replacement shall each be measured by the square foot. Payment will be made at the unit price bid for the completed work and shall be full compensation for all labor, materials,equipment,tools, and incidentals required to complete the work. No separate measurement or payment will be made for subgrade compaction, sand leveling course, geogrid, ordinary backfill, cement-stabilized sand backfill, flexible base,prime coat, hot-mix asphaltic concrete,etc. END OF SECTION 02 52 05 PAVEMENT REPAIR, CURB, GUTTER,SIDEWALK,AND DRIVEWAY REPLACEMENT 02 52 05-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 02 52 10 LIME STABILIZATION 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of treating the subgrade, subbase or base by the pulverizing, addition of lime, mixing and compacting the mixed material to the required density. This specification applies to natural ground, embankment, existing pavement structure or proposed base, and shall be constructed as specified herein and in conformity with the typical sections, lines and grades as shown on the plans or as established by the Engineer. 2. MATERIALS (1) The lime shall be a commercially produced "Hydrated Lime" in accordance with AASHTO M216, or in accordance with TxDOT Specification Item 260. The specifications apply specifically to the normal hydrate of lime made from "high- calcium"type limestone. Hydrated lime for stabilization purposes shall be applied as a slurry. (2) Lime to be used for the treated subgrade, existing subbase, existing base or proposed base is determined by preliminary tests and shall be applied at a rate indicated on the drawings,but no less than 6%. 3. EQUIPMENT The machinery, tools and equipment necessary for proper prosecution of the work shall be on the project and approved by the Engineer prior to the beginning of construction operations. All machinery, tools and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner. Hydrated lime shall be stored and handled in closed weatherproof containers until immediately before distribution on the roadbed. If storage bins are used, they shall be completely enclosed. Hydrated lime in bags shall be stored in weatherproof buildings with adequate protection from ground dampness. If lime is furnished in trucks, each truck shall have the weight of lime certified on public scales. If lime is furnished in bags, each bag shall bear the manufacturer's certified weight. Bags varying more than 5 percent from that weight may be rejected and the average weight of bags in any shipment,as shown by weighing 50 bags taken at random, shall not be less than the manufacturer's certified weight. 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS General-It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform lime mixture, free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for LIME STABILIZATION 02 S2 10- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S placing subsequent courses.It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the proper amount of lime, maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the above requirements. Application - Lime shall be spread only on that area where the first mixing operations can be completed during the same working day. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, lime shall be applied at a rate in pounds of dry-hydrated lime per square yard, in the forin of a slurry. Application rate may be varied by the Engineer, if conditions warrant, but no less than 6% must be applied. Certification of lime quantity and quality shall be provided as required to monitor the application. Certification should be in the form of weight tickets which indicate the actual weight of dry hydrated lime, CA(OH)z. The application and mixing of lime with the material shall be accomplished by the method hereinafter described. The lime shall be mixed with water in trucks with approved distributors and applied as a thin water suspension or slurry. Mixing - The mixing procedure shall be as hereinafter described. (a) First Mixing: The material and lime shall be thoroughly mixed by approved road mixers or other approved equipment, and the mixing continued until, in the opinion of the Engineer, a homogeneous, friable mixture of material and lime is obtained, free from all clods or lumps. Materials containing plastic clays or other material which will not readily mix with lime shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of the lime application, brought to the proper moisture content and left to cure 1 to 4 days as directed by the Engineer. During the curing period, the material shall be kept moist as directed. (b) Final Mixing: After the required curing time, the material shall be uniformly mixed by approved methods. If the soil binder-lime mixture contains clods,they shall be reduced in size by raking, blading, discing, harrowing, scarifying or the use of other approved pulverization methods. After mixing, the Engineer may sample the mixture at roadway moisture and test in accordance with TxDOT Tex-101-E (Part II1)—Preparation of Soil and Flexible Base Material for Testing, to determine compliance with the gradation requirements in Table 1. Table 1 Gradation Requirements (Minimum% Passing) Sieve Size Base Subgrade 1-3/4" 100 100 3/4" 85 85 #4 — 60 Old bituminous wearing surface shall be pulverized so that 100% will pass a 2 %" sieve. LIME STABILIZATION 02 S2 10-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S During the interval of time between applications and mixing, hydrated lime that has been exposed to the open air for a period of 6 hours or more,or to excessive loss due to washing or blowing, will not be accepted for payment. Compaction - Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after final mixing and in no case later than 3 calendar days after final mixing, unless approval is obtained from the Engineer. The material shall be aerated or sprinkled as necessary to provide the optimum moisture. Compaction shall begin at the bottom and shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted as hereinafter specified. If the total thickness of the material to be treated cannot be mixed in one operation,the previously mixed material shall be bladed to a windrow just beyond the area to be treated and the next layer mixed with lime as previously specified. The first layer of the material shall be compacted in such a manner that the treated material will not be mixed with the underlying material. The course shall be sprinkled as required to maintain moisture content on the wet side of optimum and compacted to the extent necessary to provide the specified density. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings,all lime treated subgrades, sub-bases, and bases that are not in direct contact with surface or binder course shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density (AASHTO T99),unless otherwise specified. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the material shown on the plans shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. After each section is completed, tests, as necessary, will be made by the Engineer. If the material fails to meet the density requirements,it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements. Rework, when required to meet pulverization requirements or density requirements, shall include the addition of lime, about 10% to 15% of the initial application rate, or as deemed necessary by the Engineer. A new optimum density will be obtained. Throughout this entire operation, the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface, upon completion, shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the drawings and to the established lines and grades. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, lime stabilization for bases, sub-bases and subgrade shall be measured by the square yard of lime-stabilized material in place. Pulverizing, mixing,watering grading, compacting, working material etc., shall not be measured for pay but shall be subsidiary to other work. Payment shall be full compensation for all materials, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for the completion of work. END OF SECTION 02 52 10 LIME STABILIZATION 02 S2 10-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 02 56 12 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of sidewalks and driveways, with or without reinforcing steel, composed of Portland cement concrete, constructed as herein specified on an approved subgrade, in conformity with the lines and grades established by the Engineer and the details shown on the drawings. 2. MATERIALS Materials and proportions used in construction under this item shall conform to the requirements as specified for Class "A" concrete under City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements as specified in City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Expansion joint filler shall be redwood meeting the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". Cap seal shall be "Greenstreak" or approved equal. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The subgrade shall be excavated, compacted and shaped to line, grade and cross-section and hand tamped and sprinkled with water. Subgrade under concrete sidewalks and driveways shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. The subgrade shall be within 0-3% of optimum moisture content at the time the concrete is placed. Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Engineer, straight,free from warp, and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. They shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. The reinforcing steel shall be placed in position as shown on the drawings. Care shall be exercised to keep all reinforcing steel in its proper location. Driveways shall incorporate the gutter in a unified concrete placement as shown in the City Standard Detail for driveways. Sidewalks shall be constructed in sections of the lengths shown on drawings. Unless otherwise provided by the drawings, no section shall be of a length less than 8 feet, and any section less than 8 feet shall be removed by the Contractor at his own expense. The different sections shall be separated by a premolded insert or board j oint of the thickness shown on the drawings, placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the sidewalks. Where the sidewalk or driveways abut a curb or retaining wall, approved expansion joint material CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 02 S6 12- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations 423181 January 10, 202S shall be placed along their entire length. Similar expansion joint material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through sidewalks or driveways. Concrete shall be mixed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer,placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. The top surface shall be floated with a wooden float to a gritty texture. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with approved tools to the radii shown on drawings. 5-foot wide sidewalks shall be marked into separate sections, each 5 feet in length, by the use of approved j ointing tools. For other widths of sidewalk,j oints to be spaced longitudinally to match the transverse width. When completed,the sidewalks and driveways shall be cured with Type 2,white pigmented curing compound. Other methods of curing as outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,concrete sidewalks and driveways shall be measured by the square foot of surface area of completed sidewalks, driveways, or sidewalks and driveways, as indicated on the drawings. Payment shall be full compensation for preparing and compacting the subgrade; for furnishing and placing all materials including concrete, reinforcing steel and expansion joint material; and for all manipulation, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. END OF SECTION 02 5612 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 02 S6 12-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 03 00 20 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the materials used; for the storing and handling of materials; and for the proportioning and mixing of concrete for culverts,manholes, inlets, curb and gutter, sidewalks, driveways, curb ramps, headwalls and wingwalls, riprap, and incidental concrete construction. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates(fine and coarse),admixtures if desired or required, and water,proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type 1, 11 or III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and 11 cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram (Wagner Turbidimeter — TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). For concrete piling, the above limit on specific surface area is waived for Type 11 cement only. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer, with each shipment, a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement expressed in square centimeters per gram. For cement strength requirements, either the flexural or compressive test may be used. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type 11 is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement may be used in all precast prestressed concrete, except in piling when Type II cement is required for substructure concrete. Different types of cement may be used in the same structure, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type will be permitted in any one structure unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 2025 Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1000 parts per million of chlorides as CL nor more than 1000 parts per million of sulfates as SO4. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use in structural concrete. Tests shall be made in accordance with the "Method of Test for Quality of Water to be Used in Concrete" (AASHTO Method T26), except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this specification. (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel,crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combinations thereof; free from frozen material or injurious amount of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material either free or as an adherent coating; and its quality shall be reasonably uniform throughout. It shall not contain more than 0.25 percent by weight of clay lumps,nor more than 1.0 percent by weight of shale,nor more than 5 percent by weight of laminated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-413-A. It shall have a wear of not more than 40 percent when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-410-A. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, coarse aggregate will be subjected to five cycles of the soundness test in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-411-A. The loss shall not be greater than 12 percent when sodium sulfate is used, or 18 percent when magnesium sulfate is used. Permissible sizes of aggregate shall be governed by Table 4 and Table 1, except that when exposed aggregate surfaces are required, coarse aggregate gradation will be as specified on the plans. When tested by approved methods, the coarse aggregate, including combinations of aggregates when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 1. TABLE 1 Coarse Aggregate PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 2025 Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Nominal 2-1/2 2 1-'/z 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 Grade No. Size In. In. In. In. In. In. In. No. 4 No. 8 1 2 in. 0 0 to 15 60 to 95 to 20 to 80 100 50 2 (467)* 1-/2 in. 0 0 30 to 70 95 to to 65 to 100 5 90 4 (57)* 1 in. 0 0 40 90 to 95 to to to 100 100 5 75 8 3/8 in. 0 0 to 35 to 90 to 5 80 100 *Numbers in parenthesis indicate conformance with ASTM C33. The aggregate shall be washed. The Loss by Decantation (TxDOT Test Method Tex-406-A) plus the allowable weight of clay lumps, shall not exceed one percent, or the value shown on the plans, whichever is smaller. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable and uncoated particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof, with or without a mineral filler. It shall be free from frozen material or injurious amounts of salt,alkali,vegetable matter or other objectionable material and it shall not contain more than 0.5 percent by weight of clay lumps.When subjected to the color test for organic impurities (TxDOT Test Method Tex-408-A), it shall not show a color darker than standard. The fine aggregate shall produce a mortar having a tensile strength equal to or greater than that of Ottawa sand mortar when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-317-1). Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand for slab concrete subject to direct traffic,the acid insoluble residue of the fine aggregate shall be not less than 28 percent by weight when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-6124 When tested by approved methods, the fine aggregate or combination of aggregates, including mineral filler, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2. TABLE 2 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 202S Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate 3/8In. No. No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 No. Grade No. 4 200 1 0 0to 0to20 15to50 35to75 70to90 90to 97to 5 100 100 NOTE 1: Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand, the percent retained on the No. 200 sieve shall be 94 to 100. NOTE 2: Where the sand equivalent value is greater than 85, the retainage on the No. 50 sieve may be 70 to 94 percent. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test (TxDOT Test Method Tex-203- F). The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80 nor less than the value shown on the plans, whichever is greater. For concrete Classes `A' and `C', the fineness modulus as defined below for fine aggregates shall be between 2.30 and 3.10. The fineness modulus will be determined by adding the percentages by weight retained on the following sieves, and dividing by 100; Nos. 4, 8, 16, 30, 50 and 100. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar(Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium Chloride will not be permitted.Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining,retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the following requirements: A "water-reducing, retarding admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and will retard the initial set of the concrete. A"water-reducing admixture"is defined as a material which,when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 202S of a given consistency. (a) Retarding and Water-Reducing Admixtures. The admixture shall meet the requirements for Type A and Type D admixture as specified in ASTM Designation: C494, modified as follows: (1) The water-reducing retarder shall retard the initial set of the concrete a minimum of 2 hours and a maximum of 4 hours, at a specified dosage rate, at a temperature of 90°F. (2) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a"reference"Type I cement from one mill. (3) Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced and test concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. (b) Air-Entraining Admixture. The admixture shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: C260, modified as follows: (1) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a"reference"Type I cement from one mill. (2) Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. 3. STORAGE OF CEMENT All cement shall be stored in well-ventilated weatherproof buildings or approved bins, which will protect it from dampness or absorption of moisture. Storage facilities shall be ample, and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide easy access for identification and inspection. The Engineer may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the open for a maximum of 48 hours on a raised platform and under waterproofcovering. 4. STORAGE OF AGGREGATE The method of handling and storing concrete aggregate shall prevent contamination with foreign materials. If the aggregates are stored on the ground, the sites for the stockpiles shall be clear of all vegetation and level. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 2025 without recleaning. When conditions require the use of two or more sizes of aggregates, they shall be separated to prevent intermixing. Where space is limited, stockpiles shall be separated by physical barriers. Methods of handling aggregates during stockpiling and subsequent use shall be such that segregation will be minimized. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, all aggregate shall be stockpiled at least 24 hours to reduce the free moisture content. 5. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS The measurement of the materials,except water,used in batches of concrete,shall be by weight. The fine aggregate,coarse aggregate and mineral filler shall be weighed separately. Where bulk cement is used,it shall be weighed separately,but batch weighing of sacked cement will not be required. Where sacked cement is used,the quantities of material per batch shall be based upon using full bags of cement. Batches involving the use of fractional bags will not be permitted. Allowance shall be made for the water content in the aggregates. Bags of cement varying more than 3 percent from the specified weight of 94 pounds may be rejected, and when the average weight per bag in any shipment, as determined by weighing 50 bags taken at random,is less than the net weight specified,the entire shipment may be rejected. If the shipment is accepted, the Engineer will adjust the concrete mix to a net weight per bag fixed by an average of all individual weights which are less than the average weight determined from the total number weighed. 6. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design,using a coarse aggregate factor acceptable to the Engineer, for the class(es) of concrete specified. The mix shall be designed by a qualified concrete technician to conform with the requirements contained herein and in accordance with the THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete,and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used,the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 2025 shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be more than 0.82,except that when the voids in the coarse aggregate exceed 48 percent of the total dry loose volume, the coarse aggregate factor shall not exceed 0.85. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be less than 0.70 for Grades 1, 2 and 3 aggregates. If the strength required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the cement specified in Table 4, the Contractor may use an approved water-reducing or retarding admixture, or he shall furnish aggregates with different characteristics which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until the redesign is checked. Water-reducing or retarding agents may be used with all classes of concrete at the option of the Contractor. When water-reducing or retarding agents are used at the option of the Contractor, reduced dosage of the admixture will be permitted. Entrained air will be required in accordance with Table 4. The concrete shall be designed to entrain 5 percent air when Grade 2 coarse aggregate is used and 6 percent when Grade 3 coarse aggregate is used. Concrete as placed in the structure shall contain the proper amount as required above with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percentage points. Occasional variations beyond this tolerance will not be cause for rejection.When the quantity of entrained air is found to be above 7 percent with Grade 2 coarse aggregate or above 8 percent for Grade 3 coarse aggregate, additional test beams or cylinders will be made. If these beams or cylinders pass the minimum flexural or compressive requirements, the concrete will not be rejected because of the variation in air content. 7. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water,the Contractor may use,or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or pennitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregate or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 2025 water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive,possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements will be as specified in Table 3. TABLE 3 Slump Requirements Concrete Designation Desired Slump Max. Slump Structural Concrete: (1) Thin-Walled Sections (9" or less) 4 inches 5 inches (2) Slabs, Caps, Columns,Piers, Wall Sections over 9", etc. 3 inches 4 inches Underwater or Seal Concrete 5 inches 6 inches Riprap, Curb, Gutter and Other Miscellaneous Concrete 2.5 inches 4 inches NOTE: No concrete will be pennitted with slump in excess of the maximums shown. 8. QUALITY OF CONCRETE General The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio, the desired and maximum slump and the strength requirements of the various classes of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Table 3 and Table 4 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer or his designated representative will cast test cylinders or beams as a check on the compressive or flexural strength of the concrete actually placed. Test cylinders must be picked up by the testing lab within 24 hours. A test shall be defined as the average of the breaking strength of two cylinders or two beams, as the case may be. Specimens will be tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods Tex- 418-A or Tex-420-A. Test beams or cylinders will be required as specified in the contract documents. For small placements on structures such as manholes, inlets, culverts, wingwalls, etc., the Engineer may vary the number of tests to a minimum of one for each 25 cubic yards placed over a several day period. All test specimens,beams or cylinders,representing tests for removal of forms and/or falsework shall be cured using the same methods, and under the same conditions as the concrete represented. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 2025 "Design Strength" beams and cylinders shall be cured in accordance with THD Bulletin C- 11. The Contractor shall provide and maintain curing facilities as described in THD Bulletin C-11 for the purpose of curing test specimens. Provision shall be made to maintain the water in the curing tank at temperatures between 70°F and 90°F. When control of concrete quality is by twenty-eight-day compressive tests, job control will be by seven-day compressive tests which are shown to provide the required twenty-eight-day strength,based on results from trial batches. If the required seven-day strength is not secured with the cement specified in Table 4, changes in the batch design will be made. TABLE 4 Classes of Concrete Minimum Class Compressive Min. Beam Maximum Coarse of Sacks Cement Strength (fc) Strength Water-Cement Aggregate Concrete per C.Y. (min.) 28-Day(psi) 7-Day(psi) Ratio (gal/sack) No. A* 5.0 3000 500*** 6.5 2-4-8**** B* 4.5 2500 417 8.0 2-4-8**** C* 6.0 3600 600*** 6.0 1-2-4** D 6.0 3000 500 7.0 2-4 S 6.5 4000 570 5.0 2-4 *Entrained Air (slabs, piers and bent concrete). **Grade I Coarse Aggregate may be used in foundation only (except cased drilled shafts). ***When Type II Cement is used with Class C Concrete, the 7-day beam break requirement will be 550 psi; with Class A Concrete, the minimum 7-day beam break requirement will be 460 psi. ****Permission to use Grade 8 Aggregate must have prior approval of the Engineer. 9. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Retamping of concrete will not be permitted. In threatening weather, which may result in conditions that will adversely affect the quality of the concrete to be placed, the Engineer may order postponement of the work. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures,the Contractor shall PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 2025 furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall, or from freezing temperatures. If necessary to continue operations during rainfall, the Contractor shall also provide protective coverings for the material stockpiles. Aggregate stockpiles need be covered only to the extent necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregates to adequately control the consistency of the concrete. 10. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT All equipment, tools, and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work underway without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. The mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform distribution of the material throughout the mass. Mixers may be either the revolving drum type or the revolving blade type, and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. After all the ingredients are assembled in the drum, the mixing shall continue not less than 1 minute for mixers of one cubic yard or less capacity plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. The mixer shall operate at the speed and capacity designated by the Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. The mixer shall have a plate affixed showing the manufacturer's recommended operating data. The absolute volume of the concrete batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer for each placement shall contain an extra quantity of sand, cement and water sufficient to coat the inside surface of the drum. Upon the cessation of mixing for any considerable length of time, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. The concrete mixer shall be equipped with an automatic timing device which is put into operation when the skip is raised to its full height and dumping. This device shall lock the discharging mechanism and prevent emptying of the mixer until all the materials have been mixed together for the minimum time required, and it shall ring a bell after the specified time of mixing has elapsed. The water tank shall be arranged so that the amount of water can be measured accurately, and when the tank starts to discharge, the inlet supply shall cut off automatically. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 2025 Whenever a concrete mixer is not adequate or suitable for the work, it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Engineer and a suitable mixer provided by the Contractor. Pick-up and thro-over blades in the drum of the mixer which are worn down more than 10 percent in depth shall be repaired or replaced with new blades. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in the structure. Job mix concrete shall be concrete mixed in an approved batch mixer in accordance with the requirements stated above, adjacent to the structure for which the concrete is being mixed, and moved to the placement site in non-agitating equipment. 11. READY-MIX PLANTS A. General. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish concrete meeting all requirement of the governing specification sections, and concrete not meeting the slump,workability and consistency requirements of the governing specification sections shall not be placed in the structure or pavement. Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be mixed and delivered by means of one of the following approved methods. (1) Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and transported to the point of delivery in a truck agitator or a truck mixer operating at truck agitator or truck mixer agitation speed. (Central-Mix Concrete) (2) Mixed complete in a truck mixer and transported to the placement site at mixing and/or agitating speed (Transit-Mix Concrete), subject to the following provisions: (a) Truck mixers will be permitted to transport concrete to the job site at mixing speed if equipped with double actuated counters which will separate revolutions at mixing speed from total revolutions. (b) Truck mixers equipped with a single actuated counter counting total revolutions of the drum shall mix the concrete at the plant not less than 50 nor more than 70 revolutions at mixing speed,transport it to the job site at agitating speed and complete the required mixing before placing the concrete. (3) Mixed completely in a stationery mixer and transported to the job site in approved non-agitating trucks with special bodies. This method of transporting will be permitted for concrete pavement only. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Equipment. (1) Batching Plant. The batching plant shall be provided with adequate bins for batching all aggregates and materials required by the specifications. Bulk cement shall be weighed on a scale separate from those used for other materials and in a hopper entirely free and independent of that used for weighing the aggregates. (2) Mixers and Agitators. (a) General: Mixers shall be of an approved stationary or truck-type capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection, cleaning and repair of blades. Mixers and agitators shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades, and any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced with new in accordance with the manufacturer's design and arrangement for that particular unit when any part or section is worn as much as 10 percent below the original height of the manufacturer's design. (b) Stationary Mixers: These shall conform to the requirements of Article "Mixing and Mixing Equipment".Truck mixers mounted on a stationary base will not be considered as astationary mixer. (c) Truck Mixers: In addition,truck mixers shall comply with the following requirements: An engine in satisfactory working condition and capable of accurately gauging the desired speed of rotation shall be mounted as an integral part of the mixing unit for the purpose of rotating the drum. Truck mixers equipped with a transmission that will govern the speed of the drum within the specified revolutions per minute (rpm)will not require a separate engine. All truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the proper number of revolutions of the drum, as specified in Article 11. A. above, may be readily verified. The counters shall be read and recorded at the start of mixing at mixing speeds. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20-12 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 202S Each until shall have adequate water supply and accurate metering or gauging devices for measuring the amount used. (d) Agitators: Concrete agitators shall be of the truck type, capable of maintaining a thoroughly mixed and uniform concrete mass and discharging it within the same degree of uniformity specified for mixers. Agitators shall comply with all of the requirements for truck mixers, except for the actual mixing requirements. C. Operation of Plant and Equipment. Delivery of ready-mixed concrete shall equal or exceed the rate approved by the Engineer for continuous placement. In all cases, the delivery of concrete to the placement site shall assure compliance with the time limits in the applicable specification for depositing successive batches in any monolithic unit. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate standby trucks are available. A standard ticket system will be used for recording concrete batching, mixing and delivery date. Tickets will be delivered to the job inspector. Loads arriving without ticket and/or in unsatisfactory condition shall not be used. When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing operation,the mixing time for one cubic yard of concrete shall be one minute plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof This mixing time shall start when all cement, aggregates and initial water have entered the drum. The mixer shall be charged so that some of the mixing water will enter the drum in advance of the cement and aggregate. All of the mixing water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one- fourth of the specified mixing time. Water used to flush down the blades after charging shall be accurately measured and included in the quantity of mixing water. The introduction of the initial mixing water, except blade wash down water and that permitted in this Article, shall be prior to or simultaneous with the charging of the aggregates and cement. The loading of truck mixers shall not exceed 63 percent of the total volume of the drum.When used as an agitator only, the loading shall not exceed 80 percent of the drum volume. When Ready-Mix Concrete is used, additional mortar (one sack cement, three parts sand and sufficient water) shall be added to the batch to coat the drum of the mixer or agitator truck, and this shall be required for every load of Class C concrete only and for the first batch from central mix plants. A portion of the mixing water, required by the batch design to produce the desired slump, may be withheld and added at the job site, but only with permission of the Engineer and under his supervision. When water is added under the above conditions,it shall be thoroughly mixed as specified below for water added at the job site. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20-13 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 2025 Mixing speed shall be attained as soon as all ingredients are in the mixer, and each complete batch (containing all the required ingredients) shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed except that when water is added at the job site,25 revolutions (minimum) at mixing speed will be required to uniformly disperse the additional water throughout the mix. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. The agitating speed shall be not less than one (1)nor more than five(5) rpm. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. 12. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete of the various classifications which will constitute the completed and accepted structure(s) in-place will be measured by the cubic yard, per each, square foot, square yard or linear foot, as the case may be. Measurement will be as shown on the drawings and/or in the Bid Form. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. END OF SECTION 03 00 20 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 00 20-14 La Retama Central Library Exterior Improvements-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 03 70 40 EPDXY COMPOUNDS (S-44) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary to provide and apply Epoxy compounds. 2. MATERIALS (USE- TYPE) (1) Epoxy Bonding Compound for bonding new concrete to hardened concrete or other structural material: Epoxy Bonding Compound shall be a two component, 100% solids,moisture insensitive system.Epoxy shall be "FX-752 Bonding Agent" as manufactured by Fox Industries Inc. of Baltimore, Maryland or "Sikastix 370, Sikadur Hi-Mod" as manufactured by Sika Chemical Corporation of Lyndhurst, New Jersey or approved equal. (2) Epoxy Grout for Epoxy patch on non-horizontal surfaces to concrete: Epoxy Compound shall be a low-modulus,high viscosity, moisture insensitive system. Epoxy shall be "Sikastix 360, Skadur Lo-Mod Gel" as manufactured by Sika Chemical Corporation, or approved equal. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS (1) Bond new concrete to existing concrete: a. Surface Preparation: The existing concrete or structural surface to which the new concrete is to be bonded shall be cleaned. The existing surface shall be made free from dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds, waxes and all foreign material. Cleaning shall be done by sandblasting,mechanical abrasion, or(by washing only if authorized by the Engineer). During application of bonding compound,surface may be dry, moist, or wet,but surface shall be free of standing water. b. Proportioning and Mixing; The epoxy shall be proportioned and mixed in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions. The epoxy shall be used in a neat condition(without aggregate filler). c. Application of Epoxy The epoxy bonding compound shall be applied to the prepared surface with the minimum allowable coverages as follows: Concrete (float finished, cleaned by washing) 75 SF/gal Concrete (rough finish, cleaned by sandblast or mechanical abrasion) 50 SF/gal Other surfaces as specified on the drawings d. Concrete Overlay: The concrete overlay shall be in accordance with the drawings or 030020 of standard specifications. The concrete overlay shall be applied over the epoxy within a period of time which SHALL NOT EXCEED 60% of the tack EPDXY COMPOUNDS 03 70 40- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 free time of the epoxy. It is important for the Contractor to note that these times vary with the temperature and pot time. The following allowable times (60% of tack free time, where the tack free time is the period of time from initial mixing of the two components until the thin film of epoxy hardens) are provided below. The allowable times must be determined from the tack free times which are provided by the manufacturer. The following allowable times are averages and provided only as an aid to the Contractor: Temperature Allowable Elapse Time from Mixing Epoxy Until Placing Concrete Overlay 90OF 40 min. 80OF 12 hrs. 70OF 22 hrs. 60OF 32 hrs. If the allowable period of time is allowed to elapse before concrete overlay can be placed,another layer of epoxy shall be applied prior to placement of the concrete. (2) Epoxy Grout for patch to non-horizontal surfaces to concrete: a. Surface Preparation: The surface shall be prepared as described in (1) Bond new concrete to existing concrete Part a. b. Proportioning and Mixing_ The epoxy shall be proportioned and mixed in strict accordance with the manufacturer instruction. The epoxy may be mixed with dry masonry sand. Sand shall conform to A.S.T.M. C-144 with 100%passing a No. 8 sieve and not more than 15%to 35% passing a No. 50 mesh sieve. The amount of sand filler shall not exceed 3/4 to 1 (loose sand to epoxy byvolume). c. Application: Epoxy shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. Area adjacent to work shall be cleaned free of epoxy spills as to provide a neat appearance before work will be accepted. 4. GENERAL PRECAUTION The Contractor is advised to become familiar with type of epoxy, application, and its method of basic limitations prior to using the epoxy. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT EPDXY COMPOUNDS 03 70 40-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Epoxy Compounds shall be considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. END OF SECTION 03 70 40 EPDXY COMPOUNDS 03 70 40-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 0177 00 -CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. B. Related Requirements: 1. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Division 02 through 33. 2. Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination"for project closeout meeting. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. List of Incomplete Items: Contractor-prepared list of items to be completed or corrected, prepared for the Architect's use prior to Architect's inspection, to determine if the Work is substantially complete. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items required by other Sections. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's "punch list"), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. Comply with the General Conditions 9.8.2 Contractor (Punch List) comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected. B. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items,the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. C. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction, permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including Project Record Documents,operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owner's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. D. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion:Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner.Advise the Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct the Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings as needed to fully explain each item or procedure. 6. Advise the Owner of changeover in utility services. 7. Participate with the Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements. 10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. E. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request,Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request the Architect's reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.8 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final, updated Application for Payment in accordance with Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements for the Work. 5. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 6. Submit pest-control final inspection report. 7. Submit Final Completion photographic documentation. B. Re-inspection: The Architect will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items that show completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 1. Upon completion of re-inspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If the Work is incomplete, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary, re-inspection will be repeated one time for a total of three (3) punch-list inspections, including the Substantial Completion punch-list. Additional re-inspections required due to Contractor's failure to complete the punch-list will be billed to the Contractor at the Architect's customary billing rates for the personnel involved. 1.9 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1.10 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately.Where Shop Drawing are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. 3. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set. C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda. Include with the Project Manual one (1) copy of other written construction document, such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction. 1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. 2. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealed construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. 3. Not related record drawing information and Product Data. 4. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's records. D. Record Product Data: Maintain one (1) copy of each Product Data submittal. Note related Change Orders and markup of record drawings and Specifications. 1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. 2. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. 3. Upon completion of the markup, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Architect for Owner's records. E. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 2 inch, 3-ring, vinyl- covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Submit a preliminary maintenance manual for review by the Architect before or with the 50%application for payment.Submit three (3)copies of the final maintenance manual prior to final acceptance of the project. Include the following types of information: 1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Recommended "turn-around" cycles. 6. Inspection procedures. 7. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 8. Contact names, addresses and telephone numbers for service and supplies. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 F. Electronic Submission Requirements: Provide CD-ROM disk with electronic copies (PDF format) of all final submittals, shop drawings, product data, record drawings, record specifications and maintenance manuals. Organize electronic files to match submitted paper documents. 1.11 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion,or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. D. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. 1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. E. Warranties in Paper Form: 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. F. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning.Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site of rubbish,waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Clean flooring, removing debris, dirt, and staining; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations. i. Vacuum and mop concrete. j. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. k. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. I. Remove labels that are not permanent. M. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. P. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA ACR. Provide written report on completion of cleaning. q. Clean luminaires, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. r. Clean strainers. S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements of local, state and federal authorities having jurisdiction. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste-disposal requirements in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations required by Section 01 73 00 "Execution" before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 0177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 0125 00 -SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0123 10 "Alternates and Allowances" for products selected under an allowance and products selected under an alternate. 2. Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements"for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit documentation identifying product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use "Substitution Request"form provided by Architect. 2. Documentation:Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size, durability,visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples,where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and addresses as well as names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. I. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated. M. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. C. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0125 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Digital project management procedures. 5. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0132 00 "Construction Progress Documentation"for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 0173 00 "Execution"for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures"for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses, cellular telephone PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S numbers, and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results, where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and scheduled activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely indicated on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. C. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternative sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within plenums to accommodate layout of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms, showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications,sleeves,anchor bolts, bearing plates,angles,door floor closers,slab depressions for floor finishes,curbs and housekeeping pads,and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work:Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components,such as dampers,valves,diffusers,access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. C. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. 7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire- alarm locations. C. Panel board,switchboard,switchgear,transformer, busway,generator,and motor- control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following: a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 9. Review:Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that, in general,the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail,or are otherwise deficient,Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make suitable modifications and resubmit. 10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1. File Preparation Format: a. Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 2. File Submittal Format:Submit or post coordination drawing files using PDF format. 3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital data files will be provided in the software and format that is used to prepare the Contract Documents.Translations to different programs or modifications to the drawing setup will be the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement included in this Project Manual or furnished by the Architect. 1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Owner name. 3. Owner's Project number. 4. Name of Architect. 5. Architect's Project number. 6. Date. 7. Name of Contractor. 8. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 9. RFI subject. 10. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 11. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 12. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 13. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 14. Contractor's signature. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 15. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings,coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain,and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized bythe RFI number.Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number, including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.7 PROJECT WEB SITE A. Use Owner's Project Web site for purposes of hosting and managing project communication and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include the following functions: 1. Project directory. 2. Project correspondence. 3. Meeting minutes. 4. Contract modifications forms and logs. 5. RFI forms and logs. 6. Task and issue management. 7. Photo documentation. 8. Schedule and calendar management. 9. Submittals forms and logs. 10. Substitution requests. 11. Payment application forms. 12. Drawing and specification document hosting, viewing and updating. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 13. Online document collaboration. 14. Reminder and tracking functions. 15. Archiving functions. B. On completion of Project, provide one complete archive copy(ies) of Project Web site files to Owner and to Architect in a digital storage format acceptable to Architect. C. The Contractor, subcontractors and other parties granted access by Owner to Project Web Site shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement acceptable to Owner and Architect. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of seven days prior to meeting. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. 4. Notification: Inform participants three days prior to meetings not regularly scheduled. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;suppliers;and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. C. Phasing. d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. e. Designation of key personnel and their duties. f. Lines of communications. g. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. h. Procedures for RFIs. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 i. Procedures for processing Submittals. j. Procedures for processing substitution requests. k. Procedures for processing field decisions, proposal requests and Change Orders. I. Procedures for testing and inspecting. M. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. n. Distribution of the Contract Documents. o. Procedures for moisture and mold control. P. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. q. Construction waste management and recycling. r. Office, work and storage areas. S. Preparation of Record Documents. t. Use of the premises and existing building. U. Work restrictions. V. Working hours. W. Owner's occupancy requirements. X. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. Y. Procedures for moisture and mold control. Z. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. aa. Construction waste management and recycling. bb. Office, work, and storage areas. cc. Equipment deliveries and priorities. dd. First aid. ee. Security. ff. Progress cleaning. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other Sections and when required for coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. For exterior installations that require TDI Certification, include the TDI Inspector. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. I. Weather limitations. M. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. P. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. TDI Certification requirements. U. Testing and inspecting requirements. V. Installation procedures. W. Coordination with other work. X. Required performance results. Y. Protection of adjacent work. Z. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,including the following: a. Preparation of Record Documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. C. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. i. Submittal procedures for closeout documents. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. I. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. M. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. E. Progress Meetings: Contractor will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time,ahead of schedule,or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site use. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Work hours. 11) Hazards and risks. 12) Progress cleaning. 13) Quality and work standards. 14) Status of correction of deficient items. 15) Field observations. 16) Status of RFIs. 17) Status of Proposal Requests. 18) Pending changes. 19) Status of Change Orders. 20) Pending claims and disputes. 21) Documentation of information for payment requests. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 22) Testing and inspection requirements. 23) Other business relating to the Work. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of the progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Contractor shall revise the construction schedule after each progress meeting,where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. F. Coordination Meetings: Contractor will conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals corresponding to the Work that needs to be coordinated. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes,such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting, where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. C. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00-12 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 7) Access. 8) Site use. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Work hours. 11) Hazards and risks. 12) Progress cleaning. 13) Quality and work standards. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Proposal Requests. 16) Change Orders. 17) Pending changes. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00-13 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 0132 00 -CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements"for schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity:A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction Project.Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity:An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity:An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for completing an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum. C. CPM:Critical path method,which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine the critical path of Project and when activities can be performed. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S E. Event:The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float:The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for completing an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals:Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file. 2. PDF file. B. Startup construction schedule. 1. Submittal of cost-loaded startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit a working digital copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports:Submit with Applications for Payment. E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. F. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. H. Unusual Event Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities, and schedule them in proper sequence. 3. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the Owner's construction schedule for Owner's own forces. Revise Contractor's construction schedule, if necessary, after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedule shall then constitute the schedule to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and Owner until subsequently revised. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting, using CPM scheduling. 1. In-House Option: Owner may waive requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each floor or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead-time items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days,as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing,fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and Final Completion. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 7. Demonstration and Training: Training of Owner's personnel as indicated in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing:Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use-of-premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to,the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. C. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. I. Building flush-out. M. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 5. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. C. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. See Division 01 "General Requirements"for cost reporting and payment procedures. G. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and the Contract Time. H. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Final Completion percentage for each activity. 4. Notify Owner, Construction Project Manager and Architect a minimum of one week prior to issuance of updated schedule of all anticipated significant revisions to the Construction Schedule. I. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 J. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post electronic copies of the updated project schedule on the project website. 2. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 3. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. 1.7 CPM SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node)format. B. Startup Network Diagram:Submit diagram within 14 days of the date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule,so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule to coordinate with the Contract Time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration,sequence requirements,and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. C. Purchase of materials. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and inspection. j. Commissioning. k. Punch list and Final Completion. I. Activities occurring following Final Completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates.Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall Project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight"early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 10. Dollar value of activity(coordinated with the schedule of values). G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. 1.8 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Testing and inspection. 8. Accidents. 9. Meetings and significant decisions. 10. Unusual events. 11. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 12. Meter readings and similar recordings. 13. Emergency procedures. 14. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 15. Change Orders received and implemented. 16. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 17. Services connected and disconnected. 18. Equipment or system tests and startups. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 19. Partial completions and occupancies. 20. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. D. Unusual Event Reports:When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at the Project site,whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. 1. Submit unusual event reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0132 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 0132 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Concealed Work photographs. 3. Periodic construction photographs. 4. Final Completion construction photographs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures"for submitting photographic documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 2. Section 02 4119 "Selective Demolition"for photographic documentation before selective demolition operations commence. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Submit photos by uploading to web-based Project management software site. Include copy of key plan indicating each photograph's location and direction. 2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of location, vantage point, and direction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan. PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional photographer of construction projects for not less than three years. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs. B. General:Take photographs with maximum depth of field and in focus. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of the Work,take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Take photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 2. Take photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property, to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. 3. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements. D. Concealed Work Photographs: Before proceeding with installing work that will conceal other work,take photographs sufficient in number,with annotated descriptions,to record nature and location of concealed Work. E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 50 photographs bi-weekly. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. F. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 100 photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents.Architect will inform photographer of desired vantage points. G. Additional Photographs:Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. 1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. C. Photographs shall be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. f. Owner's request for special publicity photographs. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0132 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 0133 00 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 "General Requirements"for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination"for submitting coordination drawings and subcontract list and for requirements for web-based Project software. 3. Section 0133 01 "Submittal Register"for list of submittal requirements. 4. Section 0132 00 "Construction Progress Documentation"for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 5. Section 0132 33 "Photographic Documentation"for submitting preconstruction photographs, periodic construction photographs, and Final Completion construction photographs. 6. Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements"for submitting test and inspection reports, and schedule of tests and inspections. 7. Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures"for submitting closeout submittals and maintenance material submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals arethose submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S A FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format(PDF):An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed- layout document format. 1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submittal Schedule:Submit,as an action submittal,a list of submittals,arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal Schedule: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal Schedule: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule as required to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format:Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. C. Submittal Category:Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled dates for purchasing. h. Scheduled date of fabrication. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 5. Architect reserves the right to withhold 10 percent of each payment request, in addition to retainage fee, if any, until the submittal schedule is received and accepted by the Architect. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of Drawings of the Contract Drawings and Project Manual will not be provided by Architect. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all Action and Informational submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. a. Exception:Where samples for initial selection and samples for verification are both required, submit samples for verification after initial selection has been returned by Architect. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.The Architect will document on submittal the date and time of receipt. Submittals received by the Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Delaying submittals to facilitate coordination between submittals shall not constitute a delay of the Work nor shall it be the basis for an extension of time. 2. Sequential Review: Sequential review is a submittal that requires review by more than one design discipline. Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. 3. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. 4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 5. Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. D. Paper Submittals:Place a permanent label ortitle block on each submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project Name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of Subcontractor. f. Name of Supplier. g. Name of Manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. Submittals shall be numbered with the Section number, followed by a dash, followed by a three-digit number, followed by a dash, and ending in a sequential submission number as indicated below. The numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions. 1) Section Number: Section number where submittal is specified. 2) Two-digit Number: Sequential number, beginning with "01," for each submittal transmitted to Architect for each Section. 3) Submission Number: Use ".0" for initial submittal, ".1" for first resubmittal, ".2"for second resubmittal, and so forth. 4) Three-Digit Number: Sequential number, beginning with (001), for each submittal issued to Architect chronologically. a) Example: 061000.01.0 - (001) - (Section 061000, first submission of the Section, initial submittal). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. I. Other necessary identification. 4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect or Construction Project Manager observe noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. a. Submit one copy of the submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect and Construction Project Manager. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals:Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling navigation to each item. a. Unique identifier, including revision number. Submittals shall be numbered with the Section number, followed by a dash, followed by a three-digit number, followed by a dash, and ending in a sequential submission number as indicated below. The numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions. 1) Section Number: Section number where submittal is specified. 2) Two-digit Number: Sequential number, beginning with "01," for each submittal transmitted to Architect for each Section. 3) Submission Number: Use ".0" for initial submittal, ".1" for first resubmittal, ".2"for second resubmittal, and so forth. 4) Three-Digit Number: Sequential number, beginning with (001), for each submittal issued to Architect chronologically. a) Example: 061000.01.0 - (001) - (Section 061000, first submission of the Section, initial submittal). b) Example:061000.01.1-(001.R1)-(Section 061000,first submission of the Section, first resubmittal, third submittal issued in chronological order, but Resubmittal). c) Example: 055000.01.0 - (020) - (Section 055000, first submission of the Section,twentieth submittal issued in chronological order). d) Example: 055000.07.0 - (030) - (Section 055000, seventh submission of the Section, thirtieth submittal issued in chronological order, but Resubmittal). e) Example: 055000.07.1 - (030.R1) - (Section 055000, seventh submission of the Section,first resubmittal,fiftieth submittal issued in chronological order, but Resubmittal). 2. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Scanned Copies: Legible scanned PDF files of paper originals are acceptable. Scanned submittals that are not legible will be rejected. 4. Sheet Orientation: Orient PDF sheets to a "Ready-to-Read" orientation with majority of text horizontal to the sheet with no additional adjustments or formatting required by the viewer. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 5. File Security: Do not set any permissions on the file. Protected documents will not be accepted. 6. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software. 7. Metadata: Include the following information in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Title: Project title. b. Author: Contractor's name. C. Subject: Submittal type (product data, shop drawing, report, etc.) d. Keywords: Number and title of appropriate Specification Section; manufacturer name; product name/model number. 8. File Size: Limit file size of each submittal as follows. Break larger PDF files into multiple packages where necessary to meet delivery restrictions. Identify split packages as"1 of#" and "2 of#" in the subject line. a. Email Delivery: 2 Megabytes. b. FTP Delivery: 100 Megabytes. F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate document, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same identification information as related submittal. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in the same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are stamped with Architect's action stamp marker "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED," and Project Manager's approval notation. 4. Costs of compensation for Architect's additional services and expenses made necessary for review of submittals exceeding the limits set forth below shall be at the Contractor's expense. a. Reviews of Each Submittal:Two, including initial review. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals with Architect's action stamp marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS AS NOTED." K. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been reviewed by the Architect and returned to Contractor with Architect's action stamp marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or"MAKE CORRECTIONS AS NOTED." PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 0140 00 -QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work results are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0123 10 "Alternates and Allowances"for testing and inspection allowances. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced," unless otherwise further described, means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Quality-Control Tests and Inspections:Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor,to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly,and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a Work result does not require that certain construction activities specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0140 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 D. Mockups: Physical assemblies of portions of the Work constructed to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. Mockups are not Samples. 1. Mockups are used for one or more of the following: a. Verify selections made under Sample submittals. b. Demonstrate aesthetic effects. C. Demonstrate the qualities of products and workmanship. d. Demonstrate successful installation of interfaces between components and systems. e. Perform preconstruction testing to determine system performance. 2. Product Mockups: Mockups that may include multiple products, materials, or systems specified in a single section. 3. In-Place Mockups: Mockups constructed on-site in their actual final location as part of permanent construction. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Unless otherwise indicated, copies of reports of tests or inspections performed for other than the Project do not meet this definition. F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory(NRTL)according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. G. Source Quality-Control Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source (e.g., plant, mill,factory, or shop). H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. The term "testing laboratory" has the same meaning as the term "testing agency." I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work,to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work, to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect. 1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0140 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. If the criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated Design Services Statement:Submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements is specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, inform the Architect regarding the conflict and obtain clarification prior to proceeding with the Work. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for clarification before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified is the minimum provided or performed.The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Mockup Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, sections, elevations, and details, indicating materials and size of mockup construction. 2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 3. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities. B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel. C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0140 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2. Primary wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. F. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified. G. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions,tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities and to coordinate Owner's quality-assurance and quality-control activities. Coordinate with Contractor's Construction Schedule. B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. 1. Project quality-control manager may have other Project responsibilities but may not also serve as Project Superintendent. C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0140 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections, including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. Distinguish source quality-control tests and inspections from field quality- control tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the Statement of Special Inspections. 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by Commissioning Authority. E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring the Work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports, including log of approved and rejected results. Include Work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming Work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.9 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample-taking and testing and inspection. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0140 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address,telephone number, and email address of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement of whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement of whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance,as well as sufficient production capacity to produce the required units.As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce the required units. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0140 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications:A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system,assembly,or product that is similar in material,design,and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists will satisfy qualification requirements indicated and engage in the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing and Inspecting Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented in accordance with ASTM E329, and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material,design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect, demonstrate, repair, and perform service on installations of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following Contractor's responsibilities, including the following: 1. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. 2. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficienttime fortesting and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 3. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. 4. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups, using installers who will perform the same tasks for Project. 5. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0140 00-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 6. Testing Agency Responsibilities:Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect,with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections, and state in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups of size indicated. 2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3. Notify the Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers who will be employed to perform the same tasks during the construction of the Project. 5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting corresponding Work,fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 7. Promptly correct unsatisfactory conditions noted by Architect's preliminary review,to the satisfaction of the Architect, before completion of final mockup. 8. Approval of mockups by the Architect does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 9. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 10. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.11 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to perform. 2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspection allowances specified in Section 012100 "Allowances," as authorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0140 00-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not,to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services. a. Contractor will not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspection requested by the Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they are so directed. C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify the Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections, and state in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate,of each test, inspection,and similar quality- control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform duties of Contractor. E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0140 00-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. G. Contractor's Associated Requirements and Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality- control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's Construction Schedule. Update and submit with each Application for Payment. 1. Schedule Contents: Include tests, inspections, and quality-control services, including Contractor- and Owner-retained services, commissioning activities, and other Project- required services paid for by other entities. 2. Distribution: Distribute the schedule to Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.12 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures, reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying the Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to the Architect and Commissioning Authority with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections, and stating in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected Work. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. The date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. The date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's and Commissioning Authority's reference during normal working hours. 1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample-taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 0173 00 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 C. Repair and protection are the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00-12 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 014100 -TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 PROCEDURE A. Testing Laboratory: An independent testing laboratory will be selected and furnished by the Owner to inspect and test the materials and methods of construction as hereinafter specified for compliance with the specification requirements of the Contract Documents and to perform such other specialized technical services as required by the Owner or his representative. All testing lab services shall be paid for by the owner. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF TESTING LABORATORY A. The Testing Laboratory selected shall meet the basic requirements of ASTM E329 "Standard of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction", and shall submit to the Contractor, Owner,Architect, and Engineer, a copy of the report of inspection of their facilities made by the Materials Reference Laboratory of the National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of such inspections, and shall submit a memorandum stating steps taken to remedy all deficiencies reported by this inspection. B. The Testing Laboratory selected shall meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", latest edition, as published by the American Council of Independent Laboratories. C. The Testing Laboratory shall be approved by the local Building Official to perform inspection and certification services as an approved inspector of prefabricated construction. D. Testing machines shall be calibrated at intervals not exceeding 12 months by devices of accuracy traceable to the National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. The Testing Laboratory shall submit a copy of certificate of calibration made by an accredited calibration agency. TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 014100- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S E. Tests and inspections shall be conducted in accordance with specified requirements, and if not specified, in accordance with the applicable standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials or other recognized and accepted authorities in the field. 1.4 AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF THE LABORATORY A. Attending Preconstruction Conferences: The Testing Laboratory shall obtain and review the project plans and specifications with the Architect and Engineer as soon as possible prior to the start of construction. The Laboratory shall attend preconstruction conferences with the Architect, Engineer, Project Manager, General Contractor, and Material Suppliers as required to coordinate materials inspection and testing requirements with the planned construction schedule. The Laboratory will participate in such conferences throughout the course of the project. B. Outline Testing Program: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for outlining a written detailed testing program conforming to the requirements as specified in the Contract Documents and in consultation with the Owner, Contractor, Architect, and Engineer. The testing program shall contain an outline of inspections and tests to be performed with reference to applicable sections of the specifications or drawings and a list of personnel assigned to each portion of the work. Such testing program shall be submitted to the Owner, Contractor, Architect, and Engineer five weeks in advance of the start of construction so as not to delay the start of construction. It shall be the Testing Laboratory's responsibility that such program conforms to the requirements of the Specifications and drawings and falls within the budget for testing laboratory services. If the allocated budget is not sufficient to cover the services as outlined in the Specifications, it shall be the responsibility of the Laboratory to notify the Contractor, Architect, Engineer, and Owner so that the Laboratory services can be modified accordingly prior to the start of construction. Furthermore, the Testing Laboratory shall monitor its expenditures throughout the course of the job and notify immediately the Owner, Contractor, Architect, and Engineer, of any significant deviation from the planned testing program and budget. C. Cost Proposal: The Testing Laboratory's proposal to the Owner shall contain the outlined testing program based on a unit price basis for tests and inspections and on an hourly basis for personnel. A total estimated price shall also be submitted. D. Cooperation with Design Team: The Laboratory shall cooperate with the Architect, Engineer, and Contractor and provide qualified personnel promptly on notice. TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 014100-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S E. The Laboratory shall perform the required inspections, sampling, and testing of materials as specified under each section and observe methods of construction for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Inspections Required by Government Agencies: The Testing Laboratory shall perform all inspections and submit all reports and certifications as required by all government agencies. G. Notification of Deficiencies in the Work: The Laboratory shall notify the Architect, Engineer, and Contractor first by telephone and then in writing of observed irregularities and deficiencies of the work and other conditions not in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. H. Reports: 1. Information on Reports: The Laboratory shall submit copies of all reports of inspections and tests promptly and directly to the parties named below. All reports shall contain at least the following information: a. Project Name b. Date report issued C. Testing Laboratory name and address d. Name and signature of inspector e. Date of inspection and sampling f. Date of test g. Identification of product and Specification section h. Location in the project i. Identification of inspection or test j. Record of weather conditions and temperature (if applicable) k. Results of test regarding compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Copies: TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 014100-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S The Laboratory shall send certified copies of test and inspection reports to the following parties: a. 2 copies to the Owner or his representative b. 2 copies to the General Contractor C. 1 copy to the Architect d. 1 copy to the Engineer of responsibility e. 1 copy to the Supplier of the material tested 3. Certification by Notary Public: Upon completion of the job, the Testing Laboratory shall furnish to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer of responsibility, a statement certified by a Notary Public that all required tests and inspections were made in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. I. Accounting: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for separating and billing costs attributed to the Owner and cost attributed to the Contractor. J. Obtaining Product and Material Certifications: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for obtaining all product and material certifications from manufacturers and suppliers as specified in the Specifications. K. Limitations of Authority: The Testing Laboratory is not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge upon, or release any requirements of the Specifications or to approve or accept any portion of the work or to perform any duties of the General Contractor and his Subcontractors. 1.5 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY A. Cooperation with Design Team: The owner shall pay for all testing lab services. The Contractor shall cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to the work, and to manufacturers operations. B. Furnishing Samples: The Contractor shall provide to the laboratory representative, samples of materials proposed for use in the work in quantities sufficient for accurate testing as specified. TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 014100-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S C. Furnishing Casual Labor, Equipment and Facilities: The Contractor shall furnish casual labor, equipment, and facilities as required for sampling and testing by the Laboratory and otherwise facilitate all required inspections and tests. D. Advance Notice: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Testing Laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. E. Payment for Substitution Testing: The Contractor shall arrange with the Testing Laboratory and pay for any additional samples and tests above those required by the Contract Documents as requested by the Contractor for his convenience in performing the work. F. Payment for Retesting: The Contractor shall pay for any additional inspections, sampling, testing, and retesting as required when initial tests indicate work does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. G. Payment by Contractor: The Contractor shall furnish and pay for the following items: 1. Soil survey of the locations of borrow soil materials, samples of existing soil materials, and delivery to the Testing Laboratory. 2. Samples of concrete aggregates and delivery to the Testing Laboratory. 3. Concrete mix designs as prepared by his concrete supplier or by his Testing Laboratory. 4. Concrete coring, tests of below strength concrete, and load tests, if ordered by the Owner,Architect, or Engineer. 5. Certification of reinforcing steel mill order. 6. Certification of Portland cement, lime, and flyash. 7. Tests, samples and mock-ups of substitute material where the substitution is requested by the Contractor and the tests are necessary in the opinion of the Owner,Architect, or Engineer to establish equality with specified items. TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 014100-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 8. Any other tests when such cost are required by the Contract Documents to be paid by the Contractor. H. Notification of Source Change: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Testing Laboratory when the source of any material is changed after the original tests or inspections have been made. I. Tests for Suspected Deficient Work: If in the opinion of the Owner, Architect, or Engineer any of the work of the Contractor is not satisfactory,the Contractor shall make all tests that the Owner,Architect, or Engineer deem advisable to determine its proper construction. The owner shall pay all costs if the tests prove the questioned work to be satisfactory. 1.6 PAYMENT OF TESTING LABORATORY The Owner will pay for all Laboratory services for testing of materials for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor will pay for testing and retesting of materials that do not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents and all other items as specified in these Specifications. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 SCOPE OF WORK The work to be performed by the Testing Laboratory shall be as specified in this Section of the Specification and the contract drawings, and as determined in meetings with the Contractor, Owner,Architect, and Engineer. 3.2 EARTHWORK A. Tests of Proposed Fill Material: The Testing Laboratory shall conduct a survey of the Contractor's proposed location of borrow soil materials and shall establish the suitability of any proposed fill material by determining the required engineering properties. Soil tests shall include soil classification by the Atterberg Limit Tests ASTM D4138, and grain size determined by ASTM D422 "Particle Size Analysis of Soils." B. Moisture Density Relationship for Natural and Fill Materials: TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 014100-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S The Testing Laboratory shall provide one optimum moisture density curve for each type of soil, natural, imported fill, or on-site fill, encountered in subgrade and fills under building slabs and paved areas.Curves shall be generated in accordance with ASTM D1557 "Test Methods for Moisture Density Relationships of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures." C. Quality Control Testing Required During Construction: 1. Inspection of Subgrade and Fill: The Owner's Testing Laboratory shall inspect and approve the following subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed thereon: a. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Make at least one field density test of the natural subgrade for every 5000 square feet of paved area or building slab but in no case less than three tests. In each compacted fill layer or lift, make one field density test for every 5000 square feet of building slab on paved area but in no case less than three tests. b. Foundation Wall Backfill: Make at least one field density test for each 200 lineal feet of wall with a minimum of 4 tests for each basement wall around the perimeter of the building and a minimum of one test for every other type of foundation wall on the site. Tests shall be at random locations and elevations for each wall. 2. Field Density Tests: Field Density Tests shall be run according to ASTM D1556"Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method," ASTM D2167 "Density of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method" or ASTM D2922 "Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods" or ASTM D698 "Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" as applicable, unless noted otherwise in the geotechnical investigation report prepared for this project. 3. Acceptance Criteria: The result of field density tests by the Testing Laboratory will be considered satisfactory if the average of any three consecutive tests has a value not greater than 2 percent below the required density. 4. Report Copies: The Testing Laboratory shall submit all moisture density curves and results of field density tests to the parties specified earlier in this section. 5. Additional Testing: TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 014100-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 If reports by the Testing Laboratory indicate field densities lower than specified above, additional tests will be run by the Testing Laboratory with at least the frequencies scheduled above on recompacted fill and/or natural subgrade. The Testing Laboratory shall notify the Contractor on a timely basis for any required retesting so as not to delay the work. The costs of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor. 3.3 REINFORCING STEEL A. Visual Inspection: The Testing Laboratory shall inspect the rebar to determine the following: 1. The bars shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a workman-like finish. 2. Deformations shall be of the proper sizes, shapes, and spacing as detailed in ASTM A-615. 3. The bars shall not have excessive rust and/or pelting. 4. The bars shall not have any unusual twists or bends. B. Identified Stock: Where job material is taken from bundles as delivered from the mill, is properly identified as to heat number and is accompanied by mill and analysis test reports, provided an affidavit is given from the Supplier to the Testing Laboratory that the materials conform with the requirements of the ASTM specification as listed on the structural drawings. In case of controversy, the procedure as stipulated below for unidentified stock shall be followed. C. Unidentified Stock: For all unidentified stock, the Testing Laboratory shall secure samples of the reinforcing steel bars at the time of inspection.The samples shall confirm to the following: 1. The sample shall include 2 bars for each ten tons or fraction thereof, of each bar size, heat number, and manufacturer being shipped. 2. The sample bars shall be a minimum of 24 inches in length and should be identical to the material being shipped. The Testing Laboratory shall tag each of the steel bundles with the Laboratory identification tag and appropriately mark the samples corresponding to the steel being inspected and shipped. The fabricator will supply shipping lists showing the weight of each bar size in the shipment. TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 014100-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 3.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS AND POURED IN PLACE CONCRETE A. Tests of Portland Cement: Portland Cement shall be tested by the Testing Laboratory for compliance with the requirements of ASTM C150. 1. Mill Certificates: Mill certificates certifying that the cement has been tested and meets the requirements of the Specifications will be acceptable as test results, provided the cement proposed for use can be identified with test lots. Mill certificates shall be submitted by the Contractor prior to use of any such material. 2. Retesting: Retesting of cement will be required if: a. In the opinion of the Owner,Architect,or Engineer,the cement has been damaged in storage or transit or is any way defective. b. The cement has been in storage at the mixing site for over 30 days. B. Test of Aggregates: 1. The Contractor's Testing Laboratory shall verify that concrete aggregates proposed for use conform to the following specification: a. ASTM C33 "Specification for Concrete Aggregates" Suppliers record of tests run on the proposed materials will be adequate provided a written affidavit is furnished as a shop drawing submittal. C. Concrete Mix Designs: The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer and Testing Laboratory at least 15 days prior to the start of construction, concrete mix designs for each class of concrete indicated on the structural drawings and in the Specifications. The Contractor shall not begin work until the applicable mix design has been approved. 1. The Contractor acting in conjunction with his Concrete Supplier and the Testing Laboratory shall submit in writing with his mix designs, whether the concrete is to be proportioned by either of the following methods as outlined in ACI 318: a. Field Experience Method b. Laboratory Trial Batch Method TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 014100-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301 and ACI 211. When Laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions,the procedure as outlined in ACI 318 shall be followed. Prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C192 and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C39. 2. Required types of concrete and compressive strengths shall be as indicated on the Structural Drawings and as specified in the various sections of the Specifications. 3. All mix designs shall state the following information: a. Mix design number or code designation by which the Contractor shall order the concrete from the Supplier b. Structural memberforwhich the concrete is designed(i.e.columns, piers, etc.) C. Type of concrete (normal weight). d. 28 day compressive strength e. Aggregate type, source, size, gradation, fineness modulus f. Cement type and brand g. Fly ash type and brand (if any) h. Admixtures including air entrainment, water reducers, accelerators, and retarders i. Slump j. Proportions of each material used k. Water cement ratio and maximum allowable water content I. Method by which the concrete is intended to be placed (bucket, chute, or pump) 4. Concrete Suppliers Record of Quality Control: The concrete supplier's past record of quality control shall be used in the design of the concrete mixes to determine the amount by which the average concrete strength fcr should exceed the specified strength Pc as outlined in ACI 318. If a suitable record of test results is not available, the average strength must exceed the design strength by 1200 PSI as specified in ACI 318. After sufficient data TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 01 41 00-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S becomes available from the job, the statistical methods of ACI 214 may be used to reduce the amount by which the average strength must exceed fc as outlined in ACI 318. 5. Admixtures: a. Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and Testing Laboratory. b. Quantities of admixtures to be used shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Admixtures containing chloride ions shall not be used in concrete containing galvanized or aluminum embedments. d. Air entraining admixtures shall conform to "Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete"ASTM C260. e. Water reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures, accelerating admixtures, water reducing and retarding admixtures, and water reducing and accelerating admixtures shall conform to "Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete"ASTM C494. f. Fly ash or other pozzolons, used as admixtures, shall conform to "Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolons for use in Portland Cement Concrete" ASTM C618. Obtain mill test reports for approval. Maximum flyash content shall be 20%. g. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 6. Slump Limits: Unless shown otherwise on the structural drawings, proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: a. Ramps and Sloping surfaces-3"± 1" b. Foundation concrete -4-1/2" ± 1-1/2" C. All other concrete -4" ± 1" When increased workability, pumpability, lower water-cement ratio, shrinkage reduction, or permeability reduction is required, then a superplasticizer admixture shall be considered for use. The maximum slump with the use of TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 01 41 00-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S superplasticizers shall be 8 inches unless approved otherwise by the Architect/Engineer and Testing Laboratory. Any deviation from these values (such as concrete design to be pumped) shall be submitted to the Engineer and Testing Laboratory for approval. 7. Adjustments of Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. Such mix design adjustments shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Any adjustments in approved mix designs including changes in admixtures shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer and Testing Laboratory for approval prior to field use. 8. Shrinkage: All concrete shall be proportioned for a maximum allowable unit shrinkage of 0.03%at 28 days as determined by ASTM C 157. 9. Chloride Ion Content: A written submittal shall be made with each mix design proposed for use on the project that the chloride ion content from all ingredients including admixtures will not exceed the limits specified in the Cast-In-Place section of the Specifications. D. Concrete Test Cylinders by the Testing Laboratory: 1. Molding and Testing: Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded and Laboratory cured in accordance with ASTM C31 "Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Cylinders in the Field" and tested in accordance with ASTM C39 "Method of Testing for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens". 2. Field Samples: Field samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172 "Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete". 3. Frequency of Testing: TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 01 41 00-12 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 Each set of test cylinders shall consist of a minimum of four standard test cylinders. A set of test cylinders shall be made according to the following frequency guidelines: a. One set for each class of concrete taken not less than once a day. b. Mat Foundation: One set for each 250 cubic yards or fraction thereof. C. All Other Concrete: A minimum of one set for each 150 cubic yards or fraction thereof. d. No more than one set of cylinders at a time shall be made from any single truck. e. If the total volume of concrete is such that the frequency of testing as specified above would provide less than five strength tests for a given class of concrete,tests shall be made from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches are used. f. Frequencies assume one batch plant will be used for each pour. If more than one batch plant is used, the frequencies cited above shall apply for each plant used. The cylinders shall be numbered, dated, and the point of concrete placement in the building recorded. Of the four cylinders per set break one at seven days,two at 28 days, and one automatically at 56 days only if either 28 day cylinder break is below required strength. 4. Cylinder Storage Box: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a protected concrete cylinder storage box at a point on the jobsite mutually agreeable with the Testing Laboratory for the purpose of storing concrete cylinders until they are transported to the Laboratory. 5. Transporting Cylinders: The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for transporting the cylinders to the Laboratory in a protected environment such that no damage or ill effect will occur to the concrete cylinders. 6. Information on Concrete Test Reports: The Testing Laboratory shall make and distribute concrete test reports after each job cylinder is broken. Such reports shall contain the following information: TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 01 41 00-13 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 a. Truck number and ticket number b. Concrete Batch Plant C. Mix design number d. Accurate location of pour in the structure e. Strength requirement f. Date cylinders made and broken g. Technician making cylinders h. Concrete temperature at placing i. Air temperature at point of placement in the structure j. Amount of water added to the truck at the batch plant and at the site and whether it exceeds the amount allowed by the mix design k. Slump I. Unit weight M. Air content n. Cylinder compressive strengths with type of failure if concrete does not meet Specification requirements. Seven day breaks are to be flagged if they are less than 60%of the required 28 day strength. 28 day breaks are to be flagged if either cylinder fails to meet Specification requirements. E. Other Required Tests of Concrete by the Testing Laboratory(unless noted otherwise): 1. Slump Tests: Slump Tests (ASTM C143) shall be made at the beginning of concrete placement for each batch plant and for each set of test cylinders made. 2. Air Entrainment: Air entrainment (ASTM C233) tests shall be made at the same time slump tests are made as cited above. 3. Concrete Temperature: Concrete temperature at placement shall be measured at the same time slump tests are made as cited above. TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 01 41 00-14 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 4. Chloride Ions: The Contractor shall have the laboratory verify in a written submittal with the mix designs that the chloride ion concentration will not exceed the limits specified. Tests shall be run for each class of concrete according to AASHTO Designation T 260-82 Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride Ion in Concrete and Concrete Raw Materials to determine that the maximum chloride ion content does not exceed the limits stated in the concrete section of the specifications. One test shall be run for each set of cylinders specified to be taken for each class of concrete. F. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete: 1. Strength Test: A strength test shall be defined as the average strength of two 28 day cylinder breaks from each set of cylinders. 2. Quality Control Charts and Logs: The Testing Laboratory shall keep the following quality control logs and charts for each class of concrete containing more than 2,000 cubic yards. The records shall be kept for each batch plant and submitted on a weekly basis with cylinder test reports: a. Number of 28 day strength tests made to date. b. 28 day strength test results containing the average of all strength tests to date,the high test result, the low test result, the standard deviation, and the coefficient of variation. C. Number of tests under specified 28 day strength. d. A histogram plotting the number of 28 day cylinders versus compressive strength. e. Quality control chart plotting compressive strength test results for each test. f. Quality control chart plotting moving average for strength where each point plotted is the average strength of three previous test results. g. Quality control chart plotting moving average for range where each point plotted is the average of 10 previous ranges. 3. Acceptance Criteria: TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 01 41 00-15 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 The strength level of an individual class of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met: a. The average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equal or exceed the required fc. b. No individual strength test (average of two 28 day cylinder breaks) falls below the required fc by more than 500 PSI. If either of the above requirements is not met, the Testing Laboratory shall immediately notify the Engineer by telephone. Steps shall immediately be taken to increase the average of subsequent strength tests. G. Investigation of Low Strength Concrete Test Results: 1. Contractor Responsibility for Low Strength Concrete: If any strength test of Laboratory cured cylinders falls below the required f'c by more than 500 psi,the Contractor shall take steps immediately to assure that the load carrying capacity of the structure is not jeopardized. 2. Nondestructive Field Tests: The Testing Laboratory shall under the direction of the Engineer perform nondestructive field tests of the concrete in question using Swiss Hammer, Windsor Probe, or other appropriate methods as approved by the Engineer and report the results in the same manner as for cylinder test reports. 3. Core Tests: If the likelihood of low strength concrete is confirmed and computations indicate that the load carrying capacity of the structure has been significantly reduced, tests of cores by the Testing Laboratory, drilled from the area in question under the direction of the Engineer, will be required in accordance with ASTM C42 "Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete". In such case, three cores shall be taken for each strength test more than 500 PSI below required f'c. If concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions, cores shall be air dried (temperature 60' to 80°F, relative humidity less than 60 percent)for 7 days before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in the structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, cores shall be immersed in water for at least 48 hours and tested wet. The Contractor shall fill all holes made by drilling cores with an approved drypack concrete. 4. Acceptance Criteria for Core Tests: TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 01 41 00-16 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be considered structurally adequate if the average of three cores is equal to at least 85% of fc and if no single core is less than 75%of fc. If approved by the Engineer, locations of erratic core strengths may be retested to check testing accuracy. 5. Load Test: If the above criteria are not met and the structural adequacy remains in doubt, the Engineer may order a load test as specified in ACI 318 for the questionable portion of the structure. 6. Strengthening of the Structure or Demolition: If the structural adequacy of the affected portion of the structure remains in doubt, the Engineer may order the structure to be strengthened by an appropriate means or demolished and rebuilt. 7. Cost of Investigations for Low Strength Concrete: The costs of all investigations of low strength concrete shall be borne by the Contractor. H. Jobsite Inspection: The scope of the work to be performed by the inspector on the jobsite shall be as follows: 1. Verify that air temperatures at the point of placement in the structure are within acceptable limits defined above prior to ordering of concrete by the Contractor. 2. Inspect concrete upon arrival to verify that the proper concrete mix number,type of concrete, and concrete strength is being placed at the proper location. 3. Inspect plastic concrete upon arrival at the jobsite to verify proper batching. Observe mix consistency and adding of water as required to achieve target slumps in mix designs. Record the amount of water added and note if it exceeds that allowed in the mix design. The responsibility for adding water to trucks at the jobsite shall rest only with the Contractor's designated representative. The Contractor is responsible that all concrete placed in the field is in conformance to the Contract Documents. 4. Obtain concrete test cylinders. 5. Perform slump tests and air entrainment tests. 6. Record information for concrete test reports. TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 01 41 00-17 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 7. Verify that all concrete being placed meets job Specifications. Report concrete not meeting the specified requirements and immediately notify the Contractor, Batch Plant Inspector, Contractor, Architect, Engineer, and Owner. 8. Pick up and transport to Laboratory, cylinders cast the previous day. 9. Check concrete placing techniques to determine that concrete deposited is uniform and that vertical drop does not exceed six feet. 10. The jobsite inspector shall report any irregularities that occur in the concrete at the jobsite or test results to the Contractor, Architect, Owner, and Engineer. I. Causes for Rejection of Concrete: The Contractor shall reject all concrete delivered to the site for any of the following reasons: 1. Wrong class of concrete (incorrect mix design number). 2. Air temperature: Air temperature limits shall be as follows: a. Cold Weather: Air temperature must be 407 and rising b. Hot Weather: Air temperature must be cooler than 100°. Concrete may be placed at other air temperature ranges only with approval of the job inspector for the Testing Laboratory or other duly appointed representative. 3. Concrete with temperatures exceeding 95°F may not be placed in the structure. 4. Air contents outside the limits specified in the mix designs. 5. Slumps outside the limits specified in the mix designs. 6. Excessive Age: Concrete shall be discharged within 90 minutes of plant departure or before it begins to set if sooner than 90 minutes unless approved by the Laboratory job inspector or other duly appointed representative. The Contractor is responsible that all concrete placed in the field is in conformance to the Contract Documents. J. Concrete Batch Trip Tickets: TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 01 41 00-18 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 All concrete batch trip tickets shall be collected and retained by the Contractor. Compressive strength, slump, air, and temperature tests shall be identified by reference to a particular trip ticket. All tickets shall contain the information specified in ASTM C 94. Each ticket shall also show the amount of water that may be added in the field for the entire batch that will not exceed the specified water cement ratio for the design mix. The Contractor and Testing Laboratory shall immediately notify the Architect/Engineer and each other of tickets not meeting the criteria specified. 3.5 MASONRY A. Prism Tests 1. Scope: Prism tests shall be made for each class of masonry (hollow masonry, grouted masonry) on the project using an assembly of actual masonry units, mortar, and grout as planned in the work. 2. Compressive Strength Test: Test shall be run according to the requirements of ASTM E447 "Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms." Each strength test shall be defined as the average of three test prisms from the same class of masonry. 3. Frequency of Testing: a. Interior Walls: One strength test shall be run for each 5,000 square feet of wall or fraction thereof. b. Exterior Walls: One strength test shall be run for each 5,000 square feet of wall area but not less than one strength test for each day's operation for each class of wall. An additional test should be run whenever there is a change in mortar or grout proportions. B. Mortar Test: 1. Scope: Mortar cube test shall be required only for loadbearing masonry construction (hollow or grouted)for the purpose of measuring uniformity of field batching. 2. Compressive Strength Test: Tests shall be run according to the requirements of ASTM C780 "Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry." TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 01 41 00-19 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 Each strength test shall be defined as the average of three cube specimens two inches in dimension tests at 28 days. 3. Frequency of Testing: One strength test shall be run for each 5,000 square feet of wall but not less than one strength test for each day's operation for each class of wall. An additional test should be run whenever there is a change in mix proportions. C. Grout Tests: 1. Scope: Grout prism tests shall be required for all grout used in masonry construction. 2. Compressive Strength Test: Specimens shall be 3%"x3%"x7" or 3"x3"x6" cast in molds with a flat nonabsorbent base and masonry units having the same moisture condition as those being laid forming the sides of the specimens. Specimens shall be capped according to ASTM C617 and tested according to ASTM C39. Each strength test shall be defined as the average of two 28 day prisms. 3. Frequency of Testing: Four grout prisms shall a made for each 30 cubic yards of grout but not less than one set for each day's operation.An additional set should be made whenever the grout mix is changed. One prism shall be tested at 7 days, two at 28 days, and one at 56 days only if either 28 day test is low. D. Experience Requirement: Field inspection of masonry construction by the Testing Laboratory as herein described shall be performed by qualified technicians with a minimum of ten years experience in masonry testing and inspection. E. Field Inspection Requirements: The duties and responsibilities of the Testing Laboratory Inspector in the field shall be as follows: 1. Review and become familiar with project drawings and specifications. 2. Review all masonry materials used in the field for conformance to project specifications. This shall include masonry units, mortar, grout, portland cement, masonry cement, sand, lime, horizontal joint reinforcement, ties, masonry anchoring devices, to the structure, and control joint strips. TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 01 41 00-20 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 3. Review proper horizontal joint reinforcement size and spacing. Review size and spacing of wall ties. 4. Review proper masonry construction practices for mortar including requirements for high and low lift grouting. Check conformance with hot and cold weather construction requirements. 5. Verify proper mortar batching proportions. 6. Confirm clean outs for high lift grouting. 7. Verify construction tolerances. 8. Review and confirm installation of reinforcing steel size,spacing, and splices in all walls, lintels, pilasters, and columns. 9. Confirm number and size of dowels in the foundation to walls and columns. 10. Take mortar,grout, and prism samples as specified. END OF SECTION 014100 TESTING LABORATROY SERVICES 01 41 00-21 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 014119 -WINDSTORM CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provision of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. All components and cladding must meet or exceed the wind load requirements as specified in this section. B. Exterior wall and roof openings shall be protected with impact resistant covers or designed to meet impact resistance requirements. C. Exterior mechanical and electrical equipment shall be secured against indicated windstorm loads. D. Owner shall pay for Texas Department of Insurance Inspection services for Windstorm Certification on the exterior components and the structure. Contractor is responsible for all other costs related to Windstorm Certification. E. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and scheduling the site inspections of the Owner's Windstorm Engineer. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Components and Cladding: Elements assembled to form the exterior wall and roof systems that are either directly loaded by the wind or receive wind loads originating at relatively close locations, and that transfer those loads to the main wind force resisting system. Examples: Curtain walls, exterior glass windows and panels, roof sheathing, studs, soffits, etc. B. Exterior Wall and Roof Openings: Openings that are likely to be breached during high winds. Examples:skylights, smoke vents, HVAC equipment,windows, doors, roof hatches, louvers,etc. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Wind loads shall be determined from the pressures developed by a 120-mph wind velocity(ASD) (3 second gust) and an equivalent 155 mph wind velocity (LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category III, and appropriate shape factor from the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-16 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures". B. Impact resistance shall be as determined by the Texas Windstorm Code. 1. Impact Cyclic Wind Pressure Criteria. Impact protective systems and exterior opening products must be tested for windborne debris resistance under ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E 1996 or other windborne debris standards or procedures that are recognized by the Texas Department of Insurance. The missile criteria must be as follows: WINDSTORM CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 0141 19- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 a. Products located within 30 feet of grade must be tested to resist large, and if required small missile. If ASTM E 1996 is the test standard used, then missile level D from Table 2, Applicable Missiles, must be used. b. Products located above 30 feet of grade must be tested to resist a small missile. If ASTM E 1996 is the test standard used,then missile level D from Table 2,Applicable Missiles, must be used. 2. Impact Protective Systems. Impact protective systems must be installed under the manufacturer's installation instructions and in the manner in which they were tested for uniform static wind pressure resistance and for windborne debris resistance. 3. Exterior Opening Products. a. If the exterior opening products are not protected from windborne debris by an impact protective system, then they must be manufactured to resist windborne debris under Section 1.4.6.1. b. Exterior opening products must be installed under the manufacturer's installation instructions and under the manner in which they were tested for uniform static wind pressure resistance and for windborne debris resistance. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. All components and cladding listed in the Texas Windstorm Approved Materials catalog shall have the appropriate product evaluation number indicated on the submittal. B. Components and cladding not listed will require certification that they meet or exceed the design requirements of this section by the manufacturer. C. Installation instructions indicating fasteners, minimum attachment requirements, and other necessary pertinent information for installation shall be submitted. D. Forms:The following Texas Department of Insurance may be found on the TWIA website: 1. TWIA Insurability Requirements. 2. WPI-1 Application for Certificate of Compliance. 3. WPI-2-BC-7 Inspection Verification. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notify the Architect not less than 72 hours in advance of a requested windstorm inspection.The Contractor shall provide, and have available at the job site, all necessary installation instructions during construction. It is incumbent upon the Contractor to have the project superintendent and knowledgeable representatives of the trades/craftwork being inspected in attendance with documentation to illustrate compliance of installation to TDI requirements. B. Prior to covering or concealing the fasteners or connectors, the contractor shall notify the architect/engineer in time to allow visual structural inspections by the Architect/Engineer for the multiple inspections required for Windstorm Certification by the Architect/Engineer. DO WINDSTORM CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 0141 19-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S NOT COVER UP FASTENERS WITHOUT HAVING THEM REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE WINDSTORM ENGINEER. C. Contractor shall furnish, upon completion, written confirmation that the installation and materials used for all components and cladding is in conformance with requirements of this section to the Windstorm Engineer. D. Re-inspection:The Windstorm Engineer will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the inspection list items from earlier inspections, have been completed. 1. Upon completion of windstorm re-inspection, the Windstorm Engineer will notify the Contractor that the work being inspected complies with windstorm requirements. If the Work is incomplete, the Windstorm Engineer will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary, re-inspection will be repeated one time for a total of three(3) inspections of the work in question. Additional re-inspections required due to Contractor's failure to complete the list of incomplete windstorm items will be billed to the Contractor at the Windstorm Engineer's customary billing rates for the personnel involved. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014119 WINDSTORM CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 0141 19-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 0142 00 - REFERENCES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. 1. For standards referenced by applicable building codes, comply with dates of standards as listed in building codes. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. REFERENCES 0142 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity,obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Abbreviations and acronyms not included in this list shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." The information in this list is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. AABC-Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA-American Architectural Manufacturers Association; (See FGIA). 3. AAPFCO-Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC-American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA-American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ABMA-American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com. 8. ACI -American Concrete Institute; (Formerly:ACI International); www.concrete.org. 9. ACPA-American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org. 10. AEIC-Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 11. AF&PA-American Forest& Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 12. AGA-American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 13. AHAM -Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 14. AHRI -Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 15. Al -Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org. 16. AIA-American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 17. AISC-American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 18. AISI -American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org. 19. AITC-American Institute of Timber Construction; www.plib.or . 20. AMCA-Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 21. ANSI -American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 22. AOSA-Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com. REFERENCES 0142 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 23. APA-APA-The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 24. APA-Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 25. API -American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 26. ARI -Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 27. ARI -American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 28. ARMA-Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.or . 29. ASCE -American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asse.org. 30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE). 31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers; www.ashrae.org. 32. ASME-ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.org. 33. ASSE -American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org. 34. ASSP-American Society of Safety Professionals (The); www.assp.org. 35. ASTM -ASTM International; www.astm.org. 36. ATIS-Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.or�. 37. AVIXA - Audiovisual and Integrated Experience Association; (Formerly: Infocomm International); www.avixa.org. 38. AWEA-American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 39. AWI -Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 40. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 41. AWPA-American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com. 42. AWS-American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 43. AWWA-American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 44. BHMA- Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 45. BIA- Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 46. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 47. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association); www.bifma.org. 48. BISSC- Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 49. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation); www.bissc.org. REFERENCES 0142 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 50. CDA-Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 51. CE -Conformite Europeenne; www.ec.europa.eu/growth/single-market/ce-marking. 52. CEA-Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 53. CFFA-Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 54. CFSEI -Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. 55. CGA-Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 56. CIMA-Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 57. CISCA-Ceilings& Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 58. CISPI -Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 59. CLFMI -Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 60. CPA-Composite Panel Association; www.compositepanel.org. 61. CRI -Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org. 62. CRRC-Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 63. CRSI -Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 64. CSA-CSA Group; www.csa-group.org. 65. CSI -Cast Stone Institute; www.caststone.org. 66. CSI -Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csiresources.org. 67. CSSB-Cedar Shake &Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 68. CTA-Consumer Technology Association; www.cta.tech. 69. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.coolingtechnology.org. 70. CWC-Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). 71. DASMA- Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 72. DHA - Decorative Hardwoods Association; (Formerly: Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association); www.decorativehardwoods.org. 73. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 74. ECA- Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA). 75. ECAMA- Electronic Components Assemblies& Materials Association; (See ECIA). 76. ECIA- Electronic Components Industry Association; www.ecianow.org. 77. EIA- Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 78. EIMA- EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 79. EJMA- Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.elma.or�. REFERENCES 0142 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 80. EOS/ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. 81. ESTA- Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). 82. ETL- Intertek(See Intertek); www.intertek.com. 83. EVO- Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org. 84. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org. 85. FGIA- Fenestration and Glazing Industry Alliance; https://fgiaonline.org. 86. FIBA-Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation); www.fiba.com. 87. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation); www.fivb.org. 88. FM Approvals- FM Approvals LLC; www.fmapprovals.com. 89. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com. 90. FRSA- Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal Contractors Association, Inc.; www.floridaroof.com. 91. FSA- Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 92. FSC- Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 93. GA-Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 94. GANA-Glass Association of North America; (See NGA). 95. GS-Green Seal; www.Rreenseal.org. 96. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 97. HI/GAMA- Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 98. HMMA- Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 99. HPVA- Hardwood Plywood &Veneer Association; (See DHA). 100. IAPSC- International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 101. IAS- International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org. 102. ICBO- International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 103. ICC- International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 104. ICEA- Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 105. ICPA- International Cast Polymer Association; www.theicpa.com. 106. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 107. IEC- International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch. 108. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. REFERENCES 0142 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 109. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America); www.ies.org. 110. IESNA- Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES). 111. IEST- Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.or�. 112. IGMA- Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; (See FGIA). 113. IGSHPA- International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.org. 114. II - Infocomm International; (See AVIXA). 115. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. 116. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com. 117. ISA-International Society of Automation (The);(Formerly: Instrumentation,Systems,and Automation Society); www.isa.org. 118. ISAS- Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society(The); (See ISA). 119. ISFA-International Surface Fabricators Association;(Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org. 120. ISO- International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. 121. ISSFA- International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). 122. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int. 123. KCMA- Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org. 124. LMA- Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 125. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 126. MBMA- Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 127. MCA- Metal Construction Association; www.metaIconstruction.org. 128. MFMA- Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. 129. MFMA- Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metaIframingmfg.org. 130. MHI - Material Handling Industry; www.mhi.org. 131. MIA- Marble Institute of America; (See NSI). 132. MMPA- Moulding& Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmi)a.com. 133. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.i)aintinfo.com. 134. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss-hq.org. 135. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. REFERENCES 0142 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 136. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); www.nace.org. 137. NADCA- National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. 138. NAIMA- North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.nadca.com. 139. NALP - National Association of Landscape Professionals; www.landscapeprofessionals.org. 140. NBGQA- National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgga.com. 141. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org. 142. NCAA- National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org. 143. NCMA- National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 144. NEBB- National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.or . 145. NECA- National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 146. NeLMA- Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.or�. 147. NEMA- National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.or . 148. NETA- InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 149. NFHS- National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org. 150. NFPA- National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org. 151. NFPA- NFPA International; (See NFPA). 152. NFRC- National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 153. NGA - National Glass Association (The); (Formerly: Glass Association of North America); www.glass.org. 154. NHLA- National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 155. NLGA- National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 156. NOFMA- National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). 157. NOMMA- National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 158. NRCA- National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 159. NRMCA- National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 160. NSF- NSF International; www.nsf.or . 161. NSI - National Stone Institute; (Formerly: Marble Institute of America); www.naturalstoneinstitute.org. 162. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 163. NSSGA- National Stone, Sand &Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 164. NTMA- National Terrazzo& Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. REFERENCES 0142 00-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 165. NWFA- National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 166. NWRA- National Waste & Recycling Association; www.wasterecycling.or . 167. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 168. PDI - Plumbing& Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 169. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association); www.plasa.org. 170. RCSC- Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.orR. 171. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 172. RIS- Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 173. SAE -SAE International; www.sae.orR. 174. SCTE -Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 175. SDI -Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 176. SDI -Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 177. SEFA-Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com. 178. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE). 179. SIA-Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 180. SJI -Steel Joist Institute; www.steelmoist.org. 181. SMA-Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. 182. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 183. SMPTE -Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org. 184. SPFA-Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org. 185. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 186. SPRI -Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org. 187. SRCC-Solar Rating&Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org. 188. SSINA-Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 189. SSPC-SSPC:The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org. 190. STI -Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com. 191. SWI -Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 192. SWPA-Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 193. TCA-Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. REFERENCES 0142 00-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 194. TCNA-Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com. 195. TEMA-Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org. 196. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org. 197. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 198. TMS-The Masonry Society; www.masonrVsocietV.org. 199. TPI -Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. 200. TPI -Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 201. TRI -Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org. 202. UL- Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com. 203. UL LLC- UL LLC; www.ul.com. 204. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org. 205. USAV- USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 206. USGBC- U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 207. USITT- United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 208. WA-Wallcoverings Association; www.wallcoverings.org. 209. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.orR. 210. WCMA-Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 211. WDMA-Window& Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 212. WI -Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org. 213. WSRCA-Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 214. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org. B. Code Agencies:Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. IAPMO-International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;www.iapmo.org. 2. ICC- International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 3. ICC-ES- ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org. C. Federal Government Agencies:Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. COE -Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. REFERENCES 0142 00-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 2. CPSC-Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 4. DOD- Department of Defense; www.cluicksearch.dla.mil. 5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 6. EPA- Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA- Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 9. GSA-General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD- Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA-Occupational Safety& Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 13. SD- Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB -Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; The National Academies; www.trb.orR. 15. USDA- Department of Agriculture;Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 16. USDA- Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 17. USDOJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; www.omp.usdoo.gov. 18. USP- U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org. 19. USPS- United States Postal Service; www.usps.com. D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.govinfo.gov. 2. DOD- Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.auicksearch.dla.mil. 3. DSCC- Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED-STD- Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services; www.guicl<search.dla.mil. REFERENCES 01 42 00-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. C. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.orp,. 6. MILSPEC- Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. TAS-Texas Accessibility Standards; https://www.tdlr.texas.poy/ab/abtas.htm 8. USAB- United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 9. USATBCB- U.S.Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB). PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0142 00 REFERENCES 01 42 00-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 0160 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 11 00 "Summary of Work"for Contractor requirements related to Owner- furnished products. 2. Section 0123 10 "Alternates and Allowances"for products selected under an allowance and for products selected under an alternate. 3. Section 0125 00 "Substitution Procedures"for requests for substitutions. 4. Section 0142 00 "References"for applicable industry standards for products specified. 5. Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Salvaged items or items reused from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Comparable Product: Product by named manufacturer that is demonstrated and approved through the comparable product submittal process described in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 number or other designation. Published attributes and characteristics of basis-of-design product establish salient characteristics of products. C. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturerfor a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. D. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights to Owner. E. Action Submittals 1. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. a. Include data indicating compliance with the requirements specified in Part 2 "Comparable Products"Article. b. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. 1) Form of Approval:As specified in Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures." 2) Use of product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. 2. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: An action submittal complying with requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Resolution of Compatibility Disputes between Multiple Contractors: a. Contractors are responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. b. If a dispute arises between the multiple contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service- or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the following: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. C. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. 3. See individual identification Sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional equipment identification requirements. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of approved comparable products and approved substitutions. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration,theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment. 2. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 4. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation and with adequate protection from wind. 5. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to the extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written standard warranty form furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and issued in the name of the Owner or endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner and issued in the name of the Owner or endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included in the Project Manual, prepare a written document, using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. Components, materials or parts required to be supplied in quantity within a Section shall be of the same manufacturer,shall be interchangeable,and shall be the same with regard to function, texture, pattern and color. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Except for building equipment in service area, no manufacturers' labels or name plates shall be visible on any component, unless required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for the Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for the Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed or a product by an unnamed manufacturer that complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase"Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following." b. Provision of products of an unnamed manufacturer is not considered a substitution, if the product complies with requirements. 4. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications may additionally indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in Section 0125 00 "Substitution Procedures"for substitutions for convenience. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require the phrase "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. The Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures"for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: 1. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. 2. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0160 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 0173 00 - EXECUTION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work, including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner's portion of the Work. 6. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 7. Progress cleaning. 8. Starting and adjusting. 9. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 11 00 "Summary of Work"for coordination of Owner-furnished products, and limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures"for submitting surveys. 3. Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures"for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, replacing defective work, and final cleaning. 4. Section 02 4119 "Selective Demolition"for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of subsequent work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of subsequent work. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor. B. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. EXECUTION 01 73 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 C. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor, certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, or when encountering the need for cutting and patching of elements whose structural function is not known, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.Shore, brace,and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection. 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. C. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Plumbing piping systems. f. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. g. Control systems. h. Communication systems. i. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. j. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. C. Exterior curtain-wall construction. EXECUTION 01 73 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of specified products and equipment. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that,when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. Use materials that are not considered hazardous. B. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, gas service piping, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where EXECUTION 01 73 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work, including Specification Section number and paragraph, and Drawing sheet number and detail, where applicable. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Architect that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect in accordance with requirements in the Project Manual. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks and existing conditions. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. EXECUTION 01 73 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S B. Engage a land surveyor experienced in laying out the Work, using the following accepted surveying practices: 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,grading,fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. EXECUTION 01 73 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor,that principal metes, bounds, lines,and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording:At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated to remain exposed, arrange overhead systems in an orderly manner. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure satisfactory results as judged by Architect. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations, so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy of type expected for Project. EXECUTION 01 73 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on-site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for Work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions with manufacturer. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings,templates,and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed Work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect,as judged by Architect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. K. Protect adjacent property and adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces,from spillage or blow-over of coatings, paints, sprayed fire-resistive material, and other spray-applied products. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces, including live plants and grass, if there is a possibility of spray-applied products being deposited on surfaces. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. EXECUTION 01 73 00-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S D. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces.Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. E. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable,asjudged by Architect. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch,corner to corner of wall and edge to edge of ceiling. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. F. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. EXECUTION 01 73 00-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 3.7 COORDINATION OF OWNER'S PORTION OF THE WORK A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work.Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials for more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where Work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. EXECUTION 01 73 00-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements." 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work. C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 0173 00 EXECUTION 01 73 00-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 0174 19 -CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above-and below-grade improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials resulting from demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal of demolition or construction waste and subsequent salvage, sale, recycling, or deposit in landfill,incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,or designated spoil areas on Owner's property. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition and construction waste become property of the Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Use Form CWM-7 for construction waste and Form CWM-8 for demolition waste. Include the following information: 1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons. 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons. 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled)as a percentage of total waste. B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling,and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work. C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests,weight tickets, receipts,and invoices. G. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with transportation and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of each contractor and waste management coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste and Form CWM-2 for demolition waste.Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use Form CWM-3 for construction waste and Form CWM-4 for demolition waste. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 2. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers,container labeling,and designated location where materials separation will be performed. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work. 1. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged and recycled. 2. Comply with local, state and federal regulations for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE,GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor as often as required to prevent overfilling bins. 3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Asphalt Paving: Grind asphalt to maximum 1-1/2-inch size. 1. Crush asphaltic concrete paving and screen to comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving"for use as general fill. B. Asphalt Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility. C. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals. 1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2-inch size. 2. Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving"for use as satisfactory soil for fill or subbase. D. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals. 1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 1-1/2-inch size. E. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials. F. Metals: Separate metals by type. 1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size,type of member, and length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. G. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners. H. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members, including trim and other metals from acoustical panels and tile, and sort with other metals. I. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by material and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by material and size. J. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by material and size. 3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged or recycled, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 0174 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 02 37 60 - DRILLED FOOTINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Information concerning a sub-surface soil investigation by an independent testing laboratory is available and will be furnished by the Owner upon request. The data included therein may be used by the contractor for his general information only. The Architect/Engineer will not be responsible for the accuracy or applicability of the data therein. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Drilling Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment (including temporary casings where required) and shall install all piers at the locations and depths shown on the drawings or as otherwise directed by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. B. The Drilling Contractor shall furnish and place all reinforcing steel, dowels, and anchor bolts as shown on the drawings. C. The General Contractor shall provide all necessary excavation, sheeting and bracing or other adequate maintenance of excavation banks, suitable runways and ramps as necessary for access of pier drilling, control of ground and surface water as necessary to keep the work area sufficiently dry, suitable access roads for movement of equipment and materials to and from pier locations, field layout required for pier work including setting and maintaining a location stake for each pier and giving cut-off grades on all piers, removal and replacement of all overhead and underground obstructions as required, and coordination of all concrete ordering and delivery. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS Drilled piers shall be installed by a specialty Drilling Contractor with suitable equipment, competent personnel, and a reputation of satisfactorily performing the work. The Contractor shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience and a minimum of 5 successful installations on projects of a similar size and scope to this project. Evidence of compliance with this section shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer prior to entering into a contract for the work. DRILLED FOOTINGS 02 37 60- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE The Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished by his subcontractors and suppliers. A. Codes and Specifications: The Drilling Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the following specifications: 1. "Standard Specification for End Bearing Drilled Piers",ACI 336.1, as published by the American Concrete Institute. 2. "Standards and Specifications for the Foundation Drilling Industry", as published by the Association of Drilled Shaft Contractors. In addition,all applicable building code and local regulations shall be followed. In case of conflict, the strictest interpretation shall govern. B. Survey Work: 1. The General Contractor shall employ a qualified surveyor to perform all surveys, layouts and measurements for drilled pier work. The surveyor shall conduct the layout work for each drilled pier to the lines and levels required priorto beginning excavation and shall make actual in-place measurements of each drilled pier plan location,shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations and deviations from specified tolerances. 2. The surveyor shall record and submit all information pertinent to each drilled pier and cooperate with other testing and inspection personnel to provide data for all required reports. C. Testing Laboratory Requirements: The Drilling Contractor shall cooperate with all testing and inspection personnel employed to perform field quality control tests and inspections. See Testing Laboratory section of the specifications for required tests and inspections to be performed by the Testing Laboratory and Geotechnical Engineer. Inspection or testing by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Site Information: DRILLED FOOTINGS 02 37 60-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of continuity of such conditions. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. The data are made available for the convenience of the Contractor. 2. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Contact Engineer immediately, if after demolition of existing building foundation, existing piers are found to conflict with new pier locations. B. Protection of Existing Structures: Protect structures, underground utilities and other construction from damage caused by drilling operations. C. Survey of Existing Structures: Record and report to Architect/Engineer surveyed elevation bench marks on structures where directed by Architect/Engineer before commencing work, when structures area adjacent to drilling operations. Record and report elevation of each bench mark at least twice a day while drilling is in progress. Should bench mark readings indicate displacement, halt drilling operations until corrective action has been provided and is acceptable to Architect/Engineer and Owner. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Concrete Mix Design: Submit concrete mix designs suitable for method of concrete placement for Engineer and Testing Laboratory approval prior to pier installation. B. Drilling Records: The Drilling Contractor and the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer or other authorized inspector shall each submit copies of the drilling record for each pier to the Architect/Engineer immediately after drilling. The reports shall indicate the name of the job, name of Drilling Contractor, and name of drilling superintendent. For each pier installed, the report shall indicate the following information: 1. Pier number and location 2. Pier shaft diameter 3. Bottom elevation DRILLED FOOTINGS 02 37 60-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 4. Top elevation 5. Pier length 6. Theoretical volume of concrete in pier 7. Actual volume of concrete placed 8. Reinforcing steel size and depth actually placed 9. Drilling start and finish time 10. Concreting start and finish time 11. Variation from specified tolerances including location and plumbness 12. Construction method (dry method or casing method) 13. Groundwater conditions (rate of water infiltration and depth of water in hole prior to concreting for dry piers;water elevation in hole for wet piers) 14. Description and elevation of any obstructions encountered and whether removal was obtained 15. Description of pier bottom including amount and extent of loose material 16. Method of concrete placement 17. Any difficulties encountered in drilling or concreting operations 18. Any deviations from specifications Reports prepared by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer or authorized inspector shall be compiled and signed by a registered Texas professional engineer. Reports prepared by the Drilling Contractor shall be compiled and signed by the drilling superintendent. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Submit shop drawings for all drilled pier reinforcing steel. 2. Installation Method: Submit detailed procedures of the installation method, including (where applicable) type and number of drilling rigs and equipment, casing size and length, casing removal method, drilling fluid type, dewatering method, concrete placement, and reinforcing steel securing and placement. DRILLED FOOTINGS 02 37 60-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 D. Post Construction Survey: After completion of pier construction,the Contractor shall provide the Architect/Engineer with an as-built survey showing the actual locations of the piers at cut-off elevations. This survey shall show the plumbness of vertical piers and all abandoned piers and their replacements. No construction of superstructures shall commence until this survey has been reviewed and accepted by the Architect/Engineer. In order to facilitate the progress of the Work, the Contractor shall submit partial pier surveys for approval as the Work proceeds. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE Concrete shall be as specified in the "Cast-in-Place Concrete" section of the specifications and on the drawings, with the additional requirements specified below: A. Maximum Aggregate Size: Provide maximum aggregate size of three quarters of minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars, with 1-1/2 inch maximum. B. Air Entraining Admixture: Use air entraining admixtures in concrete at manufacturers prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having 4%to 6%air content. C. Water Reducing Admixtures: Where required by mix design, use water reducing admixtures in strict compliance with manufacturers directions. Admixtures to increase cement dispersion, or provide increased workability for low-slump concrete may be used at contractor's option. Use admixtures in the amounts as recommended by manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at time of placing concrete. Adjust quantities of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. D. Slump Limits: Proportion concrete to have a slump that is suitable for the placement process used. Provide a minimum 7-inch slump concrete with retarder for cased piers at time of pulling casing. 2.2 REINFORCING STEEL See "Concrete Reinforcing Steel" section of the specifications. DRILLED FOOTINGS 02 37 60-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2.3 STEEL CASING A. Steel casing shall conform to ASTM A 252, Grade 2 or A 36. 2.4 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94. B. Hot Weather Concreting: The maximum acceptable concrete temperature at the truck discharge point shall be 95°F. Refer to Hot Weather Concreting Practices specified in "Cast-in-Place Concrete" section of the specifications for required hot weather concreting practices. C. Cold Weather Concreting Practices: Concrete should not be placed on any day when the outside air temperature is 40°F or less and falling unless cold weather concreting practices are followed as specified in the "Cast-in-Place Concrete" section of the specifications. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Requirements: Excavate holes for drilled piers to the required bearing strata or elevation as shown on the drawings unless directed otherwise in the field by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. Excavate holes for closely spaced piers and those occurring in fragile or sand stratas only after adjacent holes are filled with concrete and allowed to set a minimum of 6 hours or longer as required for concrete to harden. Drilled pier design dimensions and depths shown on the drawings shall be considered minimums. The design of drilled piers is based on bearing and/or friction in assumed strata. If bearing stratum is not capable of maintaining capacity assumed, foundation system shall be revised as directed by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer and Architect/Engineer. Revisions will be paid for in accordance with contract conditions relative to changes in the work. B. Equipment: 1. Provide adequate equipment so work is expedited to the fullest extent possible. Use equipment fully capable of excavating shafts to depths, diameters, and sizes DRILLED FOOTINGS 02 37 60-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 indicated, and within the specified tolerances. Maintain equipment in satisfactory operating condition and provide sufficient quantity of equipment to maintain the projected schedule of the Work. 2. Using bits or augers with a power-driven rotary-type rig, a shaft of a diameter specified on the drawings shall be excavated from the ground surface to a depth as specified on the drawings or as ordered by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. C. Obstructions: 1. If rocks, boulders, or other unforeseen obstructions are encountered which cannot be removed by standard drilled pier excavation methods, and if such obstructions are not indicated by available sub-surface data, removal of such obstructions will be paid for in accordance with the terms of the Contract relative to changes in the Work. 2. Remove such obstructions by hand labor using air-powered tools or by other safe methods recognized in the construction industry. Standard drilled pier excavation methods include the use of core barrels with pier drilling equipment. 3. The work of this Section includes demolition and removal of rock, boulders, concrete, masonry, and other subsurface obstructions which are indicated by the Contract Documents, or by the available subsurface exploration data, and such work will not be considered a change in the Work. D. Overexcavation: No payment will be made for extra length of drilled piers when they are installed to a greater depth than required or as authorized by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. Overexcavated drilled piers will be measured and paid for in accordance with the original design or authorized depth. E. Excavated Material: 1. Remove excavated material and dispose of it off site. 3.2 DRILLING METHOD The following drilling methods may be considered for use on this project: A. Dry Method: The excavation shall be made using bits or augers without the use of water or drilling mud. Unless rock or obstructions are encountered, the excavation shall be completed in a continuous operation and the concrete shall be placed immediately priorto completing the day's work. DRILLED FOOTINGS 02 37 60-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 When casing conditions are encountered or where excess water begins seeping into the hole at a rate greater than 1/4 inch rise per minute in the bottom of the shaft, no further drilling will be allowed until the Drilling Contractor selects a method of placement to prevent ground movement and/or water flow. B. Casing Method: Where caving conditions are encountered or excess water seeps into the excavation greater than acceptable for a dry pier as specified above, the Drilling Contractor shall use a temporary casing placed by an appropriate means. The casing shall be sealed in a stratum of soil that will not cave or admit excessive water. The pier excavation shall then be completed in the approved soil stratum. Vibratory methods of casing placement and removal shall not damage surrounding structures or previously placed piers. C. Dewatering Method: When ground water conditions are encountered such that a temporary casing can not be installed in an impervious stratum to cut off water infiltration, a dewatering system shall be installed which will permit proper excavation, inspection, and concreting of the shaft. Should the dewatering system employed involve pumping inside the pier, extreme caution shall be used to prevent an unbalanced water head from causing a "blowout", bottom heave, or "quick" condition that could disturb the proposed bearing stratum or surrounding soil strata. The dewatering method shall be submitted for review and approval of the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. The Drilling Contractor's bid price shall include installation of all drilled piers as shown on the drawings by whatever method is required to obtain the final result intended. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Plan Location: The tolerance on plan location for the top of the drilled pier shall not be more than 1/24 of the pier diameter or 3" in any direction, whichever is less. B. Plumbness: Permissible tolerance for plumbness shall be 1.0% of the length, 12.5% of the shaft diameter, or 15" at the bottom, whichever is less. C. Bottom Area: DRILLED FOOTINGS 02 37 60-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 The bottom of the pier shall be essentially horizontal with the area of the bottom bearing not less than 98%of that specified on the drawings. D. Top Area: The Contractor shall remove excess concrete at the top of the pier beyond the limits of the pier diameter. The pier top diameter shall be the same diameter as the shaft below. Piers extending above the ground surface shall be formed. E. Concrete Cut-Off Elevation: Concrete cut-off elevation at the pier top shall be plus one inch to minus three inches. F. If any of the above tolerances are exceeded, the Engineer shall immediately be notified to evaluate the eccentricity in the pier and recommend corrective measures. The cost of re-engineering and corrective construction shall be borne by the Contractor. 3.4 INFILTRATION OF GROUNDWATER A. Dry Pier: Water rise at a rate of less than 1/4 inch per minute at the bottom of the pier shall be considered a dry pier and concrete may be placed by buckets, chutes, or trunks in such a manner so as not to cause segregation. The total height of water in the bottom of the pier shall not exceed two inches at the time of concrete placement. B. Wet Pier: Infiltration of groundwater exceeding 1/4 inch per minute at the bottom of the shaft shall be considered a wet pier and concrete shall be placed by an approved tremie method. C. Dewatering: Provide and maintain pumping equipment to keep excavations free of water before placing concrete. If excessive water is encountered and drilling operations must be halted, consult with Architect/Engineer before using alternate methods of construction. Conduct water to general site run-off ditches and disposal areas with discharge lines. Provide ditching as required to conduct water to site drainage facilities. 3.5 TEMPORARY STEEL CASINGS A. Requirement: Temporary casings will be required at locations where the soil will not stand without support or where, because of ground water subsurface conditions, sloughing of the sides of shafts may seriously delay or endanger the satisfactory completion of excavation and DRILLED FOOTINGS 02 37 60-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 placement of concrete. The Contractor shall have immediately available for use on the job an ample supply of casing for each size which will be required for use in the shafts and shall provide additional amounts, if required,to ensure orderly progress of the job. Such casing may be in short pieces but with jointing devices of sufficient strength that assembled sections of casing may be pulled complete as concrete is placed, or immediately thereafter. Provide casing of sufficient strength to withstand handling stresses, concrete pressure, and surrounding earth and/or fluid pressures. Make diameter of excavation in relation to diameter of casing such as to create a minimum of void space outside of casing. Provide casing with a minimum outside diameter equal to nominal outside diameter of drilled foundations. B. All temporary casing shall be removed from shafts as concrete is placed or immediately thereafter, and in such a manner as to prevent sloughing material from dropping to the bottoms of shafts or falling on top of freshly placed concrete. 3.6 REINFORCING STEEL PLACEMENT A. Before placing, clean reinforcing steel and dowels of loose rust, scale, dirt, grease and other material which could reduce or destroy bond. B. Fabricate and erect reinforcing cages in shafts as one continuous unit using inner ring reinforcing guide. Place reinforcement accurately and symmetrically about axis of hole and hold securely in position during concrete placement. The Contractor shall verify depths of drilled piers prior to cutting and tying reinforcing steel cages. Reinforcing steel shall be delivered to the site in standard 60 foot lengths and cut as required. Splice no more than 50%of the bars at any one location alternating spliced and unspliced bars in a symmetrical pattern. Splices shall be 30 bar diameter compression splices for bars #11 and smaller unless noted otherwise on the drawings. See drawings for additional splice information. The Contractor shall be responsible for adding additional reinforcing steel ties or spirals as required to ensure stability of cage and maintenance of shape and configuration as required for proper lifting, handling, and placement. C. Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates and other accessories furnished under work of other sections. Provide spacers (capable of sliding on any temporary casings required), blocking and holding devices to maintain required position during concrete placement. D. The General Contractor shall protect exposed ends of dowels and anchor bolts from mechanical damage and exposure to weather by wrapping and taping with polyethylene or other suitable material. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: DRILLED FOOTINGS 02 37 60-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Fill drilled piers with concrete immediately after inspection and approval by the Geotechnical Engineer or other authorized inspector. Use protection sheets (cut out to receive concrete) over excavation openings, extending at least 12" beyond edge. 2. Place concrete continuously and in a smooth flow without segregating the mixed materials. Provide mechanical vibration for consolidation of at least top five feet of each shaft but only after any temporary casing is pulled or when casing is permanent. 3. Place concrete by means of bottom discharge bucket, flexible drop chute, elephant trunk hopper, or tremie. Free fall of concrete may be used if provided for in concrete mix design and provided it is directed through a hopper or chute such that fall is down center of shaft without hitting sides or reinforcing steel. 4. Place concrete in-the-dry unless placing underwater is acceptable to Architect/Engineer. If water occurs, and it is impracticable to dewater drilled pier excavation, and reasonable attempts to seal off water flow have failed, allow water level to attain its normal level and place concrete by tremie method. Control placement operations to ensure that tremie is not broken during continuous placing from bottom to top. Other methods of depositing concrete underwater may be used, if approved by Architect/Engineer. 5. Maintain a sufficient head of concrete to prevent reduction in diameter of drilled pier shaft by earth pressure and to prevent extraneous material from mixing with fresh concrete. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement operations to maintain a head of concrete approximately five feet above casing bottom. During casing extraction upward movement of the reinforcing steel should not exceed 6". Downward movement should not exceed 6" per 20 feet of shaft length. When casing is left in place,fill void space between casing and shaft excavation with fluid grout by means of grout pipe and pump pressure as required. 6. Casings shall be pulled in a single continuous smooth operation without sudden jerks or impact. No casing shall be vibrated after concrete is installed. 7. Stop concrete placement at cut-off elevation shown, screed level, and apply a scoured, rough finish. Where cut-off elevation is above ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft to required elevation. 8. Interrupted placing operations of over one hour duration will require a cold joint installation as follows. Leave resulting shaft surface approximately level. At resumption of concrete placing, clean off surface laitance, roughen as required, and slush with a 1-to-1 cement grout or commercial bonding agent before remainder of concrete is placed. Intentional cold joints will not be permitted. DRILLED FOOTINGS 02 37 60-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 9. Concrete shall not be placed in piers located within three center to center shaft diameters of each other until concrete has cured minimum of 6 hours. B. Hot and Cold Weather Placement: Refer to Part II. 3.8 APPROVAL BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER Approval by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer is required on all pier installation criteria and his decision and judgment on pier length, rejection of piers, additional piers required, and all other pier installation and capacity questions shall be final. 3.9 CONTRACT BASIS A. Basis of Bids: Bids shall be based on number of drilled piers,design length from top elevation to bottom of shaft (extended through the bell, if applicable), and diameter of shaft and bell, as shown on drawings. The bid price shall include cost for temporary casing of excavation that may be required. B. Basis for Payment: Payment for drilled piers will be made on actual net volume of drilled piers in place and accepted. The actual length and shaft diameter,and bell diameter(if applicable)may vary to coincide with elevation where satisfactory bearing strata is encountered, and with actual bearing value of bearing strata determined by testing services, and with stability and characteristics of soil strata. Adjustments will be made on net variation of total quantities, based on design dimensions for shafts. 1. There will be no additional compensation for excavation,concrete fill,reinforcing, casings, or other costs due to unauthorized overexcavating shafts. Overexcavated piers will be measured and paid for in accordance with required design or authorized depth. No payment will be made for rejected drilled piers. 2. Prices quoted shall include full compensation for labor, temporary casing, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required for excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete, and other items for complete installation. C. Unit Prices: Unit prices for the following items, as set forth in contract conditions, will apply in event additions to or deductions from work are required and authorized by written order from Architect/Engineer to Contractor. Soil excavation (including temporary casing if required) per cu.yd. DRILLED FOOTINGS 02 37 60-12 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S Rock excavation per cu.yd. Temporary steel casings, installed per lin.ft. Reinforcing steel and dowels, installed per lb. Concrete per cu.yd. END OF SECTION 02 37 60 DRILLED FOOTINGS 02 37 60-13 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 02 4119 -SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings,that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property,for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of selective demolition activities with starting and ending dates for each activity. C. Predemolition photographs or video. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. G. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements:Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSP A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.3 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping.Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials.At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 1 hours after flame-cutting operations. 5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition.When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02 4119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 03 10 00 -CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK The work of this section includes all labor, materials and equipment required to form all cast-in- place concrete shown on the drawings including but not limited to all slabs,joists, beams, walls, stairs, and equipment pads. 1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS Comply with the provision of the following codes,specifications and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: A. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" B. ACI 318"Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute "Reinforced Concrete, Manual of Standard Practice" D. ACI SP-4"Formwork for Concrete" In addition, all formwork shall be designed, erected, supported, braced, and maintained as a minimum according to ACI Standard 347 "Guide to Formwork". 1.4 RESPONSIBILITY The design, construction and safety of all formwork shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. The Contractor shall also be responsible for determining when temporary supports, shores, backshores, and other bracing may be safely removed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS FOR EXPOSED FINISH CONCRETE Unless otherwise specified, formwork for exposed concrete surfaces shall consist of plywood, metal, metal framed plywood, or other acceptable surface. Formwork shall provide a continuous CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S straight and smooth surface conforming to the joint system as specified on the Architect's drawings. Form material shall have sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of concrete without bow or deflection. Plywood shall be overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS- 1 "A-C or B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form", Class I, or plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B(Concrete Form) Plywood",Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. 2.2 FORMS FOR UNEXPOSED FINISH CONCRETE Unless otherwise specified, formwork for unexposed concrete surfaces shall be constructed with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Lumber shall be dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.3 FORMWORK COATINGS Formwork coatings shall be a commercial formulation that will not bond with,stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces or impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede curing with water or curing compounds. Provide a product that has a maximum VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) of 350 mg/I but not greater than permitted by the local government agency having jurisdiction in the area where the project is located. 2.4 NAILS AND FASTENERS Use only galvanized nails and fasteners for securing formwork in structures exposed to weather or unconditioned spaces such as garages, canopies and porte-cocheres. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in- place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking,screeds, bulkheads,anchorages and inserts and other features required in work. CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back- up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and patch forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Unless otherwise indicated, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is 1 1/2"inside concrete and will not leave holes larger than 1"diameter in concrete surface. Provide only galvanized form ties in structures exposed to weather or unconditioned spaces. H. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. 3.2 CLEANING AND TIGHTENING Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips,wood,sawdust, dirt, and all other debris just prior to concrete placement. Retighten forms and bracing prior to concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.3 CLEANING AND RE-USE OF FORMS Forms reused in the work shall be repaired and cleaned. Split,frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Forms intended for successive concrete placement shall have surfaces cleaned, fins and laitance removed, and joints tightened to avoid surface offsets. New form coating compound shall be applied to reused forms. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form- coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.4 TOLERANCES Unless specified otherwise, all tolerances for concrete formwork shall conform to ACI Standard 117, "Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials". Before concrete placement the Contractor shall check lines and levels of erected formwork and make any corrections and adjustments as required to ensure proper size and location of concrete members and stability of forming systems. During concrete placement the Contractor shall check formwork and supports to ensure that forms have not displaced and that completed work will be within specified tolerances. 3.5 SHORES AND SUPPORTS A. Definitions 1. Shores: Vertical or inclined support members designed to carry the weight of formwork, concrete, and construction loads above. 2. Reshores: Shores placed snugly under a stripped concrete structural member after the original forms and shores have been removed from the member, thus requiring the member to carry its own weight and superimposed construction loads at the time of installation. Reshores are assumed to carry no load at the time of installation. After the installation of reshores, superimposed construction loads are assumed to be distributed among all members connected by reshores. 3. Backshores: Shores placed snugly under a stripped concrete structural member after the original formwork and shores have been removed from a small area without allowing the structural member to deflect or support its own weight or superimposed construction loads. It is assumed that backshores carry the same load as that carried by the original shores they replace. Comply with ACI 347 for shoring, reshoring and backshoring in concrete construction and as herein specified where more stringent: B. Structures with Three Supported Levels or Less: Extend shoring from soil supported slab or suitable subgrade to uppermost level for structures with three structurally supported levels or less. CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.6 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS A. Curing and Stripping Concrete Cylinders: The General Contractor shall be responsible for making and curing stripping concrete cylinders, cured under field conditions, for the purpose of determining concrete strength at time of form and shore removal. Such cylinders shall be made by the Contractor and tested by his testing laboratory. B. Formwork Not Supporting Concrete: Formwork not supporting concrete such as sides of beams, walls, columns and similar parts of the structure, may be removed after cumulatively(not necessarily consecutively) curing at not less than 50°F for 12 hours after placing concrete, provided the concrete is sufficiently hard so as not to be damaged by form removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. If ambient air temperatures remain below 50°F or if retarding agents are used, then this specified minimum period should be increased as required to safely remove the forms without damage to the concrete. Where such forms also support formwork for slab or beam soffits,the removal times of the latter shall govern. END OF SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 03 20 00 -CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK The work of this section includes labor, materials, hardware, equipment, transportation and services required to fabricate and place all reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete including bars,welded wire fabric, ties and supports shown on the drawings and as specified. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with all provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 315, "ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Reinforced Concrete, Manual of Standard Practice". 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Placing Reinforcing Bars." 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop drawings and samples for all reinforcing steel and related accessories shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval. B. Shop Drawings shall show layout, bending and assembly diagrams, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, splicing and laps of bars and shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315. 1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION Perform all tests and inspections specified in Laboratory Testing Section of these specifications. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENTS 03 20 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcement: 1. Reinforcing Steel: All reinforcing steel shall conform to the " Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement," ASTM A615 Grade 60 unless noted otherwise on the drawings. All reinforcing steel required to be welded shall conform to ASTM A 706 "Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement". 2. Tie Wire: Tie wire shall be annealed steel tie wire, minimum 16 gauge. Provide only plastic coated or stainless steel tie wire in exposed concrete structures and all architectural concrete. B. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations. 1. Slabs-on-Grade: Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners. 2.2 SPLICES A. Splice Type and Lap Lengths: Required splice type and lap lengths are defined on the drawings. Lap splice lengths for unscheduled bars not shown otherwise on the drawings shall be 40 bar diameters minimum. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENTS 03 20 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND DELIVERY A. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of indicated sizes and accurately form to shapes and lengths indicated and required, by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Bars with kinks or bends not scheduled will be rejected. B. Marking and Shipping: Bundle reinforcement and tag with suitable identification to facilitate sorting and placing. Transport and store at site so as not to damage material. Keep sufficient supply of tested, approved and proper reinforcement at the site to avoid delays. Maintain reinforcing bars free of mud, dirt, grease, or other coating. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars",for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. B. Before placing and again before concrete is placed, clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. Exercise particular care to maintain proper distance and clearance between parallel bars and between bars and forms. Provide metal spreaders and spacers to hold steel in position. Support steel at proper height upon approved chairs. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Coordinate with other trades and expedite materials and labor to avoid omissions and delay. F. Install waterproof membrane or moisture barrier as specified prior to placing steel for concrete slabs-on-grade. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENTS 03 20 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S G. Extend reinforcement continuous through construction joints or, if approved on the shop drawings, provide dowels of sufficient length to develop the full tension or compression strength of the bar as applicable. H. Provide and place additional reinforcing steel at all sleeves and openings in beams, slabs and walls as specified on the drawings. Where reinforcement is interrupted by sleeves or openings not shown on the drawings, consult with Engineer for instructions for placing and splicing of bars. Provide required additional reinforcing steel at no additional cost to the Owners. 3.3 REINFORCING STEEL SPACING AND COVERAGE A. Reinforcing Steel Coverage Reinforcing steel coverage should conform to the requirements specified in the General Notes. Cover specified shall be considered minimums that may require increasing where reinforcing steel intersects for different member types. Cover in structural members not specified in the General Notes shall conform to the requirements of ACI 318-08 Section 7.7 unless specified otherwise on the drawings. B. Reinforcing Steel Spacing: The clear distance between parallel bars in a layer shall be not less than the bar diameter nor 1". Where parallel reinforcement is placed in 2 or more layers, bars in the upper layer shall be placed directly above bars in the lower layer with clear distance between layers of not less than 1". 3.4 SPLICING REINFORCING STEEL A. All lap splices in reinforcing steel shall be contact lap splices unless detailed otherwise on the drawings. B. Maintain proper cover between reinforcing bars at splices. C. Lap unscheduled reinforcing bars not otherwise specified a minimum of 40 bar diameters at splices. Lap welded wire fabric a minimum of one full wire mesh plus two inches. 3.5 SHRINKAGE AND TEMPERATURE REINFORCEMENT Provide shrinkage and temperature reinforcement at right angles to main top and bottom bars for all structural slabs unless detailed otherwise on the drawings. See drawings for sizes and spacings. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENTS 03 20 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.6 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS Refer to Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings for formed concrete requiring reinforcing steel. Such reinforcement shall be furnished as part of the work of this section. 3.7 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION See Testing Laboratory Services section of these specifications for concrete reinforcement inspection and test requirements. END OF SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENTS 03 20 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 03 30 00 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of concrete work is shown on drawings, including schedules, notes and details which show size and location of members and type of concrete to be poured. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and hardware required in conjunction with or related to the forming, delivery and pouring of all poured-in-place concrete work. B. Architectural Concrete is specified in other Division-3 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE The Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished by his subcontractors and suppliers. A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301- "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 302- "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction". 3. ACI 304 - "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 4. ACI 305- "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting". 5. ACI 306- "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting". 6. ACI 318- "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". B. Document Precedence: In case of conflict among documents, including architectural and structural drawings and specifications, notify the Architect prior to submitting proposal. In case of conflict between the structural drawings and specifications, the strictest interpretation shall govern. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the Architect/Engineer, at any time during progress of work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner's expense, including retesting of rejected materials and installed work,shall be done at the Contractor's expense. See Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. Inspection or testing by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, patching compounds, epoxies, grouts, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, hardeners, sealers and others as requested by Architect/Engineer. B. Samples: Submit samples of materials specified if requested by Architect/ Engineer, including names, sources and descriptions. C. Laboratory Test Reports and Mix Designs: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix designs as specified in the Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. D. Material and Mill Certificates: Provide material and mill certificates as specified herein and in the Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. Material and mill certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements. E. Construction Joints: There shall be no construction joints for slab on grade, structural floors or columns where they are not indicated on the drawings. 1.5 PROVISION FOR OTHER WORK Provide for installation of inserts, hangers, metal ties, anchors, bolts, angle guards, dowels, thimbles, slots, nailing strips, blocking, grounds and other fastening devices required for attachment of work. Properly locate in cooperation with other trades and secure in position before concrete is poured. Do not install sleeves in any concrete slabs, beams or columns except where shown on the drawings or upon written approval of the Architect/Engineer. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS Refer to the drawings for classes and strengths of concrete required. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S A. Portland Cement: ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, unless otherwise approved by the Architect/Engineer. Use one brand of cement, for each class of concrete, throughout the project, unless approved otherwise by the Architect/Engineer and the Testing Laboratory. B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ANSI/ASTM C 33,and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. C. Water: Clean,fresh, drinkable, free of oils, acids or organic matter. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C 260. Provide air entrainment in all concrete used for vehicular traffic and parking or concrete permanently exposed to the weather as specified in Table 4.5.1 of ACI 318. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. E. Water-Reducing Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C 494, Type A. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. F. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture(Super Plasticizer):ASTM C 494,Type F or Type G. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. G. Water-Reducing, Accelerator Admixture (Non-Corrosive, Non-Chloride): ASTM C 494, Type C or E. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. H. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. I. Specification for Pozzolan Admixtures: Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures may be used provided they conform to "Specification for Fly Ash and/or Calcined Natural Pozzolans for Use in Portland Cement Concrete", ASTM C 618 Class C or F. Fly ash replacement of cement shall not exceed 20% (one part fly ash max.to four parts cement) by weight. Fly ash may not be used in architecturally exposed concrete. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. J. Admixtures containing Chloride Ions: Admixtures containing chloride ions shall not be used in concrete containing galvanized or aluminum embedments, concrete containing high early strength cement(Type III), or concrete exposed to sulfate containing solutions such as soils with a water soluble sulfate content more than 0.20 percent by weight and all water with a sulfate content more than 1500 parts per million. Admixtures containing CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 more than 0.05%chloride ions shall not be permitted. The maximum chloride ion content in concrete for corrosion protection shall be as follows: Max. Water Soluble Chloride Ion in Concrete Type of Member of Cement at 28 Days, % by weight Reinforced Concrete and other structures,which may be exposed to chloride in service 0.15 Reinforced Concrete in buildings and other structures that will be dry or protected from moisture in service 1.00 All other reinforced concrete construction 0.30 The Contractor shall have the Concrete Supplier verify in a written submittal to the Architect/Engineer and Testing Laboratory that the chloride ion content in all concrete mix designs used on the project will not exceed limits stated above. K. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions are not permitted. L. Certification: Written conformance to the above mentioned requirements and the chloride ion content of the admixture will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review by the Engineer. 2.2 RELATED MATERIALS A. Waterstops: Provide waterstops at all construction joints and other joints in all foundation walls below grade and where shown on the drawings. Size to suit joints. 1. Rubber waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 513. 2. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572. 3. Preformed Plastic Waterstops: Federal Specifications SS-S-210A "Sealing Compound for Expansion Joints". B. Moisture Barrier: Provide moisture barrier cover over prepared base material where indicated. Use only materials, which are resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E 154. C. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq.yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Complying with ANSI/ASTM C 171: E. Non-slip Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide grits, or crushed emery, as abrasive aggregate for non-slip finish with emery aggregate containing not less than 40% aluminum oxide and not less than 25%ferric oxide. Use material that is factory-graded, packaged, rust-proof and non-glazing, and is unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials. F. Colored Wear-Resistant Finish: Packaged, dry, combination of materials, consisting of portland cement,graded quartz aggregate,coloring pigments(if required)and plasticizing admixtures. Use coloring pigments that are finely ground, non-fading mineral oxides, interground with cement. Color, as selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. G. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid type membrane forming curing compound complying with ANSI/ASTM C 309,Type I, Class A unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. H. Chemical Curing/Floor Hardener Compound: A clear liquid chemically acting compound of sodium silicate that performs as a curing agent with a penetrating compound that changes the free lime in the concrete to calcium silicate, resulting in a surface having a maximum abrasion coefficient of 0.25 cm3/cm2 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 118. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. I. Chemical Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing not less than 2 lb. of fluosilicates per gal. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. J. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, rewettable type for use in cosmetic nonstructural repairs. K. Epoxy Products: Two component material suitable for use on dry or damp surface, complying with ASTM C 881, for use in all structural concrete repairs. L. Self-Leveling Mortars for Slab Fill Repair: M. Expansion Bolts in Concrete: 1. ICBO Approval: Only concrete anchors approved by the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) with a published Research Report shall be approved for use. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2. Type: All expansion bolts in concrete shall be only wedge type expansion bolts. 3. Interior Use: All expansion bolts, nuts and washers for use in interior conditioned environments free of potential moisture shall be manufactured from carbon steel zinc plated in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-Z-325C,Type II, Class 3. 4. Exterior or Exposed Use: All expansion bolts, nuts and washers for use in exposed or potentially wet environments, or for attachment of exterior cladding materials shall be galvanized or stainless steel. Galvanized bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A 153. Stainless steel bolts shall be manufactured from 300 series stainless steel and nuts and washers from 300 series or Type 18-8 stainless steel. 5. Nuts and Washers: Nuts and washers shall be furnished from the manufacturer and used with the bolts. N. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Type: Grout for base plates and bearing plates shall be a non-metallic, shrinkage resistant, premixed, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing Portland cement, silica sands, shrinkage compensating agents and fluidity improving compounds. 2. Specifications: Non-shrink grout shall conform to Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout, CRD-C621-83. 3. Compressive Strength: Twenty-eight day compressive strength as determined by grout cube tests, shall be: a. 6,000 PSI for supporting concrete 3000 psi and less. b. 8,000 PSI for supporting concrete greater than 3000 psi and less than or equal to 4000 psi. C. 10,000 PSI for supporting concrete greater than 4000 psi. 2.3 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Refer to Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. 2.4 CONCRETE MIXES A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, "Ready Mixed Concrete" and Testing Laboratory section of the specifications. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 JOINTS IN CONCRETE A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on the drawings or if not shown on drawings, located so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect/Engineer. 1. Place construction joints in the center one third of spans unless specified otherwise. Continue reinforcement across construction joints. Submit construction joint locations not shown on the drawings for Engineer's approval. 2. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated on the Architectural and Structural Drawings. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make provisions to support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of work. Fabricate field joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.3 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean reused forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return forms to acceptable surface condition. B. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. C. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type,and in amount,and under conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Preplacement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not used. B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. C. Comply with ACI 304, Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete, and as herein specified. 1. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation. 2. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 3. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309 recommended practices. 4. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. 5. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 6. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 7. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use highway straightedges, bull floats or darbies to smooth surface,free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 8. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations. 3.5 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: Provide rough form finish for formed concrete surfaces not exposed- to-view in the finish work unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used,with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth Form Finish: Provide smooth form finish for formed concrete surfaces exposed- to-view or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than one day after form removal. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Grout Cleaned Finish: Provide grout cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces,which have received smooth form finish treatment. 1. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and mix with water to consistency of thick paint. Proprietary additives may be used at Contractor's option. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by trial patches,so that final color of dry grout will closely match adjacent surfaces. 2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces and apply grout to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing. E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.6 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. After placing slabs, plane surface to tolerance specified below. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set,with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo, and as otherwise indicated. After screeding,consolidating and leveling concrete slabs,do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power- driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance as specified below. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform,smooth,granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint or other thinfilm finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a level surface to a tolerance as specified below. Grind smooth surface defects, which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin- set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified above, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming. E. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to ramps less than 6% exterior concrete platforms,steps and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. F. Rake Finish: Provide a rake finish to all ramps exceeding a 6% slope. Finish shall be applied perpendicular to direction of traffic. G. Chemical-Hardener Finish: Apply chemical-hardener finish to interior concrete floors where indicated. Apply liquid chemical-hardener after complete curing and drying of the concrete surface. Dilute liquid hardener with water(parts of hardener/water as follows), CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S and apply in 3 coats; first coat, 1/3-strength; second coat, 1/2-strength; third coat, 2/3- strength. Evenly apply each coat and allow 24 hours for drying between coats. Apply proprietary chemical hardeners, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. After final coat of chemical-hardener solution is applied and dried, remove surplus hardener by scrubbing and mopping with water. H. Non-slip Aggregate Finish: Apply non-slip aggregate finish to concrete stair treads, platforms, ramps and elsewhere as indicated on the Architect's or Structural Drawings. After completion of float finishing, and before starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25 lb. of dampened non-slip aggregate per 100 sq.ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as herein specified. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush, or an abrasive stone, and water to expose non-slip aggregate. I. Colored Wear-Resistant Finish: Provide colored wear-resistant finish to monolithic slab surface indicated. Apply dry shake materials for colored wear-resistant finish at rate of not less than 60 lbs. per 100 sq.ft., unless greater amount is recommended by material manufacturer. Immediately following first floating operation, uniformly distribute approximately 2/3 of required weight of dry shake material over concrete surface, and embed by means of power floating. Follow floating operation with second shake application, uniformly distributing remainder of dry shake material at right angles to first application,and embed by power floating. After completion of broadcasting and floating, apply trowel finish as herein specified. Cure slab surface with curing compound recommended by dry shake hardener manufacturer,waiting up to time period as required by the manufacturer(depending on humidity and drying) before application. Do not use moisture-cover or moisture curing methods. 3.7 CONCRETE FINISH MEASUREMENT AND TOLERANCES A. Definitions: 1. Flatness -A measure of a concrete surfaces curvature or deviation from a planar surface. Concrete surfaces that are not flat are wavy or bumpy. 2. Levelness -A measure of a concrete surfaces tilt or inclination from a horizontal plane. Concrete surfaces that are not level are sloped or tilted. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Construction Requirements to Achieve Specified Floor Finish Tolerances: 1. Forms shall be properly leveled, in good condition and securely anchored including special attention to ends and transitions. 2. Bearing surfaces for straightedges such as form edges or previously poured slabs shall be kept clean of laitance, sand, gravel, or other foreign elements. 3. Screeds shall be maintained in good condition with true round rolling wheels and level cutting edges. The use of optical sighting equipment such as lasers is recommended for checking levelness and straightness. The Contractor shall promptly adjust or replace equipment when test results indicate substandard work. C. Concrete Floor Finish Tolerance for Slab-on-Grade Construction: 1. Concrete Placement: Concrete shall be placed and screeded to predetermined marks set to elevations prescribed on the drawings. 2. Tolerance: Finished floor elevation shall not vary more than%inch in 10 feet, non cumulative. D. Remedial Measures for Slab Finish Construction Not Meeting Specified Tolerances: 1. Modification of Existing Surface: a. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, all or any portion of the substandard work can be repaired without sacrifice to the appearance or serviceability of the area, then the Contractor shall immediately undertake the approved repair method. b. The Contractor shall submit for review and approval a detailed work plan of the proposed repair showing areas to be repaired, method of repair and time to effect the repair. C. Repair method(s), at the sole discretion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, may include grinding (floor stoning), planing, retopping with self leveling grout or polymer concrete, or any combination of the above. d. The Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative maintains the right to require a test repair section using the approved method of repair for review and approval to demonstrate a satisfactory end product. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, the repair is not satisfactory an alternate method of repair shall be submitted or the defective area shall be replaced. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-12 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S e. The judgment of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative on the appropriateness of a repair method and its ability to achieve the desired end product shall be final. f. All repair work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner and with no extension to the construction schedule. 2. Removal and Replacement: a. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, all or any portion of the substandard work cannot be satisfactorily repaired without sacrifice to the appearance or serviceability of the area,then the Contractor shall immediately commence to remove and replace the defective work. b. Replacement section boundaries shall be made to coincide with the test section boundaries as previously defined. C. Sections requiring replacement shall be removed by sawcutting along the section boundary lines to provide a neat clean joint between new replacement floor and existing floor. d. The new section shall be reinforced the same as the removed section and doweled into the existing floor as required by the Engineer. No existing removed reinforcing steel may be used. All reinforcing steel shall be new steel. e. Replacement sections may be retested for compliance at the discretion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative. f. The judgment of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative on the need for replacement shall be final. g. All replacement work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner and with no extension to the construction schedule. 3.8 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-13 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 2. Curing shall commence as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. The curing period shall be 7 days for all concrete except high early strength concrete, which shall be cured for 3 days minimum, unless test cylinders, made and kept adjacent to the structure and cured by the same methods, are tested with the average compressive strength equal to 70% of the specified 28 day strength. Curing may also be terminated when the temperature of the concrete is maintained at least 50°F for the same length of time that laboratory cured cylinders, representative of the concrete in place, require to achieve 85%of the 28 day compressive strength. 3. Curing shall be in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the curing period. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of all concrete horizontal and vertical surfaces(including columns, shear walls and basement walls) by one of the methods specified or by combinations thereof, as herein specified. The Contractor shall choose a curing method that is compatible with the requirements for subsequent material usage on the concrete surface. Parking garages shall be cured using only methods 1 or 2 below. 1. Provide moisture curing by one of the following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. C. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture- retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Provide curing/hardener or liquid membrane forming curing compound to interior slabs with resilient flooring, carpet over cushion, or left exposed; and to exterior slabs, walks and curbs, as follows: Apply specified compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Do not allow to puddle. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-14 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring (such as ceramic or quarry tile, glue down carpet), painting and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. Use only clear curing compounds for exposed interior slabs and all exterior concrete. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Where wooden forms are used, cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams,supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. When forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping and other flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing compound. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.9 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. Definition: 1. Conditions warranting hot weather concreting practices are defined as any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair the quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise result in abnormal properties. 2. The maximum acceptable concrete temperature at the truck discharge point shall be 95°F. B. Specification: Hot weather concreting practices required to limit the concrete temperature at the truck discharge point to 95°F or lower shall be followed according to ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting." C. Records: Under hot weather conditions, the Contractor shall keep records of outside air temperature, concrete temperature at truck discharge and general weather conditions. D. Hot Weather Concreting Requirements: The following items, all or in part as required, should be followed to limit the concrete temperature to 95°F or lower: 1. Design the concrete mixes specifically for hot weather conditions replacing some cement with fly ash or other pozzolan and using a water reducing retarding admixture (ASTM C 494 Type D). CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-15 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2. Use the largest size and amount of coarse aggregate compatible with the job. 3. Use sunshades and/or windbreaks. 4. Delay construction of indoor slabs-on-grade until the walls and roof are constructed. 5. Cool and shade aggregate stockpiles. 6. Use ice as part of the mixing water or cool the water with liquid nitrogen. 7. Limit the number of revolutions at mixing speed to 125 maximum. 8. Paint mixers and storage bins or silos white to minimize heat absorption. 9. Reduce time between mixing and placing as much as possible. 10. Do not add water to ready-mixed concrete at the job site unless it is part of the amount required initially for the specified water-cement ratio and the specified slump. 11. Schedule concrete placement for early morning, late afternoon, or night. 12. Have all forms, equipment and workers ready to receive and handle concrete. 13. Maintain one standby vibrator for every three vibrators used. 14. Keep all equipment cool by spraying with water including chutes, conveyors, pump lines,tremies, reinforcement and buggies. 15. Dampen the subgrade and side forms with cool water. 16. Protect slab concrete at all stages against undue evaporation by applying a fog spray or mist above the surface or applying a monomolecular film. Where high temperatures and/or placing conditions dictate, use water-reducing retarding admixture (Type D) in lieu of the water-reducing admixture (Type A) as directed by the Owner's Testing Laboratory. 17. Provide continuous curing, preferably with water, during the first 24 hours using wet burlap, cotton mats, continuous spray mist, or by applying a curing compound meeting ASTM C 309. Continue curing for 3 days minimum. 18. Spray exteriors of forms to keep them cool. 19. As soon as possible, loosen forms and run water down the inside. When forms are removed, provide a wet cover to newly exposed surfaces. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-16 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.10 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. Definition: 1. Concrete shall not be placed on any day when the outside air temperature is 40°F or less and falling unless cold weather concreting practices are followed as specified below. 2. Cold weather concreting practices should be followed whenever the mean daily temperature drops below 40°F for more than three successive days. 3. The temperature of concrete mixed and delivered to the job site shall conform to the following requirements: Air Temperature Min. Concrete Temperature Above 30°F 607 0°F to 307 657 Below 0°F 707 4. The minimum temperature of concrete during placement and curing shall be 55°F. The maximum concrete temperature heated by artificial means at point of placement shall not exceed 907. B. Specification: Cold weather concreting practices required to limit the concrete temperatures as specified above shall be followed according to ACI 306R-78 "Cold Weather Concreting". C. Records: Under cold weather conditions,the Contractor shall keep records of outside air temperature, concrete temperature as placed and general weather conditions. D. Cold Weather Concreting Requirements: The following items, all or in part as required, should be followed to assure acceptable concrete in cold weather conditions: 1. Design the concrete mix suitable for cold weather. Use air entrainment and obtain high early strength by using a higher cement content, a high early strength cement(Type III), or an accelerator(ASTM C 494 Type C and E). 2. Protect the concrete during curing period using insulating blankets, insulated forms, enclosures and/or heaters. 3. Concrete cured in heated enclosures shall have heaters vented to prevent exposure of concrete and workmen to noxious gases. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-17 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 4. Frozen subgrade shall be thawed prior to concrete placement and snow and ice shall be removed from forms. 5. Concrete shall be protected and cured at 55°F for three days minimum if normal concrete (Type I cement) is used and for two days minimum if high early strength concrete (concrete with Type III cement, 100 pounds cement added per cubic yard concrete, or an accelerator added). 6. Concrete not loaded during construction shall be protected a minimum of 3 days for normal concrete and 2 days for high early strength concrete to obtain safe form stripping strength. Concrete fully loaded during construction shall be protected for whatever time period is required to obtain the required strength as determined by nondestructive strength tests (Windsor probe, Swiss Hammer Test) on the in-place concrete. 7. Heat the mixing water and then blend hot and cold water to obtain concrete no more than 10°F above the required temperature. 8. Heat the aggregates by circulating steam in pipes placed in the storage bins for air temperatures consistently below 32°F. When either water or aggregate is heated to over 1407 combine them in the mixer first to obtain a maximum temperature of the mixture not to exceed 140°F in order to prevent flash set of the concrete. 9. Uniformly thaw aggregates far in advance of batching to prevent moisture variations in the stockpile. 10. Cover warmed stockpiles with tarps to retain heat. 11. Place air entraining admixture in the batch after the water temperature has been reduced by mixing with cooler solid materials. 12. Use wind screens to protect concrete from rapid cooling. 13. Place vertical pump lines inside the building, if possible, for concrete being pumped. 14. Maintain artificial heat as low as possible to reduce temperature stresses during cooling. 15. Avoid water curing of concrete. Apply the required curing compound to unformed surfaces as soon as possible to prevent drying of concrete from heated enclosures. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-18 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 16. Delay form stripping as long as possible to help prevent drying from heated enclosures and to reduce damage to formed surfaces caused by premature stripping. 17. Provide triple thickness of insulating materials at corners and edges vulnerable to freezing. 18. Wrap protruding reinforcing bars with insulation to avoid heat drain from the warm concrete. 19. Gradually reduce the heat at the end of the heating period to reduce likelihood of thermal shock. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Definition - Defective Areas: 1. Formed Surfaces: Concrete surfaces requiring repairs shall include all honeycombs, rock pockets and voids exceeding 1/4" in any dimension, holes left by tie rods or bolts, cracks in excess of 0.01" and any other defects that affect the durability or structural integrity of the concrete. 2. Unformed Surfaces: Concrete surfaces requiring repair shall include all surface defects such as crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or cracks which penetrate to reinforcement or through the member, popouts, spalling and honeycombs. B. Classification: 1. Structural Concrete Repair: Major defective areas in concrete members that are load carrying (such as shear walls, beams, joists and slabs), are highly stressed, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-19 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S and are vital to the structural integrity of the structure shall require structural repairs. Structural concrete repairs shall be made using a two part epoxy bonder and/or epoxy mortar. Location of structural concrete repairs shall be determined by the Engineer. 2. Cosmetic Concrete Repair: Defective areas in concrete members that are non- load carrying and minor defective areas in load carrying concrete members shall require cosmetic concrete repair. Cosmetic concrete repairs may be made using a non-epoxy non-shrink patching mortar and bonding agent. The location of cosmetic concrete repair required shall be determined by the Engineer. Cosmetic concrete repair in exposed-to-view surfaces will require Architect's approval prior to patching operation. 3. Slab Repairs: High areas in concrete slabs shall be repaired by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. Low areas shall be filled using self-leveling mortars. Repair of slab spalls and other surface defects shall be made using epoxy products as specified above and as determined by the Engineer. 3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION See Testing Laboratory Services section of these Specifications for concrete materials and cast-in- place concrete inspection and test requirements. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-20 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 03 3100 - EPDXY RELATED WORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Installation of epoxy grouted dowels or reinforcing steel, and bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete. Such work shall be done by the Contractor in strict conformance to these specifications. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 503 R Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete ACI503.1 Standard Specification for Bonding, Hardened Concrete, Steel, Wood, Brick, and Other Materials to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component Epoxy Adhesive ACI 503.2 Standard Specification for Bonding Plastic Concrete to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component Epoxy Adhesive ACI 503.3 Standard Specification for Producing a Skid-Resistant Surface on Concrete by the Use of Multi-Component Epoxy System ACI 503.4 Standard Specification for Repairing Concrete with Epoxy Mortars B. Manufacturer's Qualifications Companies furnishing the epoxy materials shall have a proven track record of at least five years. Furthermore, they shall have in existence a program of training, certifying and EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 3100- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 supporting a nationally organized program of approved contractors. Evidence of this shall be made available to the Engineer/Architect upon request. C. Contractor's Qualifications:Contractor performing the work shall be an approved contractor by the manufacturer furnishing the epoxy materials, and shall have no less than five years experience in the various types of epoxy related work required in this project. A notarized certification from the manufacturer attesting to the training shall be submitted to the Engineer/Architect along with the proposal to do the work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EPDXY MATERIALS A. All epoxy material shall be new and manufactured within the shelf-life limitations set forth by the manufacturer. B. Epoxy shall be a two-part epoxy adhesive material, and shall be of epichlorohydrin/amine type. Polysulphide epoxies are not acceptable. C. Epoxy used shall be insensitive to the presence of water and moisture, and shall be capable of application and of strength development even when applied to damp surfaces having a temperature of 40' or above. D. Epoxy used shall develop a minimum strength of 6310 psi in tension and 12000 psi in compression at the end of seven days. E. Epoxies used shall not deteriorate under approximately 200 freeze thaw cycles. F. Epoxies used shall be 100%solids without solvents. G. Bonding and strength characteristics of epoxies shall be stable when exposed to ultraviolet rays. 2.2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EPDXY MORTARS A. Epoxy mortar used for bonding, patching, and resurfacing, shall have the following additional properties: 1. Epoxy mortar shall be non-sagging. 2. Sand used in preparing mortar shall be graded oven dry quartzite and furnished in bags. 3. The epoxy mortar patch material shall match the existing texture and color of exposed concrete without giving a blotchy appearance. A test patch shall be applied for EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 3100-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S approval prior to final acceptance of the mortar. Size of test patch shall be approximately equal to the size of the average mortar patch to be used on the project. 2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENTITIOUS MORTARS A. Mortar used for bonding, patching, and resurfacing in exposed or exterior environmental conditions with large cyclic temperature changes shall have the following properties: 1. Mortar shall be non-sagging. 2. Coefficient of thermal expansion shall be comparable with that of concrete (5.5 x 10-6 i n/i n/°F). 3. Sand used in preparing mortar shall be graded oven dry quartzite furnished in bags. 4. The mortar patch material shall match the existing texture and color of exposed concrete without giving a blotchy appearance. A test patch shall be applied for approval prior to final acceptance of the mortar. Size of test patch shall be approximately equal to the size of the average mortar patch to be used on the project. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EPDXY MORTAR A. Applicator's Qualifications 1. Epoxy mortar repair work shall only be performed by contractors who have successfully used this process on at least three similar structural repairs of equal scope which have performed successfully for a minimum period of five years. 2. Only adequately trained and experienced personnel shall be used on the job. B. Surface Preparation 1. Concrete surface to which the epoxy mortar is to be applied shall be exposed parent concrete free of loose and unsound materials. Surface preparation shall be done by abrasive blasting, waterblasting or as otherwise required by the manufacturer. 2. Necessary approvals shall be obtained by the Contractor from authorizing governmental or other agencies prior to abrasive blasting. Abrasive blasting operations shall comply with the requirements of OSHA and NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health) Standard P13-246-697. 3. Surfaces shall be free of any deleterious materials such as laitance, dust, dirt, and oil. EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 3100-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 4. Any exposed reinforcing steel shall also be cleaned and be free of rust and other contaminants. Cleaning shall be accomplished by mechanical means. Use powered wire brushes in locations where reinforcing steel cannot be cleaned by abrasive- blasting or water-blasting. All exposed reinforcing steel shall be coated with a corrosion inhibiting product specified elsewhere in this specification prior to mortar application. 5. Prime the cleaned surface with primer as required by the manufacturer. C. Concrete Surface Inspection 1. Ensure that the surface temperature is at least 40°F to permit wetting of concrete surface by epoxy coating. 2. The Contractor shall evaluate the moisture content of concrete surface receiving epoxy mortar. This shall be done by determining if moisture will collect at bond lines between concrete and epoxy mortar before epoxy has cured. Evaluate this by taping a piece of polyethylene sheet to the concrete. If moisture collects on underside of the polyethylene sheet before epoxy would cure,then allow concrete to dry sufficiently to prevent the possibility of moisture between old concrete and new epoxy. D. Mortar Application 1. Condition epoxy compound components to a temperature between 65°-80°F unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxies beyond this range of temperature shall not be used. 2. Stir each of the two parts of epoxy separately before mixing. Then mix in a clean container free of contaminants. 3. Thoroughly blend epoxy components and sand with Jiffy mixers (made by The Jiffy Mixer Co., Irvine, California)to a uniform and homogenous mixture. Small batches of one quart or less may be mixed by spatulas, palette knives or similar devices. 4. Mixing should be accomplished well within the pot life of epoxy (three minutes when using Jiffy mixer or five minutes when mixed by hand) after allowing for time required for application. 5. Apply mortar by trowel or other means suitable for the consistency of the epoxy-sand mortar mix. 6. Build up the repair area in layers with mortar thicknesses within those specified by the manufacturer(1/4" maximum per layer). 7. Consolidate the mortar thoroughly to remove entrapped air. 8. Finish surface of mortar to match the texture and contours of existing concrete. EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 3100-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 9. Allow mortar to cure in accordance to manufacturers recommendations. E. Cleanup 1. Protect surfaces surrounding the work areas against spillage. 2. Epoxy and epoxy mortar spillages shall be cleaned before they set. 3. Cleanup all portions of the existing structure that are soiled or stained in the process of epoxy mortar repair work. 3.2 EPDXY GROUTED BOLTS, DOWELS OR REINFORCING STEEL A. Applicator's Qualifications 1. Epoxy grouting of bolts, dowels or reinforcing steel shall only be performed by contractors who have had successful experience on a minimum of three projects of similar scope. 2. Only adequately trained epoxy applicators shall be used on the job. Furnish current certificate of training on request. B. Surface Preparation 1. All bolts, dowels and reinforcing bars shall be abrasive blasted no more than eight hours before the grouting. If evidence of oxidation exists on the surface, the bolts, reinforcing bars and dowels shall be recleaned. Blast-clean surfaces using Steel Structures Painting Council, Surface Preparation No. 6, to give a surface condition corresponding to ASa2, BSa2, CSa2 of SSPC Vis 1, depending on the initial surface condition of the steel surface. Prior to blast-cleaning, clean surfaces to conform to SSPC SP1, SP2, and SP3, as required. 2. All holes shall be clean of dust, debris, and contaminants. Use compressed air from an oil-and-water-free compressed air source prior to epoxy application. C. Drilling Holes for Embedment 1. Use only rotary-percussion type drills for drilling holes. 2. Drills shall be fitted with bits having single tooth that produce large cuttings, and hollow stem drill rods that permit simultaneous blowing of compressed air providing immediate expulsion of the cuttings from the hole. 3. Do not cut through any reinforcing steel unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Use small diameter exploratory holes to detect presence of reinforcing steel prior to drilling holes for grouting. EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 3100-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 4. Core drilling equipment, and electric impact hammers or other tools which do not provide for immediate expulsion of the drill cuttings shall not be used. 5. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, depth of hole used for embedding the bolts, bars or dowels shall be at least fifteen times their diameter. 6. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, the center to center distance between the embedded bolts, bars or dowels shall be at least twelve times their diameter. 7. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, the edge distance shall be at least six times the diameter of the bolt, bar or dowel. 8. Hole diameter shall normally be 1/4" larger than the outside diameter of the embedded item. In no case shall the hole diameter be 3/8" larger than the diameter of the embedded item. D. Epoxy Application 1. Condition epoxy compound materials at a temperature between 6S°-80°F unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxies beyond this range of temperature shall not be used. 2. Mix epoxy materials in a clean container free of contaminants. 3. Thoroughly blend epoxy components with mechanical mixers to a uniform and homogenous mixture. Mix small batches (up to 1 quart) by use of spatulas, palette knives, or similar devices. Take care to use proper proportions of the epoxy components when using small batches. 4. Mixing shall be accomplished well within the pot life of the epoxy after allowing for time required for application. 5. Partially fill the hole with epoxy. Then insert the bolt, dowel or reinforcing bar into the hole such that the resin material oozes out around the embedded item, ensuring complete contact. Twist the bolt, dowel or bar slightly as it is inserted in the hole to ensure complete contact. 6. As an alternative to inserting the embedded item after the epoxy is poured in the hole, the bolt, dowel, or bar may be positioned in the hole and filled up with epoxy by hand caulking guns or injected with an in-head mixing equipment. In either case, the nozzle shall be provided with a hose or tube of sufficient length to reach the bottom of the hole being filled. 7. Where the holes are horizontal or overhead,the opening shall be covered by a masking or a duct tape. Make a split in the tape and insert the epoxy injection tube through the split. Fill hole completely with epoxy and then insert the embedded item through the EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 3100-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S split tape. Amount of epoxy should be such that a small amount of material oozes through the split. Twist the bolt, dowel or bar slightly as it is inserted in the hole to ensure complete contact. 8. Do not apply epoxy in the rain or in the presence of standing water. E. Cleanup 1. Protect surfaces surrounding the work area against spillage. 2. Epoxy oozed out from the holes and spillages shall be cleaned before they become difficult to remove. 3. Cleanup whatever portions of the existing structure are soiled or stained in the process of grouting the bolts, dowels or reinforcing bars. END OF SECTION 03 3100 EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 3100-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout materials. 3. Reinforcement. 4. Ties and anchors. 5. Accessories. 6. Mortar and grout mixes. B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section: 1. Cast-stone trim in unit masonry. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 014119 "Windstorm Construction Requirements." 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Indicate sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Indicate bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315R. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each type of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. For masonry units, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Integral water repellent used in CMUs. 3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 4. Mortar admixtures. 5. Preblended,dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 6. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 7. Reinforcing bars. 8. Joint reinforcement. 9. Anchors,ties, and metal accessories. B. Qualification Statements: For testing agency. C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.Test in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91/C91M for air content. 2. Include test reports, in accordance with ASTM C1019,for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type,and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined in accordance with TMS 602. E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installers: All masonry flashing installers must complete the International Masonry Institute Flashing Upgrade training course. 2. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified in accordance with ASTM C1093 for testing indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items,to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe, and hold cover in place. B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT MASONRY,GENERAL A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work. C. Windstorm Construction Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the Texas Windstorm Code including elements assembled to form the exterior wall and roof systems that are either directly loaded by the wind or receive wind loads originating at relatively close locations, and that transfer those loads to the main wind force resisting system. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows,with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units. 1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent,when tested in accordance with ASTM E514/E514M as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours,will show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen. C. CMUs:ASTM C90, medium weight unless otherwise indicated. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi. 2. Size (Width): As indicated on Drawings, manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement:ASTM C150/C150M,Type I or 11,except Type 111 may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Alkali content will not be more than 0.1 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C114. B. Hydrated Lime:ASTM C207,Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Masonry Cement:ASTM C91/C91M. E. Mortar Cement:ASTM C1329/C1329M. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 F. Preblended Dry Mortar Mix: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime, sand, mortar pigments, water repellents, and admixtures and complying with ASTM C1714/C1714M. 1. Preblended Dry Portland Cement Mortar Mix: a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Amerimix is a trademark of Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Preblended Colored Mortar AMX 405 C or comparable product by one of the following: 1) Quikrete;The QUIKRETE Companies, LLC. 2) Sakrete; CRH Americas, Oldcastle APG. 3) SPEC MIX, LLC. 4) Amerimix is a trademark of Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. G. Aggregate for Mortar:ASTM C144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. H. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404. I. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C494/C494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. J. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from the same manufacturer. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide W.R. Grace& Co., Construction Products Division; Dry-Block or comparable product by one of the following: a. ACM Chemistries. b. Euclid Chemical Company(The); an RPM company. C. GCP Applied Technologies Inc. d. Master Builders Solutions. e. W.R. Grace &Co., Construction Products Division. K. Water: Potable. L. Mortar Color: 1. Concrete Masonry Units: Natural color unless otherwise indicated on drawings. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars:ASTM A615/A615M or ASTM A996/A996M, Grade 60. B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners:Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in the center of cells. Units are formed from 9-gauge steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General:ASTM A951/A951M. 1. Exterior Walls: Stainless steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 9-gauge diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 9-gauge diameter. 4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 9-gauge diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods,Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 ft. D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Blok-Lok Limited. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. C. Wire-Bond. E. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Blok-Lok Limited. b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. C. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Wire-Bond. 2. Ladder type with one side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches wide, plus one side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches wide or less. 3. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe, but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 4. Adjustable (two-piece)type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch and maximum vertical adjustment of 1- 1/4 inches.Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8- inch cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal wire in the facing wythe. 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS A. General: Ties and anchors extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face. B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire:ASTM A1064/A1064M,with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Stainless Steel Wire:ASTM A580/A580M,Type 304. 3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B coating. 4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars:ASTM A36/A36M. C. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist a 100 Ibf load in both tension and compression perpendicular to plane of wall without deforming or developing play in excess of 1/16 inch. 2. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.0781-inch- thick, stainless steel sheet. 3. Fabricate wire ties from 9-gauge diameter,stainless steel wire unless otherwise indicated. 4. Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated, provide any of the adjustable masonry- veneer anchors specified. 5. Masonry-Veneer Anchors; Double-Pintle Plate: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal anchor section with screw holes at top and bottom, projecting horizontal leg with slots for vertical legs of double pintle wire tie. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Proprietary Acidic Masonry Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,water-repellent agents,antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions,and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 2. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing, nonload-bearing walls, and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)that will comply with TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.1.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured in accordance with ASTM C143/C1431M. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 3. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Before installation,examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening. C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. D. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4-inch in a story height or 1/2-inch total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 ft., 1/4 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., 3/8 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 ft., 1/4 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., 3/8 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners,jambs, and,where possible,at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work:As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay as follows: 1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. 5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed anchors and ties in mortar. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CAVITY WALLS A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together as follows: 1. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes. b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties. C. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align. 2. Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers. B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. 3.7 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interruptjoint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Placing Reinforcement: Refer to Structural Drawings. Comply with requirements in TMS 602. B. Grouting: Do not place grout until the entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches. 3.9 CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning:After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A. 7. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic masonry cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.10 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. END OF SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-12 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 04 23 00 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on drawings and in schedules. Provide all labor, materials,equipment,and services necessary for and incidental to the installation of all reinforced masonry construction as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Reinforced unit masonry construction includes reinforced concrete masonry including concrete filled masonry beams, pilasters, lintels, and soffits. Accessories include, but are not necessarily limited to ties, horizontal and vertical reinforcement, anchors to the structure, and control joints. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcement bars and for steel templates for layout of dowels. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcement Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A 615, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Provide Grade 60 for No. 3 bars, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Grade 60 for bars No. 4 to No. 11, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Where No. 2 bars are shown, provide plain, round, carbon steel bars, ASTM A 675, Grade 80. 4. Shop fabricate reinforcement bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 23 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL Refer to Section "Masonry Mortaring and Grouting"for general installation requirements of unit masonry. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Vertical bars shall be held in position at the top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 8'-0"with a minimum clearance of 1/4"from the face of the masonry and not less than one bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater) between adjacent bars. C. All dowels shall be grouted into a cell even if the dowel is in an adjacent cell to the vertical steel. Unless detailed otherwise on the drawings, dowels shall be the same size and number as the vertical steel. Unless noted otherwise provide a lap length of dowels to vertical reinforcement equal to 50 times the nominal dowel diameter. Dowels for columns and pilasters shall be set using 1/8"thick steel plate templates. Templates shall be detailed and submitted with reinforcing steel shop drawings. D. All horizontal reinforcing steel shall be placed in continuous bond beam or lintel block units and shall be solidly grouted in place. Maintain a minimum of one bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater) clearance between adjacent bars and a minimum of 1/4" clearance from the face of the masonry. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. E. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the Engineer. Where splices occur, adjacent splices shall be staggered so that no more than 25% of the total number of bars are spliced at any one point with a minimum stagger between splices in adjacent bars of at least the lap length. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise indicated. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie. F. Where reinforcement is prefabricated into cage units before placing, fabricate units with vertical reinforcement bars and lateral ties of the size and spacing indicated. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 23 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.3 FORMWORK A. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. B. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. C. Formwork shall be designed and shop drawings prepared by a registered professional engineer in the state where the project is located. D. Formwork shall not be removed until the reinforced masonry member has cured sufficiently to carry its own weight and any other loads that may be placed on it during construction. Allow not less than the following minimum time to elapse after completion of the member before removing shores or forms provided adequate curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period: 1. Lintels and beams- 10 days. 2. Reinforced masonry soffits-7 days. 3. Allow 16 hours to elapse after completion of masonry columns and walls before placing floor or roof construction loads. Allow an additional 48 hours before applying concentrated loads such as girders, beams, or trusses. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. General: 1. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Lay CMU units with full-face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross-webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown,or if not shown, provide 3/8"joints. B. Walls: 1. Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2 running bond with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each course at corners and intersections. Use special shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 23 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 2. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities which are to be reinforced and grouted to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. 3. Provide #4 at 48" on center horizontal reinforcing in addition to joint reinforcing specified. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or modify regular units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non-reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms. C. Grouting: 1. General a. Use "Fine Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling spaces less than 4" in one or both horizontal directions. (2,000 psi) b. Use "Coarse Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling 4" spaces or larger in both horizontal directions. (2,000 psi) C. Use 3000 PSI normal-weight concrete for filling spaces 10" and larger in both directions. d. Grouting Technique: At the Contractor's option, use either low-lift or high-lift grouting techniques subject to requirements which follow. 2. Low-Lift Grouting: a. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 square inches in vertical cores to be grouted. b. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet. C. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5 feet height, or if bond beam occurs below 5 feet height stop pour at course below bond beam. d. Pour grout using chute or container with spout. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously;do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1-1/2" below top course of pour. e. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1-1/2" below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcement in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 23 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. 3. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcement and adjust to proper position. Clean top surface of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures to resist grout pressures. 4. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations. 5. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces. 6. Place grout in lintels or beams over openings in one continuous pour. 7. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam course to within 1" of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry. 8. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1-1/2" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required. D. Anchoring: 1. Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as indicated. 2. Anchor reinforced masonry walls to non-reinforced masonry where they intersect, unless shown otherwise. 3.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Masonry Prisms shall be made and tested in accordance with Section "Unit Masonry". B. Prism Strength 1. Compressive Strength,f'm. The compressive strength of reinforced concrete masonry, f'm, as determined by prism tests shall be as indicated below: Class of Reinforced Masonry 28 Day Compressive Strength, f'm = 1500 PSI C. Grout Tests REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 23 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Grout shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 1019 for every 1,000 square feet of masonry. Grout strength = 2,000 PSI minimum. END OF SECTION 04 23 00 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04 23 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 05 52 13 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel railings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Handrail brackets. 3. Shop primer. 4. Bituminous paint. 5. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Delegated Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For delegated design professional engineer. B. Welding certificates. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements,"to design railings, including attachment to building construction. B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2.2 METALS,GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. 2.3 STEEL RAILINGS A. Tubing:ASTM A500/A500M (cold formed). B. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. 1-1/4 inches diameter round pipe. 2. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. C. Cast Iron Fittings: Either gray iron,ASTM A48/A48M,or malleable iron,ASTM A47/A47M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Fastener Materials: 1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railing Components: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM F1941/ASTM F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railing Components: Type 304 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329/F2329M for zinc coating. B. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Handrail Brackets: Cast iron center of handrail 2-1/2 inches from wall. B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. C. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. E. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. F. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 09 91 13 "Painting." G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion, complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M. H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. 1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish#1 welds; ornamental quality with no evidence of a welded joint. D. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. E. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. F. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. G. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated cap and end fittings of same metal and finish as railings. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush- resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. J. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. 1. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. 2. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. K. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings where indicated on drawings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A123/A123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A153/A153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner and as follows. 1. Comply with SSPC-SP 16. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. 1. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 2. Install railings level, plumb, square,true to line; without distortion, warp, or rack. 3. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels. 4. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 5. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 6. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.2 ANCHORING POSTS A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. END OF SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Wood furring and grounds. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application:Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood nailers,curbs, blocking,stripping,and similar members in connection with flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Exterior Type:Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire- retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D6841. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. D. Application:Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. 4. Grounds. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive,flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized- asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb,true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking,grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. C. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. D. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 07 92 00 -JOINT SEALANTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Urethane joint sealants. 2. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Samples: Manufacturer's standard color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Joint-sealant schedule. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranty Documentation: 1. Manufacturers' special warranties. 2. Installer's special warranties. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period:Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals,tools, or other outside agents. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealantmanufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. B. Urethane, M, NS, 25, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 2.3 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid- curing silicone joint sealant;ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex:Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex,ASTM C834,Type OP, Grade NF. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant- substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d. Other porous joint substrates. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. C. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. e. Other nonporous joint substrates. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated;to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile in accordance with Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. H. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces:JS-1 1. Joint Locations (Joint sealants in paved roads, parking lots, walkways and curbing are specified in Division 32 of the specifications): a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Tile control and expansion joints. C. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 50,T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:JS-2 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Joints between metal panels. C. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers. e. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. f. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 12, INT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces: JS-3 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25,T, INT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: JS-4 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Tile control and expansion joints. C. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry walls and partitions. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, INS, 25, INT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. E. Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:JS-S 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. C. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, INS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 08 33 23 -OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-Fire-rated, Insulated service doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 41 19 "Windstorm Construction Requirements". 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by the manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period:Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1 and the "Texas Accessibility Standards". OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the following design wind loads: 1. Design Wind Load: Wind loads shall be determined from the pressures developed by a 120-mph wind velocity (ASD) (3 second gust) and an equivalent 155 mph wind velocity (LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category III, and appropriate shape factor from the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-16 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures". 2. Utilize only door, frame and hardware assemblies that have been tested and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. C. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Provide overhead coiling doors that pass ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests according to for protection. 1. Large-Missile Test: For overhead coiling doors located within of grade. 2.2 DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Insulated Service Door (Door Panel Type K1): Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Overhead Door Corporation; Model 625 or comparable product by one of the following: a. Amarr; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Cookson; a CornellCookson company. C. Cornell; a CornellCookson company. d. Wayne Dalton; a division of Overhead Door Corporation. e. Overhead Door Corporation. B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000. C. Insulated Door Curtain R-Value: 7.7. D. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel. E. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 2-5/8-inch center-to-center height. 1. Provide High Windload option with Slat Gauge as required to meet TDI Windstorm requirements. 2. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal. F. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel and finished to match door. G. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. H. Hood: Galvanized steel. 1. Mounting:As indicated on Drawings. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S I. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock. J. Electric Door Operator: 1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 25 cycles per hour and up to 90 cycles per day. 2. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or industrial use. 3. Motor Exposure: Interior. 4. Motor Electrical Characteristics: a. Horsepower: 1 hp. b. Voltage: 480 V ac,three phase, 60 Hz. 5. Emergency Manual Operation: Crank type. 6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor electric sensor edge on bottom bar. 7. Control Station(s): Interior mounted Where indicated on Drawings. K. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with weatherseals astragal. L. Door Finish: 1. Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Powder-Coated Finish. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.4 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces. 2. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face, with minimum thickness required by applicable codes. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. 2.5 HOODS A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 2.6 LOCKING DEVICES A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks. 1. Lock Cylinders: Furnish lock cylinders, compatible with existing building hardware and keyed to building keying system. 2.7 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES A. Weatherseals for Exterior Doors: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire exterior perimeter of door for a weather-resistant installation unless otherwise indicated. B. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door. 2.8 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. 2.9 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and facto ry-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc. B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than the number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated for each door assembly. 1. Electrical Characteristics: Minimum as indicated for each door assembly. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 2. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. D. Obstruction-Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. For fire- rated doors, activation delays closing. 1. Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire-configured device designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge. E. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push- button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure push-button control labeled "Close." 1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general- purpose NEMA ICS 6,Type 1 enclosure. 2. Exterior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6,Type 4 enclosure, key operated. F. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 Ibf. G. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. H. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 I. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with the accessibility standard. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Comply with International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements. C. Power-Operated Doors: Install according to UL 325. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and to furnish reports to Architect. B. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. END OF SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 08 4113 -ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum-framed storefront systems. 2. Aluminum-framed entrance door systems. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Submit manufacturer's product specifications, technical product data, standard details, and installation recommendations for each type of entrance and storefront product required. Include the following information: 1. Fabrication methods. 2. Finishing. 3. Hardware. 4. Accessories. B. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. Submit pairs of samples of each type and color of aluminum finish, on 12-inch-long sections of extrusions or formed shapes and on 6- inch square sheets. Where color or texture variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of variations. C. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. D. Delegated Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Structural-Test & Impact-Test Performance: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests according to ASTM E 330 and ASTM E 1886, performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type assembly indicating the following: a. Structural-Test Performance Results: ASTM E 330 performance data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation, including test and design wind pressures for approved test assembly as described above (test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted). b. Impact-Test Performance Results: ASTM E 1996 performance data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation, ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S including test and design wind pressures for approved test assembly as described above (test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted). E. Windstorm Debris Impact Resistance Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems that pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996. 1. Large-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located more than 30 feet above grade. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from manufacturer. B. Product test reports. C. Source quality-control reports. D. Sample warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide entrance and storefront produced by a single manufacturer capable of showing prior production of units similar to those required. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide entrances and storefront produced by a single manufacturer with not less than 5 years' successful experience in the fabrication of assemblies of the type and quality required. C. Installers Qualifications: Entrances and storefront shall be installed by a firm that has not less than 5 years' successful experience in the installation of systems similar to those required. D. Delegated Design Engineer: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in state where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the type indicated. E. Design Criteria: Drawings indicate sizes, spacings of members, profiles and dimensional requirements of entrance and storefront work. Minor deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard products when, in the Architect's sole judgement, such deviations do not materially detract from the design concept or intended performance. 1. Design Criteria: Drawings are based on one manufacturer's entrance and storefront system. Another manufacturer's system of a similar and equivalent nature will be acceptable when, in the Architect's sole judgement, differences do not materially detract from the design concept or intended performance. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S F. Requirement for all Exterior Storefront Frames, Doors and Hardware: 1. Comply with 2015 International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements (120 mph wind velocity (ASD)(3 second gust) and an equivalent 155 mph wind velocity(LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category III). 2. Utilize only assemblies that have been tested and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. 3. Comply with Specification Section 014119-Windstorm Construction Requirements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units (including reglazing) of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include but are not necessarily limited to structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration, faulty operation, and deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering.This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurement before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work; show measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay in the work. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurement, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements,"to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S b. Glass breakage. C. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads:As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads:As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members Supporting Glass:At design wind load, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between framing members and operable units. E. Structural:Test in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection that exceed specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure:Test in accordance with ASTM E331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas, including entrance doors, when tested in accordance with a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 12 I bf/sq.ft. G. Energy Performance: Certified and labeled by manufacturer for energy performance as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: U-factor for the system of not more than 0.29 as determined in accordance with NFRC 100. 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient(SHGC): ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: SHGC for the system of not more than 0.25 as determined in accordance with NFRC 200. 3. Air Leakage: H. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Passes ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 1. 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located between 30 feet and above grade. I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 INTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Company, Inc.; Arconic Corporation; Trifab 450 Framing system or comparable product approved by Architect. B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Interior Framing Construction: Nonthermal. a. System Dimensions: 1-3/4" x 4-1/2" b. Glass: Center Pane 2. Glazing Systems a. Glazing:As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing". b. Glazing Gaskets; Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. d. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. e. Glazing Sealants: as recommended by Manufacturer. 3. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel. 2.3 EXTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Company, Inc.; Arconic Corporation; Type IR-501T or comparable product by one of the following: ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Oldcastle Building Envelope (OBE); CRH Americas, Inc. 2. YKK AP America Inc. 3. Kawneer Company, Inc.;Arconic Corporation. B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Exterior Framing Construction:Thermally broken. 2. Interior Vestibule Framing Construction: Nonthermal. 3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 4. Finish: Clear anodic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. 6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 7. Steel Reinforcement:As required by manufacturer. C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Company, Inc.; Arconic Corporation; Type IR-500 Stile and Rail Type Aluminum Doors or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Oldcastle Building Envelope (OBE); CRH Americas, Inc. 2. Vistawall Architectural Products. 3. YKK AP America Inc. 4. Kawneer Company, Inc.;Arconic Corporation. B. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing or automatic operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 2. Door Design: as indicated on Drawings. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article for each entrance door, to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 Ibf to release the latch and not more than 30 Ibf to set the door in motion. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 Ibf to fully open door. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, quantity, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. 2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. C. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner. 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide setscrew in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed. 2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless steel pin. 3. Quantities: a. For doors up to 87 inches high, provide three hinges per leaf. b. For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches high, provide four hinges per leaf. D. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. E. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing in accordance with UL 305. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 F. Cylinders: 1. BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. a. Keying: key system. Match existing keying system as instructed by Owner. G. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. H. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6. I. Closers: BHMAA156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force. J. Concealed Overhead Holders and Stops: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1. K. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated,with integral rubber bumper. L. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D2000 molded neoprene or ASTM D2287 molded PVC. 2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing. M. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip. N. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21 raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch. 2.6 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. C. Glazing Sealants:As recommended by manufacturer. 2.7 MATERIALS A. Sheet and Plate:ASTM B209. B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes:ASTM B221. C. Structural Profiles:ASTM B308/B308M. D. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars:ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip:ASTM A1008/A1008M. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip:ASTM A1011/A1011M. E. Steel Reinforcement Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods in accordance with recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces in accordance with applicable SSPC standard. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project in accordance with Shop Drawings. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish:AAMA 611, or thicker. 1. Color: Dark Bronze. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not install damaged components. C. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. D. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. E. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. F. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. G. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. H. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants,"to produce weathertight installation. I. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. J. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING A. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCE DOORS A. Install entrance doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware in accordance with entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. Butt Hinges. B. Push & Pull Handles. C. Exit Device. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S D. Cylinder. E. Closer. F. Weatherstripping. G. Threshold. END OF SECTION 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 08 42 28 -SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of automatic entrances: 1. Interior, single slide automatic entrances. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Sections for sealants to the extent not specified in this section. 2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for entrances furnished and installed separately in Division 8 Section. 3. Division 8 Section Glazing for materials and installation requirements of glazing for automatic entrances. 4. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections provided separately, including conduit and wiring,for power to sliding automatic entrances. 1.3 REFERENCES A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority,form a part of this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number,title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation. B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 325—Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.10: Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. 2. ANSI/BHMA A156.5: Standard for Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B221-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 2. ASTM B209-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 28- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 E. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM): F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 101—Life Safety Code. 2. NFPA 70—National Electric Code. G. International Code Council (ICC): 1. IBC: International Building Code H. Building Officials and Code Administrators International (BOCA), 1999: I. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 1. ISO 9001 -Quality Management Systems 2. ISO 14025—Environmental Labels and Declarations--Type III Environmental Declarations-- Principles and Procedures 3. IS014040— Environmental Management-- Life Cycle Assessment-- Principles and Framework 4. ISO 14044—Environmental Management-- Life Cycle Assessment-- Requirements and Guidelines 5. ISO 21930—Sustainability in Buildings and Civil Engineering Works --Core Rules For Environmental Product Declarations Of Construction Products And Services J. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. K. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA 606.1—Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 2. AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 3. AAMA 701 Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals. L. United Nations Central Product Classification (UNCPC): 1. UNCPC 4212- Product Category Rules for Preparing an Environmental Product Declaration for Power-Operated Pedestrian Doors and Revolving Doors 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door. B. Safety Device: Device that prevents a door from opening or closing, as appropriate. SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 28-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide automatic entrance door assemblies capable of withstanding loads and thermal movements based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Operating Range: Minus 30 deg F (Minus 34 deg C)to 130 deg F(54 deg C). C. Opening-Force Requirements for Egress Doors: Force shall be adjustable; but, not more than 50 Ibf(222 N) required to manually set swinging egress door panel(s) in motion. D. Closing-Force Requirements: Not more than 30 Ibf(133 N) required to prevent door from closing. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other work. C. Color Samples for selection of factory-applied color finishes. D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Owner's Manual. 2. Warranties. E. Reports: Based on evaluation performed by a qualified agency, for automatic entrance door assemblies. 1. Environmental Product Declaration. 2. Evaluation Report for compliance with IBC. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative, with certificate issued by AAADM, who is trained for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications:A qualified manufacturer with a manufacturing facility compliant with ISO 9001. C. Manufacturer shall have in place a national service dispatch center providing 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, emergency call back service. D. Certifications:Automatic sliding door systems shall be certified by the manufacturer to meet performance design criteria in accordance with the following standards: 1. ANSI/BHMAA156.10. 2. NFPA 101. 3. U L 325 listed. SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 28-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 4. 1 BC. 5. BOCA. E. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD): EPD for automatic sliding entrances shall be certified by the manufacturer to comply with the following: 1. Prepared under Product Category Rule (PCR) UNCPC 4212. 2. Conform to ISO standards 14025, 14040, 14044, 21930 3. Life Cycle Assessment Basis: Cradle to Gate, minimum. F. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic entrance door assemblies through one source from a single manufacturer. G. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of automatic entrance door assemblies and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. I. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: General Contractor shall verify openings to receive automatic entrance door assemblies by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Mounting Surfaces: General Contractor shall verify all surfaces to be plumb, straight and secure; substrates to be of proper dimension and material. C. Other trades: General Contractor shall advise of any inadequate conditions or equipment. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Templates: Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing automatic entrances to comply with indicated requirements. B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrance door assemblies with connections to power supplies. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Automatic Entrances shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1)year from the date of substantial completion. B. During the warranty period the Owner shall engage a factory-trained technician to perform service and affect repairs. A safety inspection shall be performed after each adjustment or repair and a completed inspection form shall be submitted to the Owner. SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 28-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S C. During the warranty period all warranty work, including but not limited to emergency service, shall be performed during normal working hours. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES (INTERIOR) A. Basis of Design Manufacturer:Stanley Access Technologies; Dura-GlideT"' 3000 Series sliding automatic entrances. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum:Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Headers, stiles, rails, and frames: 6063-T6. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes:ASTM B 221. 3. Sheet and Plate:ASTM B 209. B. Sealants and Joint Fillers: Performed under Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". 2.3 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door assemblies including doors, sidelights, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, activation and safety devices, and accessories required for a complete installation. B. Sliding Automatic Entrances: 1. Single Slide Entrances: a. Configuration: One sliding leaf and one full sidelight. b. Traffic Pattern: Two-way. C. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaf and sidelight. d. Mounting: Between jambs. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Nominal Size: 1 3/4 inch by 4 1/2 inch (45 by 115 mm). 2. Concealed Fastening: Framing shall incorporate a concealed fastening pocket, and continuous flush insert cover, extending full length of each framing member. B. Stile and Rail Doors and Sidelights: Manufacturer's standard 1% inch (45 mm)thick glazed doors with extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails. SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 28-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Snap-on, extruded-security aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 2. Stile Design: Medium stile; 3% inch (95 mm) nominal width. 3. Bottom Rail Design: Minimum 10 inch (254 mm)] [12 inch (305 mm) nominal height. 4. Muntin Bars:4 1/4 inch (108 mm)] nominal width. C. Glazing: Furnished under Division 8 Section Glazing. All Glazing furnished under separate section shall be 9/16 inch (14 mm) laminated. D. Headers: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and extending full width of automatic entrance door units to conceal door operators, carrier assemblies, and roller tracks. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access. 1. Mounting: Concealed,with one side of header flush with framing. 2. Capacity: Capable of supporting up to 220 lb (100 kg) per panel, up to four panels, over spans up to 14 feet(4.3 m)without intermediate supports. E. Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's standard carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment of at least 1/8 inch (3 mm); consisting of urethane with precision steel lubricated ball-bearing wheels, operating on a continuous roller track. Support panels from carrier assembly by load wheels and anti-riser wheels with factory adjusted cantilever and pivot assembly. Minimum two ball-bearing load wheels and two anti-rise rollers for each active leaf. Minimum load wheel diameter shall be 2 1/2 inch (64 mm); minimum anti-rise roller diameter shall be 2 inch (51 mm). F. Thresholds: Manufacturer's standard thresholds as indicated below: 1. Continuous standard square extrusion, for recessed installation. 2. All thresholds to conform to details and requirements for code compliance. G. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non- bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. H. Signage: Provide signage in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10. 2.5 DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement;for condition of exposure; and for long-term, operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. B. Electromechanical Operators: Self-contained overhead unit powered by a minimum of 1/4 horsepower, permanent-magnet DC motor with gear reduction drive, microprocessor controller; and encoder. 1. Operation: Power opening and power closing. 2. Features: SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 28-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S a. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. b. Adjustable open check and close check speeds. C. Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds. d. Obstruction recycle. e. On/Off switch to control electric power to operator. f. Energy conservation switch that reduces door-opening width. g. Closed loop speed control with active braking and acceleration. h. Adjustable obstruction recycle time delay. i. Self-adjusting stop position. j. Self-adjusting closing compression force. k. Onboard sensor power supply. I. Onboard sensor monitoring. M. Optional Switch to open/Switch to close operation. n. Fire alarm interface, configurable to safely open or close the entrance on signal from fire alarm system. 3. Mounting: Concealed. 4. Drive System: Synchronous belt type. C. Electrical service to door operators shall be provided under Division 26 Electrical. Minimum service to be 120 VAC, 5 amps. 2.6 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS A. Electrical Control System: Electrical control system shall include a microprocessor controller and a high-resolution position encoder.The encoder shall monitor revolutions of the operator shaft and send signals to microprocessor controller to define door position and speed. 1. The high-resolution encoder shall have a resolution of not less than 1024 counts per revolution. Systems utilizing external magnets and magnetic switches are not acceptable. 2. Electrical control system shall include a 24 VDC auxiliary output rated at 1 amp. B. Performance Data:The microprocessor shall collect, and store performance data as follows: 1. Counter:A non-resettable counter to track operating cycles. 2. Event Reporting: Unit shall include non-volatile event and error recording including number of occurrences of events and errors, and cycle count of most recent events and errors. 3. LED Display: Display presenting the current operating state of the controller. SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 28-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 C. Controller Protection:The microprocessor controller shall incorporate the following features to ensure trouble free operation: 1. Automatic Reset Upon Power Up. 2. Main Fuse Protection. 3. Electronic Surge Protection. 4. Internal Power Supply Protection. 5. Resetable sensor supply fuse protection. 6. Motor Protection, over-current protection. D. Soft Start/Stop: A"soft-start" "soft-stop" motor driving circuit shall be provided for smooth normal opening and recycling. E. Obstruction Recycle: Provide system to recycle the sliding panels when an obstruction is encountered during the closing cycle. If an obstruction is detected,the system shall search for that object on the next closing cycle by reducing door closing speed prior to the previously encountered obstruction location, and will continue to close in check speed until doors are fully closed, at which time the doors will reset to normal speed. If obstruction is encountered again, the door will come to a full stop. The doors shall remain stopped until obstruction is removed and operate signal is given, resetting the door to normal operation. F. Programmable Controller: Microprocessor controller shall be field programmable. 1. The following parameters may be adjusted: a. Operating speeds and forces as required to meet specified ANSI/BHMA standard. b. Adjustable and variable features specified. C. Reduced opening position. 2. Manual programming shall be available through local interface which has a two-digit display with a selection control including three push buttons. 2.7 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES A. Combined Activation and Safety Sensors: Combined activation and safety sensors shall, in a single housing, detect motion and presence in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Motion shall be detected using K-band microwave technology, presence by active infrared reflection technology. 1. Mounting Height: Up to 11.5 feet(3.5 m) above finish floor 2. Temperature Range: Between -31°F and 131°F(-35°C to 55°C) in all environmental conditions 3. Relays: Form C, 50V at 0.3A for both activation and safety. Hold time of less than 0.5 seconds. SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 28-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 4. Detection Pattern: When detection is made in the activation zone, and the entrance opens,the safety zone shall extend through the threshold on each side; creating an X- pattern.When activation and safety zones are cleared and the entrance closes the sensor will ignore the X-pattern safety zones. 5. Combined motion and presence sensors shall be equal to or better than X-Zone Sensor by Optex. B. Photoelectric Beams: In addition to the threshold sensor include a minimum of two(2) doorway holding beams. Photoelectric beams shall be pulsed infrared type, including sender receiver assemblies for recessed mounting. C. Presence Sensor Monitoring: Sliding automatic entrances control system shall include a means to verify the functionality of all active presence sensors in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10. A detected fault shall cause automatic operation to cease until the fault is corrected. 2.8 HARDWARE A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance door and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. B. Emergency Breakaway Feature: Provide release hardware that allows panel(s)to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any position in sliding mode. Maximum force to open panel shall be 50 IV(222 N) according to ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Interrupt powered operation of panel operator while in breakaway mode. 1. Emergency breakaway feature shall include at least one adjustable detent device mounted in the top of each breakaway panel to control panel breakaway force. 2. Limit Arms: Limit arms shall be provided to control swing of sliding or non-sliding panels on break-out; swing shall not exceed 90 degrees. Limit arms shall be spring loaded to prevent shock, and include adjustable friction damping. C. Deadlocks: Manufacturer's standard deadbolt operated by exterior cylinder and interior thumb turn; with minimum 1 inch (25 mm) long throw bolt;ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. 1. Cylinders:As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 2. Hook Latch: Laminated-steel hook, mortise type, BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. 3. Two-Point Locking: On bi-parting entrances, provide locking system that incorporates a device in the stile of active door leaves that automatically extends a flush bolt into overhead carrier assembly. D. Control Switch: Provide manufacturer's standard header mounted rocker switches and door position switch to allow for full control of the automatic entrance door. Controls to include, but are not limited to: 1. One-way traffic 2. Reduced Opening 3. Open/Closed/Automatic SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 28-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S E. Power Switch: Sliding automatic entrances shall be equipped with a two position On/Off rocker switch to control power to the door. F. Sliding Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components complying with AAMA 701; made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum- strip backing. G. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard adjustable nylon brush sweep mounted to underside of door bottom. 2.9 FABRICATION A. General: Factory fabricates automatic entrance door assembly components to designs, sizes, and thickness indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 2. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. 1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard mechanical or welded joints. Provide sub-frames and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support required loads. 2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. 3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 4. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware. D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing. E. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing indicated. F. Hardware: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 28-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products for recommendations for applying and designing finishes. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by Aluminum Association for designing finishes. B. Class I, Color Anodic Finish:AA-M12C22A42/A44 Mechanical Finish: as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte;Anodic Coating:Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.70 mils minimum complying with AAMA 611-98, and the following: 1. Color: Dark Bronze. 2. AAMA 606.1 3. Applicator must be fully compliant with all applicable environmental regulations and permits, including wastewater and heavy metal discharge. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrances. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in Division 26 Sections. D. Glazing: Performed under Division 8 Section "Glazing" in accordance with sliding automatic entrance manufacturer's instructions. E. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division7 Section "Joint Sealants". 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Services: Factory Trained Installer shall test and inspect each automatic entrance door to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable ANSI standards. SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 28-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation, for tight closure, and complying with requirements in ANSI/BHMA A156.10. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing',for cleaning and maintaining glass. END OF SECTION 08 42 28 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 28-12 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 08 42 29 - IMPACT RATED SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of automatic entrances: 1. Exterior, single slide, impact rated, sliding automatic entrances. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Sections for sealants to the extent not specified in this section. 2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for entrances furnished and installed separately in Division 8 Section. 3. Division 8 Section Glazing for materials and installation requirements of glazing for automatic entrances. 4. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections provided separately in Division 26 including conduit and wiring for power to sliding automatic entrances. 1.3 REFERENCES A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority,form a part of this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number,title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation. B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 325—Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.10: Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. 2. ANSI/BHMA A156.5: Standard for Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A36-Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM B221-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. IMPACT RATED SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 3. ASTM B209-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 4. ASTM E283-Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. E. American Welding Society(AWS): 1. AWS A5.10/A5.10M -Specification For Bare Aluminum And Aluminum-Alloy Welding Electrodes And Rods. F. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM): G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 101—Life Safety Code. 2. NFPA 70—National Electric Code. H. International Code Council (ICC): 1. IBC: International Building Code I. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 1. ISO 9001 -Quality Management Systems J. Miami-Dade County Building Code Compliance Office 1. Product Control Division, Notice of Acceptance K. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. L. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA 606.1—Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 2. AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 3. AAMA 701 Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door. B. Safety Device: Device that prevents a door from opening or closing, as appropriate. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide automatic entrance door assemblies capable of withstanding loads and thermal movements based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Operating Range: Minus 30 deg F (Minus 34 deg C)to 130 deg F (54 deg C). IMPACT RATED SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S C. Opening-Force Requirements for Egress Doors: Not more than 50 Ibf(222 N) required to manually set door in motion in the direction of egress if power fails, and not more than 15 Ibf (67 N) required to open door to minimum required width. D. Closing-Force Requirements: Not more than 30 Ibf(133 N) required to prevent door from closing. E. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 1.25 cfm/sf. (6.4 L/s-m') of fixed entrance system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 Ibf/sf(299 Pa). F. Wind Pressure and Impact Ratings:Wind pressure and impact rated sliding automatic entrance systems shall be designed to comply with the following: 1. Design Pressures: Designed to withstand up to 80 psf(3830 Pa), wind force in both the positive and negative direction, 2. Missile Impact: Large and small missile impact rated in accordance with Florida Building Code; 50 ft/s (15.2 m/s) impact speed. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other work. C. Color Samples for selection of factory-applied color finishes. D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Owner's Manual. 2. Warranties. E. Design Certifications: 1. Product Control Division, Notice of Acceptance from Miami-Dade County Building Code Compliance Office. 2. Product Approval in accordance with FAC. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE F. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative, with certificate issued by AAADM, who is trained for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. G. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with a manufacturing facility compliant with ISO 9001. H. Manufacturer shall have in place a national service dispatch center providing 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, emergency call back service. IMPACT RATED SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 I. Certifications:Automatic sliding door systems shall be certified by the manufacturer to meet performance design criteria in accordance with the following standards: 1. ANSI/BHMAA156.10. 2. NFPA 101. 3. U L 325 listed. 4. 1 BC. 5. Miami-Dade County Building Code Compliance Office. J. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic entrance door assemblies through one source from a single manufacturer. K. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of automatic entrance door assemblies and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." L. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. M. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: General Contractor shall verify openings to receive automatic entrance door assemblies by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Mounting Surfaces: General Contractor shall verify all surfaces to be plumb, straight and secure; substrates to be of proper dimension and material. C. Other trades: General Contractor shall advise of any inadequate conditions or equipment. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Templates: Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing automatic entrances to comply with indicated requirements. B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrance door assemblies with connections to power supplies. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Automatic Entrances shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1)year from the date of substantial completion. B. During the warranty period the Owner shall engage a factory-trained technician to perform service and affect repairs. A safety inspection shall be performed after each adjustment or repair and a completed inspection form shall be submitted to the Owner. IMPACT RATED SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S C. During the warranty period all warranty work, including but not limited to emergency service, shall be performed during normal working hours. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES (EXTERIOR) A. Basis of Design Manufacturer:Stanley Access Technologies; Dura-StormT"' 3000 Series sliding automatic entrances. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Headers, stiles, rails, and frames: 6063-T6. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. B. Steel: Manufacturer's standard ASTM A36 steel shapes for reinforcing of panel stiles if required by codes. C. Sealants and Joint Fillers: Performed under Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". 2.3 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door assemblies including doors, sidelights, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, activation and safety devices, and accessories required for a complete installation. B. Sliding Automatic Entrances: 1. Single Slide Entrances: a. Configuration: One sliding leaf and one full sidelight. b. Traffic Pattern: Two-way. C. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaf and sidelight. d. Mounting: Between jambs. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Nominal Size: 1 3/4 inch by 4 1/2 inch (45 by 115 mm). 2. Concealed Fastening: Framing shall incorporate a concealed fastening pocket, and continuous flush insert cover, extending full length of each framing member. IMPACT RATED SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Stile and Rail Doors and Sidelights: Manufacturer's standard 13/4 inch (45 mm)thick glazed doors with extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails. All corners, including intersections of stiles and rails or stiles and muntin bars, shall be welded secure. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Snap-on, extruded-security aluminum inboard stops with preformed glazing gaskets. Mechanically fastened outboard gutter stop with approved structural glazing tape. 2. Stile Design: Medium stile; 3% inch (95 mm) nominal width. Reinforce stiles with manufacture's standard steel shapes if required by codes. 3. Bottom Rail Design: Minimum 10 inch (254 mm) nominal height. 4. Muntin Bars:4 1/4 inch (108 mm)] nominal height. C. Glazing: Performed under Division 8 Section "Glazing" in accordance with product approvals and the following: 1. Glass: 1 1/8 inch (29 mm) laminated and insulated glazing units as specified in product approvals. Insulated glass panes shall incorporate a 1/2 inch (13 mm) dehydrated air space. Units shall be hermetically sealed with a dual seal. 2. Glazing: Outboard stop with approved structural tape. D. Headers: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and extending full width of automatic entrance door units to conceal door operators, carrier assemblies, and roller tracks. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access. 1. Mounting: Concealed, with one side of header flush with framing. 2. Capacity: Capable of supporting up to 220 lb (100 kg) per panel, up to four panels, over spans up to 14 feet(4.3 m)without intermediate supports. E. Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's standard carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment of at least 1/8 inch (3 mm); consisting of urethane with precision steel lubricated ball-bearing wheels, operating on a continuous roller track. Support panels from carrier assembly by load wheels and anti-riser wheels with factory adjusted cantilever and pivot assembly. Minimum two ball-bearing load wheels and two anti-rise rollers for each active leaf. Minimum load wheel diameter shall be 2 1/2 inch (64 mm); minimum anti-rise roller diameter shall be 2 inch (51 mm). F. Thresholds: Manufacturer's standard thresholds as indicated below: 1. Continuous standard tapered extrusion double bevel. 2. All thresholds shall conform to details and requirements for code compliance, including the Texas Accessibility Standards. G. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non- bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. IMPACT RATED SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 H. Signage: Provide signage in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10. 2.5 DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement;for condition of exposure; and for long-term, operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. B. Electromechanical Operators: Self-contained overhead unit powered by a minimum of 1/4 horsepower, permanent-magnet DC motor with gear reduction drive, microprocessor controller; and encoder. 1. Operation: Power opening and power closing. 2. Features: a. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. b. Adjustable open check and close check speeds. C. Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds. d. Obstruction recycle. e. On/Off switch to control electric power to operator. f. Energy conservation switch that reduces door-opening width. g. Closed loop speed control with active braking and acceleration. h. Adjustable obstruction recycle time delay. i. Self-adjusting stop position. j. Self-adjusting closing compression force. k. Onboard sensor power supply. I. Onboard sensor monitoring. M. Optional Switch to open/Switch to close operation. n. Fire alarm interface, configurable to safely open or close the entrance on signal from fire alarm system. 3. Mounting: Concealed. 4. Drive System: Synchronous belt type. C. Electrical service to door operators shall be provided under Division 26 Electrical. Minimum service to be 120 VAC, 5 amps. 2.6 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS A. Electrical Control System: Electrical control system shall include a microprocessor controller and a high-resolution position encoder.The encoder shall monitor revolutions of the operator shaft and send signals to microprocessor controller to define door position and speed. IMPACT RATED SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. The high-resolution encoder shall have a resolution of not less than 1024 counts per revolution. Systems utilizing external magnets and magnetic switches are not acceptable. 2. Electrical control system shall include a 24 VDC auxiliary output rated at 1 amp. B. Performance Data:The microprocessor shall collect, and store performance data as follows: 1. Counter:A non-resettable counter to track operating cycles. 2. Event Reporting: Unit shall include non-volatile event and error recording including number of occurrences of events and errors, and cycle count of most recent events and errors. 3. LED Display: Display presenting the current operating state of the controller. C. Controller Protection:The microprocessor controller shall incorporate the following features to ensure trouble free operation: 1. Automatic Reset Upon Power Up. 2. Main Fuse Protection. 3. Electronic Surge Protection. 4. Internal Power Supply Protection. 5. Resetable sensor supply fuse protection. 6. Motor Protection, over-current protection. D. Soft Start/Stop: A"soft-start" "soft-stop" motor driving circuit shall be provided for smooth normal opening and recycling. E. Obstruction Recycle: Provide system to recycle the sliding panels when an obstruction is encountered during the closing cycle. If an obstruction is detected,the system shall search for that object on the next closing cycle by reducing door closing speed prior to the previously encountered obstruction location, and will continue to close in check speed until doors are fully closed, at which time the doors will reset to normal speed. If obstruction is encountered again, the door will come to a full stop. The doors shall remain stopped until obstruction is removed and operate signal is given, resetting the door to normal operation. F. Programmable Controller: Microprocessor controller shall be field programmable. 1. The following parameters may be adjusted: a. Operating speeds and forces as required to meet specified ANSI/BHMA standard. b. Adjustable and variable features specified. C. Reduced opening position. 2. Manual programming shall be available through local interface which has a two-digit display with a selection control including three push buttons. IMPACT RATED SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 2.7 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES A. Combined Activation and Safety Sensors: Combined activation and safety sensors shall, in a single housing, detect motion and presence in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Motion shall be detected using K-band microwave technology, presence by active infrared reflection technology. 1. Mounting Height: Up to 11.5 feet(3.5 m) above finish floor 2. Temperature Range: Between -31°F and 131°F(-35°C to 55°C) in all environmental conditions 3. Relays: Form C, 50V at 0.3A for both activation and safety. Hold time of less than 0.5 seconds. 4. Detection Pattern: When detection is made in the activation zone, and the entrance opens,the safety zone shall extend through the threshold on each side; creating an X- pattern. When activation and safety zones are cleared and the entrance closes the sensor will ignore the X-pattern safety zones. 5. Combined motion and presence sensors shall be equal to or better than X-Zone Sensor by Optex. B. Photoelectric Beams: In addition to the threshold sensor include a minimum of two(2) doorway holding beams. Photoelectric beams shall be pulsed infrared type, including sender receiver assemblies for recessed mounting. C. Presence Sensor Monitoring: Sliding automatic entrances control system shall include a means to verify the functionality of all active presence sensors in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10. A detected fault shall cause automatic operation to cease until the fault is corrected. 2.8 HARDWARE A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance door and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. B. Emergency Breakaway Feature: Provide release hardware that allows panel(s)to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any position in sliding mode. Maximum force to open panel shall be 50 Ibf(222 N) according to ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Interrupt powered operation of panel operator while in breakaway mode. 1. Emergency breakaway feature shall include at least two adjustable detent devices mounted in each breakaway panel; one top mounted and one bottom mounted,to control panel breakaway force. 2. Wind Resistant Damper: Provide factory installed concealed gas dampers in sliding or non-sliding breakaway panels to protect door panels from wind damage. Dampers shall be designed to slow panel movement after breakout. C. Panic Release Locking: Manufacturer's approved multi-point locking system with panic release hardware as follows: IMPACT RATED SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1. Four-Point Locking: Provide locking components within sliding panels, including panic release hardware, that extend flush bolts into overhead carrier assemblies and threshold of both sliding leaves. Flush bolts shall be manually dogged, or disengaged, for normal operation. Lock cylinders shall be provided to allow for disengagement of flush bolts from the exterior. 2. Cylinders: Furnish and install cylinders compatible with Owner's existing door hardware and keying system. 3. Panic release hardware shall be equal to or better than, Adams Rite G86-11-36. D. Control Switch: Provide manufacturer's standard rotary switch mounted on the interior jamb and door position switch to allow for full control of the automatic entrance door. Controls to include, but are not limited to: 1. One-way traffic 2. Reduced Opening 3. Open/Closed/Automatic E. Power Switch: Sliding automatic entrances shall be equipped with a two position On/Off rocker switch to control power to the door. F. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components complying with AAMA 701; made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing. 1. Provide double pile weather stripping on lead stiles of sliding panels and stiles adjacent to jambs. 2. Provide single pile weather stripping between carrier and header, lead stiles of sidelights, and on pivot stiles of sliding panels. G. Weather Sweeps:Adjustable, dual brush, nylon brush sweep mounted to underside of door bottom. 2.9 FABRICATION A. General: Factory fabricates automatic entrance door assembly components to designs, sizes, and thickness indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 2. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. IMPACT RATED SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1. Fabricate door panels and sidelights as tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard mechanical or welded joints. Provide sub-frames and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support required loads. 2. Weld door panels and sidelights in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 3. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. 4. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 5. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 6. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware. D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing. E. Welding: Comply with AWS A5.10/A5.10M -Specification for Bare Aluminum and Aluminum- Alloy Welding Electrodes and Rods. F. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing indicated. G. Hardware: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products for recommendations for applying and designing finishes. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by Aluminum Association for designing finishes. B. Class I, Color Anodic Finish:AA-M12C22A42/A44 Mechanical Finish: as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte;Anodic Coating:Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.70 mils minimum complying with AAMA 611-98, and the following: 1. Color: Dark Bronze. 2. AAMA 606.1 3. Applicator must be fully compliant with all applicable environmental regulations and permits, including wastewater and heavy metal discharge. IMPACT RATED SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrances. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in Division 26 Sections. D. Glazing: Performed under Division 8 Section "Glazing" in accordance with sliding automatic entrance manufacturer's instructions. E. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Services: Factory Trained Installer shall test and inspect each automatic entrance door to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable ANSI standards. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation, for tight closure, and complying with requirements in ANSI/BHMA A156.10. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing",for cleaning and maintaining glass. END OF SECTION 08 42 29 IMPACT RATED SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-12 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 08 80 00 -GLAZING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass products. 2. Laminated glass. 3. Insulating glass. 4. Miscellaneous glazing materials. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances to achieve proper safety margins for glazing retention under each design load case, load case combination, and service condition. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For glass. B. Product test reports. C. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. D. Sample warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. GLAZING 08 80 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements,"to design glazing. B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined in accordance with the IBC and ASTM E1300: 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Thermal Loads: Design glazing to resist thermal stress breakage induced by differential temperature conditions and limited air circulation within individual glass lites and insulated glazing units. C. Wind borne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Exterior glazing shall pass ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 1. 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located between 30 feet and 60 feet above grade. D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: GLAZING 08 80 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 100 and based on most current non-beta version of LBL's WINDOW computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. xhx deg F. 2. SHGC and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 200 and based on most current non-beta version of LBL's WINDOW computer program. 3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. NGA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the IGCC. D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than thickness indicated. E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat- strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat- strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide the same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout the Project. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat- treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance GLAZING 08 80 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. C. Wind borne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 1 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in the same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project. 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 feet above grade. 3. Large-Missile Test: For all glazing, regardless of height above grade. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulation-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq.ft. x h x deg F. 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass:ASTM C1036,Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated,Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer or cast-in-place and cured- transparent-resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. GLAZING 08 80 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Laminated Glass: Comply with requirements specified above for laminated glass except laminate glass with one of the following to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer reinforced with polyethylene terephthalate film to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified in accordance with ASTM E2190. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants. 2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both. 2.7 ACID ETCHED GLASS A. Acid Etched Bird-Friendly Glass: Basis of Design, Walker Textures AviProTek-E 1. Patterned acid etched glass panels intended to deter bird collisions. 2. Pattern etched on glass surface#1. 3. Pattern: #217 — 5mm round dots in a 2" x 2" diamond shaped losange (diagonal pattern). 4. Meets or exceeds American Bird Conservancy testing threat factor of 15. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers:Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. B. Setting Blocks: 1. Elastomeric with Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. C. Spacers: 1. Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. D. Edge Blocks: GLAZING 08 80 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Elastomeric with Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING,GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and in accordance with requirements in referenced glazing publications. 3.2 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure- glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to GLAZING 08 80 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.3 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, remove non-permanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damaging coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. 3.5 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE A. Clear Laminated Glass-Type GL-3: Two plies of fully tempered float glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 9/16 inch. 2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6 mm. 3. InterlayerThickness: 0.060 inch. 4. Safety glazing label required. 3.6 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE A. Low-E-Coated,Tinted, Insulating Laminated Glass-Type GL1: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Double Glazed, Bird Friendly Tinted Solar Control Laminated Insulating Glass Unit, Solarban 70 on Clear 1/4 inch (6mm), surface #2 1 Air 1/2" (12.7mm) 1 1/4 inch (6mm) Solarbronze tint with Solarban 70 on Surface#4_090SG_1/4 inch (6mm) Clear. GLAZING 08 80 00-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-5/16 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 1/4 inch. 4. Outdoor Lite: Clear with AviProtekE acid etched first surface, second surface Solarban 70 low-E coating, heat-strengthened float glass. 5. Interspace Content:Air: 1/2 inch. 6. Indoor Lite:Tinted laminated glass with two plies of heat-strengthened float glass. a. Outboard lite: Solarbronze tinted, Solarban 70 low-E coating on Surface#4. b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.090 inch, Eastman Saflex or Kuraray Butacite PVB. C. Inboard lite: Clear. d. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 1/4 inch. 7. Low-E Coating: Magnetic sputter coating on second surface. 8. Safety glazing label required. 9. Performance Requirements: a. Visible Light Transmittance: 26 percent minimum. b. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.28(Btu/hr*ft2*°F) maximum. C. Summer daytime U-Factor: 0.26(Btu/hr*ft2*°F) maximum. d. Shading Coefficient: 0.28 maximum. e. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.24 maximum. f. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 13 percent maximum. B. Low-E-Coated,Tinted, Insulating Laminated Glass-Type GL2: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Double Glazed, Bird Friendly Tinted Solar Control Laminated Insulating Glass Unit, Solarban 70 on Clear 3/16 inch (5mm), surface #2 1 Air 3/8" (9.5mm) 1 3/16 inch (5mm) Solarbronze tint with Solarban 70 on Surface #4_090SG_3/16 inch (5mm) Clear. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 3/16 inch. 4. Outdoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass with AviProtekE acid etched first surface, second surface Solarban 70 low-E coating. 5. Interspace Content:Air: 3/8 inch. 6. Indoor Lite: Laminated a. Laminate Outboard Lite: Solarbronze Tinted with fourth surface Solarban 70 low- E coating, heat-strengthened float glass. b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.090 inch, Eastman Saflex or Kuraray Butacite PVB. GLAZING 08 80 00-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 C. Laminate Inboard Lite: Clear laminated heat-strengthened float glass. d. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3/16 inch. 7. Low-E Coating: Magnetic sputter coating on fourth surface. 8. Performance Requirements: a. Visible Light Transmittance: 28 percent minimum. b. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.31 (Btu/hr*ft2*°F) maximum. C. Summer daytime U-Factor: 0.31 (Btu/hr*ft2*°F) maximum. d. Shading Coefficient: 0.28 maximum. e. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.24 maximum. f. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 14 percent maximum. 9. Safety glazing label required. C. Low-E-Coated,Tinted, Insulating Laminated Glass-Type GL3: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Double Glazed, Bird Friendly Tinted Solar Control Laminated Insulating Glass Unit, Solarban 70 on Clear 3/16 inch (5mm), surface #2 1 Air 1/2" (9.5mm) 1 3/16 inch (5mm) Solarbronze tint with Solarban 70 on Surface #4_090SG_3/16 inch (5mm) Clear. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-1/8 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 3/16 inch. 4. Outdoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass with AviProtekE acid etched first surface, second surface Solarban 70 low-E coating. 5. Interspace Content:Air: 3/8 inch. 6. Indoor Lite: Laminated a. Laminate Outboard Lite: Solarbronze Tinted with fourth surface Solarban 70 low- E coating, heat-strengthened float glass. b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.090 inch, Eastman Saflex or Kuraray Butacite PVB. C. Laminate Inboard Lite: Clear laminated heat-strengthened float glass. d. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3/16 inch. 7. Low-E Coating: Magnetic sputter coating on fourth surface. 8. Performance Requirements: a. Visible Light Transmittance: 28 percent minimum. b. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.31 (Btu/hr*ft2*°F) maximum. C. Summer daytime U-Factor: 0.31 (Btu/hr*ft2*°F) maximum. d. Shading Coefficient: 0.28 maximum. GLAZING 08 80 00-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 e. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.24 maximum. f. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 14 percent maximum. 9. Safety glazing label required. 3.7 LAMINATED (SAFETY)GLASS SCHEDULE A. Clear Laminated Glass-Type GL4:Two plies of fully tempered float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 1/4 inch. 2. InterlayerThickness: 0.060 inch. 3. Overall Unit Thickness: Nominal 9/16 inch. 4. Safety glazing label required. END OF SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 08 80 00-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 09 24 00 -CEMENT PLASTERING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal lath. 2. Base-coat cement plaster. 3. Cement plaster finish coats. 4. Accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Samples: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat and for each color and texture specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C847, cold-rolled carbon-steel sheet with ASTM A653/A653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating. 1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 3.4 lb/sq.yd. 2.2 BASE-COAT CEMENT PLASTER A. General: Comply with ASTM C926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials. B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland and Masonry Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2.3 CEMENT PLASTER FINISH COATS A. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents, and proprietary ingredients. 1. Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C1063, and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Accessories: 1. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded flanges. 2. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Lime:ASTM C206,Type S; or ASTM C207,Type S. B. Sand Aggregate:ASTM C897. 1. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: White. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in cement plaster. C. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates:ASTM C1063. D. Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch diameter unless otherwise indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Prepare smooth, solid substrates for plaster according to ASTM C926. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL LATH A. Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C1063. CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Control Joints: Locate as indicated on Drawings. 3.4 APPLICATION OF BASE-COAT CEMENT PLASTER A. General: Comply with ASTM C926. B. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three-coat plasterwork with 3/4-inch total thickness, as follows: 1. Portland and masonry cement mixes. C. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three-coat plasterwork and having 1/2-inch total thickness, as follows: 1. Portland and masonry cement mixes. 3.5 APPLICATION OF CEMENT PLASTER FINISH COATS A. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float finish to match texture on existing plaster. Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range of colors. 3.6 REPAIR A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. END OF SECTION 09 24 00 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 09 30 13 -CERAMIC TILING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Quarry tile. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard-grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Floor: Floor: Square-Edged Textured Quarry Tile, 8"x 8" nominal size. B. Wall: Square-Edged Smooth Quarry Tile, 8"x 8" nominal size. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Olean; a brand of Dal-Tile Corporation. b. Daltile; a brand of Dal-Tile Corporation. 2. Face Size: Match existing tile. 3. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 4. Finish: Match existing tiles. 5. Tile Color and Pattern: Match existing tiles. 6. Grout Color:As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range of colors. CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2.3 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANES A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. All Crack Isolation Membrane, Setting and Grout materials shall be a single-source manufacturer,warranty system. C. Crack Isolation Membrane, Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement. 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS A. Polymer-modified Portland Cement Mortar(Thickset) Installation Materials:ANSI A108.1A. 1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar and stainless steel lath as required. 2. For floor applications, provide unreinforced mortar. B. Water-Cleanable,Tile-Setting Epoxy:ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. ARDEX Americas. b. Atlas Minerals &Chemicals, Inc. C. Bostik;Arkema. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Parex USA, Inc. j. Sakrete; CRH Americas, Oldcastle APG. k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. I. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2.5 GROUT MATERIALS A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout:ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S a. ARDEX Americas. b. Atlas Minerals &Chemicals, Inc. C. Bostik;Arkema. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Parex USA, Inc. j. Sakrete; CRH Americas, Oldcastle APG. k. Sika Corporation. I. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. M. Summitville Tiles, Inc. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern orjoint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with joint widths to match existing. G. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. H. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. 3.4 EXTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Exterior Floor Installations: 1. TCNA F101 and : Cement mortar bed (thickset) . a. Mortar Bed: Polymer-modified Portland Cement Mortar. b. Bond Coat for Cured-Bed Method: mortar. C. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout . B. Exterior Wall Installations, Masonry or Concrete: 1. TCNA W201 and : Cement mortar bed (thickset) on metal lath. a. Mortar Bed: Polymer-modified Portland Cement Mortar. b. Bond Coat for Cured-Bed Method: mortar. C. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout . CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.5 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. TCNA F131: Water-cleanable,tile-setting epoxy; epoxy grout. a. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. END OF SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 09 9113 - PAINTING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting,and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces indicated on the drawings. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules," except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Light fixtures. d. Switchgear. e. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. C. Utility tunnels. d. Pipe spaces. 3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: PAINTING 09 91 13- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze. f. Brass. 4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code- required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. B. Standard coating terms in accordance with ASTM D523. 1. Gloss Level 1 (Flat): Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, in accordance with ASTM D523. 2. Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, in accordance with ASTM D523. 3. Gloss Level 4(Satin): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, in accordance with ASTM D523. 4. Gloss Level 5 (Semi-Gloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, in accordance with ASTM D523. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application instructions for each material proposed for use. 1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. VOC content. PAINTING 09 91 13-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Samples for verification purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 1. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application. 2. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch-square samples for each color and finish. b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of masonry,with mortarjoint in the center,for each finish and color. C. Painted Wood: Provide two 12- by 12-inch samples of each color and material on hardboard. d. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch-square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch- long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified. C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full- coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface until required sheen, color and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. 1. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples. 2. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings in this room or surface in accordance with the schedule or as specified.After finishes are accepted,this room or surface will be used for evaluation of coating systems of a similar nature. D. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers. PAINTING 09 91 13-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 2. Federal Specifications establish a minimum quality level for paint materials,except where other product identification is used. Provide written certification from the manufacturer that materials provided meet or exceed these criteria. 3. Products that comply with qualitative requirements of applicable Federal Specifications, yet differ in quantitative requirements, may be considered for use when acceptable to the Architect. Furnish material data and manufacturer's certificate of performance to Architect for proposed substitutions. E. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base,when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,Subpart D(EPA Method 24). 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings:400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers:420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Federal Specification number, if applicable. 4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number. PAINTING 09 91 13-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg Q. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain,fog, or mist,when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: 1. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. (PPG). 3. Pratt and Lambert (P & Q. 4. The Sherwin-Williams Company(S-W). 2.2 MASONRY BLOCK FILLER A. High-Performance Latex Block Filler: Heavy-duty latex block fillers used for filling open textured interior and exterior concrete masonry block before application of top coats: 1. PPG: Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Hi fill Latex Block Filler 6-15X1. 2. S-W: Prep Rite Block Filler B25W25. 2.3 PRIMERS A. Exterior Primer Coating: Exterior latex wood primer used for priming mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels under a flat acrylic emulsion finish: 1. PPG: Seal Grip Interior/Exterior Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17-921XI PAINTING 09 91 13-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2. S-W: Exterior Latex Primer B. Interior Masonry Latex-Based Paint: Alkali-resistant paint used as a primer over concrete and masonry under flat and semigloss enamel: 1. PPG: Seal Grip Interior/Exterior Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17-921XI 2. S-W: Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300. C. Interior Flat Latex-Based Paint: Flat latex paint used as a primer on plaster under flat, semigloss, and full-gloss alkyd finishes: 1. PPG: Seal Grip Interior/Exterior Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17-921XI 2. S-W: Premium Wall and Wood Primer, B28W8111. D. Latex-Based Interior White Primer: Latex-based primer coating used on interior gypsum drywall under a flat latex paint or an alkyd semigloss enamel. 1. PPG: Speedhide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer 6-2 2. S-W: Pro Green 200 Latex Wall Primer. E. Synthetic, Rust-Inhibiting Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer for priming ferrous metal on the exterior under full-gloss and flat alkyd enamel and on the interior under flat latex paint or odorless alkyd semigloss or alkyd gloss enamels: 1. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus EP Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish 90-1908 Series 2. S-W: Pro Cryl Universal Metal Primer B66W310. F. Galvanized Metal Primer: Primer used to prime interior and exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus EP Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish 90-1908 Series 2. S-W: Pro Cryl Universal Metal Primer B66W310. 2.4 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS A. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel for use as an undercoat over wood and hardboard under an odorless alkyd semigloss enamel or full gloss alkyd enamel: 1. PPG: Speedhide Interior Quick-Dry Latex Sealer 6-2 2. S-W: Premium Wall &Wood Primer, B28W8111. B. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel for use as an undercoat over a primer on ferrous or zinc-coated metal under an interior alkyd semigloss enamel or a full-gloss alkyd enamel: 1. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus EP Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish 90-1908 Series 2. S-W: Premium Wall &Wood Primer, B28W8111. PAINTING 09 91 13-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Quick-drying, flat (Gloss Level 1), acrylic paint for use on the exterior over concrete, stucco, masonry (including concrete masonry block), and mineral-fiber- reinforced cement-panel surfaces: 1. PPG: Sunproof Exterior 100%Acrylic Latex Flat 72-45XI Series 2. S-W: A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish A-6 Series. B. Exterior Semi-transparent Oil Stain: Semi-transparent oil based exterior wood stains: 1. PPG: Olympic Maximum Sealant+Stain in One 79550 2. S-W: WoodScapes Semi-Transparent Polyurethane Exterior Stain (A15T5). C. Exterior Gloss Level 5 Enamel: Full-Gloss Alkyd enamel for use over prime-coated ferrous metal: 1. PPG: HPC Urethane Alkyd Enamel Semi-Gloss 4336H Series. Applied Dry Film Thickness: 2.0 mils min. 2. S-W: Industrial Alkyd Urethane B54W150. 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Latex-Based Interior Semi-Gloss Paint: Ready-mixed, latex-based paint for use as a semi-gloss finish over concrete and masonry surfaces, including filled concrete masonry block, mineral- fiber-reinforced cement panels, and plaster and over prime-coated gypsum drywall, ferrous metal, and zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. PPG: Speedhide Zero Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 6-5510 Series 2. S-W: Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Semigloss Wall Paint. B. Interior Semigloss Odorless Acrylic Paint: Ready-mixed, low-odor interior semigloss acrylic enamel for use over concrete, masonry, and plaster wood, hardwood, gypsum drywall, and metal surfaces: 1. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus Semi-Gloss HP Waterborne Acrylic 90-1610 Series 2. S-W: Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic Egg-Shell. C. Latex-based, Interior Flat Paint: Ready-mixed, latex based paint for use over acoustical plaster surfaces and as a "size"on cotton or canvas covering over insulation: 1. PPG: Speedhide Zero Interior Latex Flat 6-5110 2. S-W: Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Flat Wall Paint, B30W2600 Series. D. Exposed Steel Roof Structure and Acoustical Tectum Panels:2 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 4 mils. 1. Two Coats: PPG Speedhide Super Tech WB Interior Latex Dry Fog Flat, 6-725XI Series. 2. Two Coats: S-W Low VOC Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, B42W00081. PAINTING 09 91 13-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated with using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If C. surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. d. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, and rinse; allow to dry and vacuum before painting. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. PAINTING 09 91 13-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming,fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends,faces, undersides,and backsides of wood,including cabinets,counters,cases, and paneling. C. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. d. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and in accordance with requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. C. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.Wire- brush,clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non- petroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. Test adhesion prior to full application. C. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. D. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied.Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. PAINTING 09 91 13-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules." 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 4. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field- finished casework to match exterior. 10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 12. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch up painted. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under PAINTING 09 91 13-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. D. Minimum Coating Thickness:Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include but are not limited to: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Supports. 7. Motors and mechanical equipment. 8. Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include but are not limited to: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. H. Block Fillers:Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears,to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: PAINTING 09 91 13-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative materials analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. C. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. I. Color retention. M. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements,the Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing, repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are noncompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades,whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting.Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. PAINTING 09 91 13-12 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated. B. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Two finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler:Acrylic. Applied Dry Film Thickness: 8.0 mils min. b. First Coat:Acrylic Latex Satin. Applied Dry Film Thickness: 1.6 mils min. C. Second Coat:Acrylic Latex Satin. Applied Dry Film Thickness: 1.6 mils min. C. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1. Lusterless Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer. b. First Coat: Lusterless Alkyd Enamel. C. Second Coat: Lusterless Alkyd Enamel. D. Zinc-Coated Metal: 1. Lusterless Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer. b. First Coat:Alkyd Gloss Enamel. C. Second Coat:Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. B. Concrete and Masonry(Other than concrete masonry units): 1. Semi-gloss Enamel Finish: 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils. a. Primer: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint. b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat. C. Finish Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Acrylic Enamel. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel Finish: 2 coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat. a. Block Filler: High Performance Latex Block Filler. b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat. PAINTING 09 91 13-13 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 C. Finish Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Acrylic Enamel. D. Gypsum Drywall Systems: 1. Egg-Shell Acrylic Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Interior Latex-Based White Primer. b. First Coat: Interior Egg-Shell Acrylic Enamel. C. Second Coat: Interior Egg-Shell Acrylic Enamel 2. Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel Finish: 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Interior Latex-Based White Primer. b. First Coat: Interior Egg-Shell Acrylic Enamel. C. Second Coat: Interior semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel. E. Woodwork and Hardboard: 1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: 3 coats. a. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat. b. First Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Acrylic Enamel. C. Second Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Acrylic Enamel. F. Ferrous Metal: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer. b. First Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint. C. Second Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint. 2. Semigloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer. b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat. C. Finish Coat: Interior semigloss Acrylic Enamel. G. Zinc-Coated Metal: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer. b. First Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint. PAINTING 09 91 13-14 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 C. Second Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint. 2. Semigloss Finish: 2 coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer. b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat. C. Finish Coat: Interior semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel. END OF SECTION 09 9113 PAINTING 09 91 13-15 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 10 14 19 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dimensional characters. a. Fabricated channel dimensional characters. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights,locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list,typestyles,graphic elements,and layout for each sign at least half size. 4. Show locations of electrical service connections. 5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Fabricated Channel Characters: Metal face and side returns formed free from warp and distortion;with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; internally braced for stability,to meet structural performance loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners; and as follows. 1. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum. 2. Character Height:As indicated on Drawings. 3. Character Depth:As indicated on Drawings. 4. Character Font: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Finishes: a. Integral Aluminum Finish: Dark Bronze anodized. DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 19- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 6. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character. a. Hold characters at manufacturer's recommended distance from wall surface. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 2. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 4. Internally brace dimensional characters for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners. 5. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. 6. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 3. Corrosion Protection:Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 19-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Mounting Methods: 1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes.Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten. 2. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. END OF SECTION 10 1419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 19-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 10 14 80 - LED MESSAGE CENTER PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. LED message centers B. Control software 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standard for Electric Signs, UL and CUL Listed B. Standard for Control Centers for Changing Message Type Signs C. Federal Communications Commission Regulation Part 15 D. National Electric Code E. Designed to current UBC or IBC standards F. FCC Class A Compliant 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. The electronic LED display manufacturer shall provide a complete technical submittal within 60 days of contract award and shall not proceed with LED Matrix manufacture until the submittal is approved. B. Submit: 1. All LED display manufacturer qualifications, as specified herein. 2. LED display shop drawing. 3. LED display Riser diagram. 4. AC Site Power Requirements, including legs and Amps per leg. 5. LED display control software operator's manual. 6. LED display installation and maintenance manual. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. LED Display Manufacturer shall: 1. Have in operation at bid date a minimum of 100 large outdoor permanently mounted LED displays as defined above. Each of these LED displays shall have operated successfully for a minimum period of one (1)year prior to the contract bid date. 2. Provide a toll-free help desk number that will be staffed from 7 a.m.to 7 p.m. B. Experience with manufacturing the following types of electronic sign products shall not satisfy the requirements of this LED display specification: LED MESSAGE CENTER 10 14 80- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Indoor displays of any size or type 2. Back-lit displays 3. Any type of matrix display that cannot be programmed to show a nearly infinite quantity of messages 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 years of parts coverage B. Provide toll-free service coordination C. Provide a toll-free help desk number that will be staffed from 7 a.m.to 7 p.m. Central Time PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN: Daktronics GS6x 6mm Full-Color LED Display(4'-2"x 7'-6"). 2.2 LED DISPLAY A. Cabinet Construction 1. Cabinet dimensions shall not exceed (50) inches high by (90) inches wide. The front-to- back cabinet depth shall not exceed 7 inches. 2. The cabinet shall contain a full LED matrix measuring a minimum of(180) pixel rows high by(360) pixel columns wide. 3. Cabinet display configuration is: a. Single-View(1V), one-sided display. 4. The distance from the center of one line or column of pixels to the center of all adjacent lines or columns shall be 6.08 mm (0.24 inches) both horizontally and vertically. 5. Display shall operate from the following power sources: 120/240 VAC,60 Hz single-phase, including neutral and earth ground. 6. Display shall operate in a minimum ambient temperature range of-40'to+120°F(-40 to +50'C) and to 95% humidity. 7. Internal display component hardware (nuts, bolts, screws, standoffs, rivets, fasteners, etc.)shall be fabricated from stainless steel,aluminum,nylon, or other durable corrosion- resistant materials suitable for the signage application. 8. Electrical display components shall be 100%solid-state. 9. The presence of ambient radio signals and magnetic or electromagnetic interference, including those from power lines,transformers,and motors,shall not impair performance of the display system. B. Housing Frame LED MESSAGE CENTER 10 14 80-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Display materials shall use non-corrosive materials or have a protective coating so they shall be anti-corrosive and not degrade or oxidize. 2. Adequate ventilation shall be provided through convection without the need to provide extra space around the sides or behind the display. 3. Steel mounting points that can be used for mounting purposes shall be provided with the display and have the ability to be adjusted for alternative mounting methods. 4. Shall include lifting supports that can be removed after installation. C. Exterior Finish 1. The LED display border pieces shall be coated with an automotive-grade acrylic urethane paint. Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Front Face Construction 1. To meet the display readability requirements,the front face must be constructed in such a manner that it provides high contrast, low sunlight reflection and durability in all weather and site conditions. 2. Minimum features of front face shall: a. Provide UV resistance to prevent discoloring. b. Include horizontal louvers for contrast enhancement. C. Include vertical ribbing for contrast enhancement d. Use surface materials in the active LED area, such as metal, plastic, or other face materials, designed for low sunlight reflectivity. E. Serviceability 1. The display housing shall provide safe and convenient front service access for all modular assemblies, components, wiring, and other materials located within the housing. 2. All internal components shall be removable and replaceable by a single technician with basic hand tools. 3. Service access shall be easily obtained by removal of one or more modules in front of the associated internal component. 4. Each module should allow simple removal with a single latch system. 5. Displays shall be designed with service features that minimize potential bodily harm. 2.3 DISPLAY COMPONENTS A. LED display modules shall be constructed for good readability, long life,and ease of service. Each display module shall be constructed as follows: 1. All modules and their components shall be fully encapsulated and sealed to meet IP-67 standards. LED MESSAGE CENTER 10 14 80-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2. An LED module shall consist of LEDs with all drive electronics mounted on a single Printed Circuit Board (PCB). 3. LEDs shall be auto-inserted in order to maintain quality and uniformity of the LEDs within each LED module. 4. All PCBs shall be wave-soldered to ensure uniformity, quality, and durability of all solder joints. 5. All PCBs shall be cleaned in a manner so as not to contain more than 2 parts per million contaminants. 6. Module signal and electrical connections shall be of the positive locking and removable type. Removal of a module from the display shall not require a de-soldering operation. 7. Data to the modules shall be redundant in that the signal can reach the module from multiple directions in the event of a loss in signal path from either direction. 8. All LED display modules in a single display shall be identical in construction and interchangeable throughout the display with the ability to be field calibrated. 9. All module rows shall include continuous louvers over the LEDs for sunlight shading and enhanced contrast. 10. Modules shall be individually attached to the cabinet frame. 11. Removal of one or more modules shall not affect the display's structural integrity. 12. The distance from the center of one line or column of pixels to the center of all adjacent lines or columns shall be 6.08 mm (0.24 inches) both horizontally and vertically. 13. The failure of a single pixel, module or power supply shall not cause the failure of any other pixel, module or power supply in the display. 14. All modules shall have no less than a viewing angle of 160' horizontal and 700vertical. 15. The transition of the viewing intensity shall be consistent throughout the viewing cone. B. Pixels shall be constructed with discrete LEDs, and these discrete LEDs shall conform to the following specifications: 1. LEDs shall be non-diffused, ultra-bright, solid-state light emitting diodes. 2. The red LEDs shall be constructed of AIInGaP technology and the green and blue LEDs shall be constructed of InGaN technology. 3. Each color of LEDs used in all LED displays provided for this contract shall be from the same bin. 4. LED lifetime shall be an estimated minimum of 100,000 hours. C. Power Supply 1. All power supplies shall be regulated, auto-ranging AC to DC power, with protection for the LED pixel, LED display and driver circuitry in the event of power spikes or surges. LED MESSAGE CENTER 10 14 80-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2. Each power supply and their connectors shall be fully sealed to protect from corrosive environmental factors meeting IP-67 standards. D. Internal Wiring 1. Wiring for LED display modules and other internal components shall be installed in the housing in a neat and professional manner. 2. Wiring shall not impede the removal of display modules, power supplies or other display components. 3. Wires shall not make contact with or be bent around sharp metal edges. 4. All wiring shall conform to the National Electric Code. E. The display shall be protected from electrical spikes and transients. F. The manufacturer shall provide an earth-ground lug on the display. 2.4 DISPLAY PERFORMANCE A. Display Capability 1. The LED display shall present messages that are continuous, uniform, and unbroken in appearance. 2. The LED display shall be capable of producing 281 trillion colors for RGB and 4096 shades of color for monochrome red or amber at all dimming levels. 3. Each display pixel shall be composed of one each —red, green, and blue LEDS or one red or one amber 4. The LED display shall be capable of displaying all true type fonts. 5. The display shall be able to display messages composed of any combination of alphanumeric text, punctuation symbols, graphic images, and pre-canned video files. 6. Video and message files shall have up to a 30 frame per second playback capability. B. Controller 1. The display's controller shall be able to run independently from a controlling computing device allowing the display to operate even when the controlling device is unhooked or turned off. 2. Communication protocol shall support other matrix products from the vendor such as other outdoor or indoor displays of varying sizes and/or colors. 3. Each controller shall be connected to a light sensor allowing each LED display to automatically adjust brightness according to display direction and lighting conditions. 4. The controller shall allow connection to a temperature sensor that provides accurate site temperatures. LED MESSAGE CENTER 10 14 80-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 5. Active presentations, stored presentations, schedules, display configuration, time and date shall be stored in non-volatile memory. No external power or battery backup will be required to maintain this data. C. Control and Communications 1. The display controller should be DHCP-enabled and allow for static IP addressing. 2. Each single-face display shall be controlled and monitored by its own LED controller. 3. The LED controller shall be able to receive instructions from and provide information by accessing the Venus Control Suite using the following communication modes as selected by Owner from the list below: a. Ethernet Fiber Optic b. Ethernet Bridge Radio C. Ethernet Cats Wire d. Ethernet Cellular Modem 2.5 CONTROL SOFTWARE A. Control Software: Display content and scheduling shall be via Venus Control Suite (VCS) cloud- based solution. Software to be hosted on manufacturer's servers at no cost to the customer. Web browser access to the solution to support iOS Safari, Android Chrome, Internet Explorer v11+, Microsoft Edge, Google Chrome and Mozilla Firefox. B. Basic content creation to be performed via browser-based online editor. C. Expanded content creation tools available via PC-compatible Content Studio download. D. Supports import of images (PNG, BMP, GIF,JPG, PSD) and video files (AVI, MPG, MP4, MOV) in both browser-based and downloadable content utilities. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Mounting structure to be installed by contractor to support desired displays in all locations. Verify that separate conduit is in place for power and data to display, unless fiber is being used. Verify that all control equipment has access to 120 VAC. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Support structure design depends on the mounting methods, display size, and weight. The structure design is critical and should be done only by a qualified individual. It is the customer's responsibility to ensure that the structure and mounting hardware are adequate. B. It is the customer's responsibility to ensure that the installation meet local standards. The mounting hardware shall be capable of supporting all components to be mounted. C. All mounted displays must be inspected by a qualified structural engineer. LED MESSAGE CENTER 10 14 80-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 D. Possible power and signal entrances are designated by etched markings.Separate conduit must be used to route the power, signal in wires, and signal out wires. E. Displays must be grounded according to the provisions outlined in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code.The display must be connected to earth-ground. Proper grounding is necessary for reliable equipment operation and protects the equipment from damaging electrical disturbances and lightning. END OF SECTION 10 14 80 LED MESSAGE CENTER 10 14 80-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 10 7113 - EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work in this section shall include the design,fabrication,and installation of aluminum pre-finished open-frame structures as shown in drawings and as specified. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 41 19 Windstorm Construction Requirements B. Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.3 REFERENCES A. 2021 International Building Code. B. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. ASCE 7-16- Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. D. AAMA 2604-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High- Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. E. Aluminum Design Manual 2015. F. ASTM B 209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. G. ASTM B 221, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. H. ANSI/AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code—Aluminum. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. SEQUENCING 1. Ensure that product selections such as sizing, attachment conditions, and finishes are supplied to the manufacturer so as not to delay the release to fabricate. 2. Ensure that site-specific engineering and code requirements are provided to the manufacturer before the engineering services scope begins. 3. Ensure that footing plans and other information required for installation of products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress. 4. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress. EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 13- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 5. Ensure that work surrounding the installation location is substantially complete to prevent interruption of installation of the products in this section. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01-General Requirements B. Action Submittals 1. Specification Sheets: Indicate the basis of design, product sizing, and options selections 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, locations of members, connections, general construction details, anchorages, method of anchorage, and installation method. 3. Samples: Submit material and color selection samples. 4. Delegated Design Submittals: Submit engineered shop drawings signed and stamped by a licensed professional engineer employed by the Manufacturer licensed in the project location. C. Informational Submittals 1. Product Cut Sheets 2. Manufacturer's Warranty 3. Product Finish Color Chart 4. Installation Guide D. Closeout Submittals 1. Operation and Maintenance Information 2. Manufacturer's Warranty 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Manufacturer: Single source manufacturer for design, engineering, fabrication, and shipping with a minimum of 15 years of experience fabricating aluminum structures. 2. Installers: Familiar with the manufacturer's structures and installation techniques. 3. Licensed Professionals: Professional Engineer to be licensed in the project state. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Upon receipt, all packages and pallets shall be opened and inspected for damage. Any missing or damaged components must be noted on the delivery receipt with the carrier before accepting the shipment. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: Upon completion of the inspection, all items shall be repackaged and stored where protected from moisture, dirt, and excessive heat. Do not wrap EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 13-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 material so that heat or moisture can become trapped. Ensure that items are level and fully supported and have airflow between parts. Handle materials to protect materials, coatings, and finishes during transportation and installation to prevent damage or staining. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Aluminum Structures 10-Year Limited Commercial Warranty. B. Aluminum Structures Lifetime Limited Residential Warranty. C. Powder Coat Finish 10-Year Warranty. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Basis of Design: Trex Pergola Shadow aluminum structure as indicated on architectural drawings. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Structureworks,the exclusive manufacturer of Trex Pergola; 3300 Dill Smith Drive Fredericksburg, VA 22408; 877-489-8064, info@structureworks.com, www.structureworks.com 2.3 PERFORMANCE DESIGN/CRITERIA A. Design structure, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structure shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, specific to the project location and code requirements, without permanent deformation of canopy components or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. C. Design members to withstand wind loads in accordance with ASCE 7-16 and applicable code. D. Design foundations in accordance with applicable code for the specific structure and site conditions. E. Design structure for required windstorm resistance in accordance with Section 01 41 19 Windstorm Construction Requirements. F. Design structure in accordance with applicable fire code and provide data on ASTM E84 testing. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Components: Extruded aluminum ASTM B221, 6000 series alloy B. Aluminum Sheet:ASTM B209, 5000 or 6000 series alloy C. Fasteners: 300 or 400 series stainless steel EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 13-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Columns: 6"x 6" by length required. B. Beams: 6" wide by depth and length required. C. Rafters: Size as required. D. Shade Panels: Sized to fit modular canopy size. Pattern T08—Valencia, 20%open. E. Column Base Plate Cover:As required for column and base plate size. 2.5 FINISHES A. Apply powder coating to shade structure components in accordance with AAMA 2604. B. Specify color:As selected from Manufacturer's standard colors. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. All wiring shall be concealed unless otherwise noted. B. Electrical convenience outlets shall be provided as indicated on electrical drawings. C. Lights shall be provided as indicated on electrical drawings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Only begin installation once supporting structures have been properly prepared. B. Verify that all concrete, masonry, and roofing work in the vicinity is complete and cleaned. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install all products true to line, level, and plumb and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation guide. B. For commercial installations within the continental US, Lion Hopper Specialties is the authorized installer. 3300B Dill Smith Drive Fredericksburg, VA 22408; 855-855-6884, info@lionhopper.com, www.lionhopper.com 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean all surfaces and restore any marred surfaces to their original condition as approved by the Architect. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of the project. EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 13-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Touchup, repair, or replace damaged products before substantial completion. END OF SECTION 10 7113 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 13-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 26 00 10 -SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials,equipment,tools and services in connection with,or properly incidental to the furnishing of equipment, installing equipment and the construction of electrical systems as described in this Division of the Specifications and/or shown on the accompanying Drawings, or reasonably implied there from, except as hereinafter specifically excluded. B. Furnish all additional details or special construction as required for work indicated or specified in the division or work specified in other divisions. Furnish and install all material and equipment usually furnished with systems or required to complete and make operative the installation, whether specifically mentioned or not. C. Owner-furnished equipment shall be installed and connected in accordance with manufacturer requirements. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. The Electrical Drawings are a combination of scale and symbolic representation of the electrical systems required to be installed.The drawings and specifications are based on qualified skilled craftsmen procuring and installing the work. The drawings include symbolic indication of branch circuit conductors, connections to devices, hook-up of electric powered equipment, etc. B. Division 26 Work includes proper routing of raceways, grouping of conductors, wiring to and hook-up of devices and equipment in accord with the total provisions of the specifications. Refer to the symbol schedule for the basis of the drawing representation. Symbols other than those in the schedule are explained elsewhere or are those commonly used in the industry. Listing of a symbol in the schedule does not imply that the symbol is used on the final contract documents. The electrical drawings indicate general locations of devices and equipment, but final locations shall be determined in reference to the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. C. The Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications including all Supplements issued thereto, are a part of these Specifications and the accompanying Electrical Drawings, and shall be complied with in every respect. 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 10- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1.3 REGULATIONS, PERMITS AND APPROVALS A. The installation including all materials and equipment shall conform to the most recent NFPA 70 adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction; the applicable requirements of the utility companies supplying energy, communications and other services to the project; the laws of the City pertaining to electrical installation; and with all national, state and local codes and laws relating to construction, building and public safety. B. Each of the above regulations are minimum standards.Where the requirements of these minimum standards are less than or do not conflict with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contract Documents shall be followed. C. Obtain all permits and arrange for all inspections and approvals for the work including construction document review and site observations by the authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain certificates of inspection and acceptance and transmit these to the Architect as a condition of acceptance. Assume and pay all fees and other costs involved in obtaining the permits, inspection certificates and approvals as a part of Division 26 Work. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND OTHER SUBMITTAL A. Submit Shop Drawings or fully descriptive catalog data for all items of materials and equipment proposed to be furnished and/or installed.Submit sufficient copies to provide reviewed copies as need to be returned plus three (3) copies for retention by the Architect per Section 0130 00-Submittal Procedures. B. Submit on all Electrical Distribution Equipment, wiring materials, lighting fixtures and all components of communication, signal, protection and alarm systems. The submittal of free standing electrical equipment shall include scale drawings indicating the proposed layout of this equipment within the space allocated and the proximity of existing work, other electrical work, and work installed under other divisions of work. C. Submit sufficiently early to allow ample time for checking without delaying delivery of the materials to job site. A review of any submittal which results in a requirement to resubmit shall not be justified basis of work delay or extra cost. D. The review of Shop Drawings or catalog data by the Architect shall not negate the Contractor's responsibility for deviations from the Drawings and Specifications unless, in writing, attention is specifically noted for such deviations at the time of submission and acceptance of the Architect is noted thereon.When attention is called to deviations from the Drawings and Specifications, state in letter of transmittal whether or not such deviations involve any change in contract time and cost. Errors of any kind associated with submittal shall be the responsibility of the installer of Division 26 Work. 1.5 STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL MATERIALS A. Materials shall be new and free from defects and shall conform with the standards of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., in every case where such standards have been SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 10-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 established. Evidence of such conformance shall be the UL label or "listing" by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. under Re-examination Service. B. The Specifications indicate a standard of quality for materials. Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers are used to designate materials or equipment to establish grade and quality.Where several manufacturers are named,the bid shall be based on those named manufacturer's products. Where only one manufacturer is named, unless stated otherwise, manufacturers of equal quality products will, however, be considered as substitutions only if submitted at least 5 days before the bid date. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS A. In the event substitutions are to be submitted for Owner review, furnish descriptive catalog material,test data,samples,etc.,of both the specified material and the proposed substitute, as well as any other pertinent data necessary to demonstrate that the proposed substitutions are acceptable equals to the specified products.Substitutions:01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Substitutions shall not be made without written acceptance and the lack of acceptance shall not be basis of change in the work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINTS AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. For exposed hangers and supports: not provided with factory protected finish:Sherwin- Williams Kromik primer and Metalatex semi-gloss enamel. B. Materials and Equipment: Sherwin-Williams Kromik primer and Metalatex semi-gloss enamel. 2.2 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates shall be laminate plastic name plates with one-fourth inch (1/4") high letters engraved thereon which give contract identification, electric service characteristics and source of power on each of the items of equipment. Nameplates for items of equipment, on Life Safety System including transfer switches shall be red with white letters and all others shall be black with white letters unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Name plates shall be fastened on with cadmium or plated screws. SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 10-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION OF SITE A. Visit the site of the proposed work and carefully examine the existing conditions and limitations thereof and include in the bid all costs of any kind whatsoever which are incurred through limitations of the existing conditions. 3.2 SERVICE,CONNECTIONS AND PERMITS A. Obtain all permits, inspections and approvals for the work including construction document review and site observations by the authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain certificates of inspection and acceptance and transmit these to the Architect as a condition of acceptance. All fees and other costs involved in obtaining these permits, inspections and approvals shall be assumed and paid under the Division of the Work. B. Arrange for all services and pay all costs whatsoever to completely install and place in operation these electrical systems. 3.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with that of other trades and adjacent projects to make proper connections at appropriate locations and times. Review the construction of other trades and adjacent projects to determine the physical needs and time requirements imposed in providing connections to them as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the project schedule. B. Coordinate work with that of the other trades so work may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner without hindering or handicapping the other trades. Give precedence to lines which require a stated grade for proper operation. Where space requirements conflict, the electric conduit shall, in general, yield to all other trades. C. When any electrical equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the project,the equipment may be operated providing that prior approval of the Owner is received and proper supervision of the equipment operation performed. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner. Regardless of whether the equipment has or has not been operated, properly maintain the equipment; and at the completion of the work, properly clean, adjust, and complete all items before final acceptance is requested. D. The Architect or others may, during the execution of the work, desire to make connections to or modifications of work installed in this Division of Work. Permission for the Architector others to make these connections or modifications shall be granted without relieving responsibility for work installed under this Division of Work. SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 10-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 3.4 RECORD DRAWINGS AND BROCHURES A. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of reproducible drawings upon which all dimensional locations of equipment, deviations and changes in the work shall be recorded. These Record Drawings shall be in good condition and shall be marked "Record Drawings", signed, dated and transmitted with two sets of prints under a transmittal letter to the Architect upon completion and acceptance of the work and before final payment is made. Refer to Section 01 78 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. B. Unless otherwise noted, provide at a minimum the following data as applicable to the work shall be included in items furnished for use by the Owner: 1. Record Drawings as specified above and elsewhere. 2. Four (4) brochures of lighting fixtures with copies of data of each installed luminaire. Index each brochure indicating fixture type, manufacturer and catalog number,voltage, and lamping. 3. Four (4) brochures of Electrical Distribution Equipment with final drawings, operating instructions and maintenance instructions. 4. Four(4) brochures each for communication, signal protection and alarm systems installed with final installation and connection diagrams; and equipment operating,test and maintenance instructions. 3.5 CARE AND CLEAN UP OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Protect each item and component of electrical equipment from moisture, concrete, mortar, paint, dust and other foreign materials from the time it arrives on the job site until installed, placed in service and accepted by Owner, using signs, barriers and other means whereby others are made fully aware of the importance of protecting equipment from damage. B. Keep all electrical construction materials clean of all foreign materials from the time of arrival on the site until their installation. Time the installation of each item to avoid unnecessary exposure of the materials to destructive elements or destructive environment. Clean all installed materials of all foreign materials including concrete, mortar,spilled paint, and dust prior to final inspection.All unused electrical construction materials shall be removed from the site. C. After the installation is complete and before equipment is energized, thoroughly clean the interior and exterior of all equipment and materials. After the building is completed and cleaned, arrange for a power outage on each item of equipment and repeat the cleaning. This cleaning shall be performed just before final inspection. Each component shall be cleaned with air pressure, vacuumed and wiped clean of all dust and other foreign material. Components shall be cleaned of all oxidation. Any portion needing touch-up finishing and/or protective coating shall be so finished to equal the specified finish on the product. SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 10-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 D. Provide for the removal of all unused, scrap, material containers and other rubbish or trash resulting from Division 26 Work from within and around all work and work areas on a basis that it will not interfere with other trades,other work or the completion of any work. 3.6 PAINTING AND PROTECTION A. Electrical equipment such as primary switches, switchboards, panelboard fronts, motor control centers and transformers shall be delivered to thejob with suitable factory finish. Finishes marred in transit or during installation shall be refinished under this Division of Work to present a neat, workmanlike appearance equal to the factory finish. B. Except as elsewhere required, painting of equipment, boxes, conduit, etc., furnished under this Contract will be performed under another division of work. Clean electrical work of all trash, dirt, marks, and other foreign materials under this Division of Work prior to the application of finishes. C. Electric work in areas of the construction to remain unpainted shall be protective finished under this Division of Work as follows unless indicated otherwise: 1. Paint all exposed and non-rust inhibited hangers and supports not provided with a factory finish with primer and two (2) coats of enamel. 2. Material and equipment with suitable factory-applied finishes may be left unpainted provided the Architects' approval to do so is obtained. Prime and paint material and equipment that does not obtain such approval with two (2) coats of semi-gloss enamel. D. Painting in finished areas of the construction where finished coatings are applied under other divisions of work shall be performed under other Division of Work and shall include: 1. All exposed hangers and supports and all exposed conduits and boxes with a coat of primer,and two(2)coats of semi-gloss enamel and all panel boards and other cabinets with two (2) coats of semi-gloss enamel. 2. Concrete foundations with one (1) coat of masonry paint and one (1) coat of enamel. 3. Equipment with suitable factory-applied finishes left unpainted provided Architect approval is obtained prior to beginning of painting in the area. Material and equipment that does not obtain such approval shall be primed and painted two (2) coats of enamel. E. Painting done shall be in colors designated by the Architect. Successive coats of paint shall be of different shades. SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 10-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Do all cutting necessary for the installation of Division 26 Work. Cutting shall be carefully and neatly done so as not to damage or cut away more than necessary. B. Where Division 26 workmen damage or cut away work excessively, patching will be performed as a part of Division 26 Work. Patching will be by craftsman experienced in performing this type of work. 3.8 NAMEPLATES A. Install nameplates which give contract drawing identification and electric service characteristics on equipment unless specifically indicated otherwise including switch gear, switch boards, transformers, panel boards, and main control cabinets for alarm systems.Typed directories shall be provided for branch panel boards. B. In each case where compartments, equipment, etc., are required to be "labeled" or "identified", it shall be construed that nameplates are to be installed. C. Locate nameplates on the exterior face of the equipment so as to be clearly visible when the equipment is in place. D. Fasten nameplates on with screws except contact-type permanent adhesive shall be used where screws cannot or should not penetrate enclosure or substrate. 3.9 TESTS A. On completion of the work, make voltage, resistance and ground tests of all wiring installed under this Contract. B. Such tests shall show results in accordance with the requirements of the Code. See specific items for other specific test requirements. C. Any defect found shall be repaired under this Contract to the satisfaction of the Architect. 3.10 GUARANTEE A. Warranty all work done and all materials and equipment furnished to be free from defects. B. Promptly repair or replace defective work, material and equipment without charge to the Owner at a schedule suitable to the Owner. C. The warranty shall be for a period of one year after acceptance for beneficial use by the Owner unless otherwise indicated elsewhere. END OF SECTION 26 00 10 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 10-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 26 0190—SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The purpose of this section is to specify Division 26 responsibilities in the startup process as directed by the Engineer. B. Startup requires the participation of Division 23 and 26 to ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. C. Division 26 shall be familiar with the plan and shall execute all responsibilities assigned in the Contract Documents. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Electrical Contractors.The responsibilities applicable to the electrical contractor(s)of Division 26 are as follow: Construction and Acceptance Phases 1. Include the cost of startup in the proposal. 2. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, documentation, O&M data and training. 3. Attend a scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate the process. 4. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual submittals, to the Engineer for development of start-up and functional testing procedures. 5. Provide a copy of the O&M Manuals and submittals of electrical equipment, through normal channels, to the Engineer for review and approval. 6. Contractors or their Subs shall assist (along with the Design Engineers) in clarifying the operation and control of equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures. B. The contractors and Subs shall review test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety and equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during the tests. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP 26 09 96- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Develop a Functional Performance Test (FPT) using manufacturer's start-up procedures. Submit manufacturer's detailed start-up procedures and the full start-up plan and procedures and other requested equipment documentation to Engineer for review. 2. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute and document the electrical- related portions of the pre-functional checklists provided by the Engineer for all equipment. 3. Perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational checkout procedures and provide a copy to the Engineer. 4. Address current A/E punchlist and deficiency list items, prior to start of the functional testing. 5. Provide skilled or factory-trained technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the FPT,as required by the Engineer. Ensure that skilled technicians are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving. 6. Provide skilled technicians to perform or assist with FPT under the direction of the Engineer for specified equipment.Assist the Engineer in interpreting the monitoring data, as necessary. 7. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as interpreted by the Engineer and retest the equipment. 8. Prepare O&M Manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions. 9. During construction, maintain as-built red-line drawings for all drawings and provide final as-built documentation to the Owner per the Contract Closeout Section in the Contract Documents. 10. Provide training of the Owner's operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as specified. 11. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty. C. Warranty Period 1. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M Manuals and as- built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP 26 09 96-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Division 26 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this Division. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Division 26 shall provide submittal documentation relative to startup as required in this Section. 3.2 STARTUP A. Equipment startup shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer's approved procedures.The electrical contractors shall follow the startup and initial checkout procedures listed in this Section. The procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift it partially to the Engineer or Owner. 3.3 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing may proceed prior to the completion of systems, or sub-systems at the discretion of the Engineer. Beginning system testing before full completion does not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system, including all pre-functional checklists as soon as possible. B. The Engineer shall develop the test procedures and direct the execution of the functional testing procedures with assistance from the contractors. C. The functional testing procedures shall be reviewed and approved by the design team, the contractors, and the Owner prior to execution. D. The functional testing procedures shall not alleviate the contractors' responsibility to verify system operation and functionality. 3.4 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE(O&M) MANUALS A. The following O&M Manual requirements do not replace the 0&M Manual documentation requirements elsewhere in these specifications. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP 26 09 96-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S B. The Engineer shall receive a copy of the O&M Manuals for review. C. Review and Approvals. Review of the startup sections of the O&M Manuals shall be made by the Engineer. Refer to the Contract Documents for details. 3.5 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. The Contractor shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately to ensure that training is completed. B. The Engineer shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of the training of Owner personnel for equipment. C. Electrical Contractor. The electrical contractor and his sub-contractors shall have the following training responsibilities: 1. Provide the Engineer with a training plan two weeks before the planned training. 2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each major piece of electrical equipment or system including, but not limited to lighting control, fire alarm, and switchgear. 3. Training shall start with classroom sessions, if necessary, followed by hands-on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including startup, shutdown,fire/smoke alarm, power failure,etc. 4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M Manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated. 5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment.This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer's representative. Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment is required. More than one party may be required to execute thetraining. 6. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the O&M Manual and illustrate,whenever possible,the use of the O&M Manuals for reference. 7. Training shall include: a. Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included in the O&M Manuals. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP 26 09 96-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 b. A review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions.The training shall include start-up,operation in all modes possible,shut-down, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures. c. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns. d. Discussion of warranties and guarantees. e. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions. f. Explanatory information included in the O&M Manuals and the location of all plans and manuals in the facility. g. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation oroperation. h. Classroom sessions shall include the use of overhead projections, slides,video and audio taped material as might be appropriate. 8. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual, shutdown and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all pieces of equipment. 9. The electrical contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation,function and overrides of any local packaged controls, not controlled by the central control system. 10. Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. 11. Duration of Training.The electrical contractor shall provide training on each piece of equipment according to the following schedule: System Hours Lighting Controls 4 Fire Alarm 2 Switchgear 2 3.6 WRITTEN WORK A. Written work products of contractors will consist of the startup and initial checkout plan and the filled-out startup, initial checkout and pre-functional checklists. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP 26 09 96-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 26 14 00—WIRING DEVICES 1. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. 2. Test GFCI operation with local fault simulations. LOCATION DEVICE STATUS REMARKS ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP 26 09 96-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 26 17 00—DISCONNECT SWITCHES 1. Verify label. 2. Verify voltage and ampacity. 3. Verify enclosure rating. 4. Verify grounding. LOCATION LABEL VOLTAGE AMPACITY ENCLOSURE GROUNDS STATUS REMARKS ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP 26 09 96-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 26 46 00/26 76 10—TRANSFORMERS 1. Verify label. 2. Verify voltage and kVA rating. 3. Verify grounding. 4. Verify mounting. LOCATION LABEL VOLTAGE kVA GROUNDS MOUNTING STATUS REMARKS ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP 26 09 96-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 26 47 10—PANELBOARDS 1. Verify label. 2. Circuit Directory: Type directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. 3. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 4. Verify voltage and ampacity. 5. Verify TVSS. LOCATION PANEL VOLTAGE MAIN LABELS STATUS REMARKS AMPACITY ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP 26 09 96-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 26 50 10—INTERIOR LIGHTING I. Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits have been energized with normal power source. 2. Verify operation of exit and emergency fixtures. 3. Verify operation of Lighting Control System. LOCATION FIXTURES SWITCHES LIGHT LEVEL STATUS REMARKS ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP 26 09 96-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 26 50 10—EXTERIOR LIGHTING I. Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing fixtures and energizing circuits with normal power source. Include the following: a. Photometric Tests: Measure light intensities at night at locations where specific illumination performance is indicated. Use photometrics with calibration referenced to National Institute of Standards and Technology(NIST) standards. b. Check for intensity of illumination. c. Check for uniformity of illumination. 2. Verify operation and time clock/contractors. LOCATION FIXTURES TIMECLOCK STATUS REMARKS CHANNEL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP 26 09 96-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 26 72 00—FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 1. Verify FACP operation. 2. Verify alarm horns/strobes. 3. Verify HVAC shutdown. LOCATION DEVICE OPERATIONAL STATUS REMARKS ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP 26 09 96-12 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 26 76 80—CENTRAL INTERCOM SYSTEM I. Verify two-way operation. 2. Verify all-call operation. 3. Verify Master Clock operation. 4. Verify Bells operation. LOCATION DEVICE OPERATIONAL STATUS REMARKS The Contractor shall complete these forms as indicated above. Include a copy of these forms in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. END OF SECTION 26 09 96 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP 26 09 96-13 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 26 01 11—CONDUIT AND FITTINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnishing and installation of complete systems of electrical conduits as part of the raceway systems for installation of conductors for electrical systems. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. See Section 26 0190 for Supporting Devices. C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. D. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete manufacturers'specifications data on each type and manufacture of conduit and fitting proposed to be furnished and/or installed on the project. See Section 01 30 00 - Submittal Procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conduits shall be in accord with ANSI Standard C80. B. Each length of conduit shall bear the UL Label. See Section 0160 00—Product Requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RIGID METALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Rigid metallic conduit shall be standard hot-dipped galvanized mild rigid steel. Conduit shall have galvanized threads. Each length shall be provided with a coupling and ends without couplings shall be furnished protected with a suitable covering.All bends in conduit one and CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 26 01 11- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S one-quarter inch (1-1/4") in size and larger shall be made with factory manufactured elbows. Rigid metallic conduit shall be equal to Republic Galvite Rigid Steel Conduit. B. Locknuts and bushing shall be galvanized steel or approved equal molded canvas bakelite bushings may be used for 2" trade size. Bakelite insulated, lined steel bushings may be used for conduits two and one-half inches (2-1/2") and larger. 2.2 ELECTRICAL METAL TUBING AND FITTINGS A. Electrical metallic tubing shall be standard galvanized. B. Couplings and connectors for EMT shall be steel compression type with steel gland nuts. Connectors shall be insulated throat type. Cast metal, set screw or indentor fittings are prohibited. 2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Flexible metal conduit shall be spirally wound galvanized steel. B. Terminators of flexible steel conduit shall be T& B or equal "Tite-Bite" insulated connectors and T& B or equal, "Tite-Bite" combination couplings. 2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be light gray color. B. Terminators shall be insulated throat screw-in ground cone connectors. 2.5 SPECIAL FITTINGS A. Split couplings shall be O.Z. or equal, Manufacturing Company Type SP. B. Expansion joints shall be O.Z.or equal, Manufacturing Company Type AX expansion joints with type AJ bonding jumpers. C. Pull rope shall be 3/16" polyester stranded JET LINE rope. 2.6 RIGID PVC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Codes and standards shall conform with U.L.-651 and NEMA TC-2 and shall be listed and labeled by the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 26 01 11-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. PVC conduit and fittings shall be Schedule 40 unless marked Schedule 80, equal to Carlon systems. They shall be designed for use under ground, shall be non-conductive and shall assure a safe system. Conduits and fittings shall be non-corrosive, impervious to most chemicals, provide lower expansion and contraction features, and shall be suitable for direct earth burial or encasement in concrete. PVC conduit and fittings shall be rated for 90 degree centigrade conductors or cable, and for use in direct sunlight. 2.7 RIGID PVC FITTINGS A. Codes applicable to PVC conduit shall also apply to PVC fittings. 1. Expansion couplings equal to Carbon E945 or E955 as required. 2. Bell ends equal to Plus 80 or 40 plain bell for use with non-metallic solvent welds. 3. Standard couplings socket type for solvent cement attachment. 4. PVC rigid adaptors E942 or E943 threaded to metallic systems and socket attachment by solvent cement. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 MATERIAL SELECTION A. Raceways shall be standard galvanized steel rigid metal conduit unless otherwise indicated. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) may be used for raceways above furred ceilings, within dry wall partitions, exposed in rooms with exposed construction and in mechanical and electrical rooms for sizes of four inch (4") and smaller. C. Wiring connections to motors, transformers, or other devices which are subject to vibration or require adjustment shall be flexible metallic conduit. The flexible conduit shall be more than 12 diameters but less than 18 diameters in length. Where these connections are outdoors,or in damp locations, or are connections to any kitchen or laundry type equipment, liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used. D. Wiring to each recessed lighting fixture shall be run in an independent length of flexible conduit extended from an accessible junction box located above the ceiling. The flexible conduit shall be of sufficient length to allow the connection point to the fixture to drop at least 12" below the finished ceiling, and shall be at least 48"long but not more than 72" long. E. Recessed lighting fixtures which have UL approved prewired circuitjunction boxes and fixture wire extensions may be used and wired directly to the branch circuit runs without the added flexible conduit connections. CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 26 01 11-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 F. PVC Schedule 40 conduit shall be provided underground and under building supported by approved hangers. Conduit shall not be laid on top of the ground with no supports. G. Elbows shall be of the same materials as the conduit. Elbows in EMT and small rigid conduits may be job-fabricated with a bender made specifically for the purpose. H. Conduits shall be sized as indicated on the drawings and as required to accommodate the wires to be pulled into the conduit. Conduit shall not be less than three-quarters inch (3/4") in size except EMT for branch circuit runs may be one-half inch (1/2") and three-eighths inch (3/8") flexible metallic conduit may be used for individual connections to recessed lighting fixtures. 3.2 CONDUIT A. Run conduits concealed from view in all areas except in electrical and mechanical equipment rooms. Run at levels and locations to avoid interference with the structure, finished ceilings, walls and all lines of other trades requiring grading of runs. B. Coordinate with other trades to allow available spaces to be used in the most efficient and workman like manner. In general, space and routing requirements of all other trades shall take precedence over the conduit installation. C. Route exposed conduits parallel with or at right angles to building walls and neatly rack. Carefully lay out conduit proposed to be run within the structure such as floors, beams, roof, or walls to avoid building up the density of conduits too excessive for the construction. Relocate conduits when excessive build-up occurs. D. Install conduits out of close proximity to any potentially hot device,any steam pipe, hot water pipe or other heating duct or appliance. Conduit shall not be run within three inches (3") of the exterior insulation of such device, pipe or duct, except in crossing, and such crossing shall be at least one inch (1")from the cover of the device, pipe or duct crossed. E. Place conduits through the roof or exterior walls in time to allow the trade to seal around the raceways as work is installed. Conduits through roof shall run through galvanized pitch pans. F. Cover each end of each conduit with an approved capped bushing as soon as the conduit is installed to prevent entry of foreign material.Conduits shall be dry and clean before wires are pulled. G. Locate junction boxes and raceways above accessible ceilings such as lay-in ceiling to provide adequate space for recessed fluorescent fixtures of the type specified elsewhere to be installed, in any place in the ceiling without relocating the installed raceways, boxes or supports now or in the future. CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 26 01 11-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S H. Arrange conduit runs within building interiors to be no longer than 80 feet between pull or junction boxes, cabinets, or circuit interrupting device enclosures unless there is no direction change and only a straight-in-line pull of wire is involved. In such straight-in-line runs between boxes, cabinets or devices, runs not exceeding 100 feet in length may be made. I. Non-Metallic conduit installed outdoors under concrete slabs or walkways shall have 24 inches cover and may be in contact with the earth. Conduit service laterals installed under driveways, or roadways shall be encased in reinforced concrete. Support runs on PVC spacers 5'-0" center-to-center and encase in reinforced concrete duct banks. Reinforcing shall be#4 deformed longitudinal bars, one each corner, with #3 stirrups tied at V- 0" reinforcing concrete shall cover bar minimum 2 inches around each corner face. Non-metallic conduit installed indoors under slabs shall have 12 inches cover. Non- Metallic conduit installed in crawl spaces shall be supported by approved hangers. 3.3 FITTINGS A. Install double locknuts and a bushing at each rigid conduit termination except for terminations into threaded hubs. B. Wherever standard threaded couplings cannot be used, split couplings may be used. C. Provide expansion joints in conduits at all building expansion joints and wherever else the length of run requires. D. Provide expansion joints on all underground conduit where it rises above grade. Expansion joint shall be same material as underground conduit. E. Coat all threaded connections subject to moisture or underground with cold galvanizing before making connection up. 3.4 PULL ROPE A. Install a pull rope with each end properly marked for use and termination of the other end in each conduit installed and in which no conductors are installed under this Division of Work. END OF SECTION 26 0111 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 26 01 11-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 26 0120—WIRE AND CABLE—600 VOLTS AND UNDER PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install electrical wires and cables for the distribution of electric power, controls, grounding and signals for the electrical systems. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete manufacturers' specification data on each type of conductor to be supplied to the job. B. Included proposed colors, color markings and other identification as a part of the submittal. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical conductors shall be UL listed and bear the UL label. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Wires and cables shall have conductors of soft-drawn annealed copper having a conductivity of not less than 98% of that of pure copper. B. Where not specifically indicated otherwise,wire and cable insulation type shall be as follows: 1. For general use-Type THHN or THWN, 600 volt. 2. For branch circuits of No. 12 and No. 10 AWG -Type THHN, 600 volt. 3. For control wiring-Type THHN 600 volts, No. 14 AWG minimum size. C. Wiring run underground -Type THHN/THWN, or XHHW 600 Volt. WIRE AND CABLING—600 VOLTS AND UNDER 26 01 20- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1. For fixture wiring-Type AF, 300 volts, No. 14 AWG minimum size. 2. For branch circuit wiring run in fluorescent fixture channels -Type THHN, 600 volts, No. 12 AWG minimum size. 3. See other sections of work for alarm communications and other low-energy systems wiring. 4. All communication, and low voltage control wire run in plenum above ceilings and not protected by conduit shall be teflon coated plenum cable as required bycode. 5. Service and/or feeder wiring to panelboards may be XHHW at the Contractors option. D. Wire shall be solid for No. 10 and smaller and stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. E. All wire and cable shall be factory-color coded.Colors for each phase and neutral shall be used consistently throughout each system.The following color codes shall be used and maintained throughout the system: 120/208V, 277/480V, OR 120/240V SYSTEMS. Phase A Black Orange Phase B Red Brown Phase C Blue Purple Neutral White Gray Ground Green Green Isolated Ground Green w/Tracer Green w/Tracer Switch Legs Yellow On wires No. 6 and larger and where factory color is not available, wires and cables shall be color-coded by a one inch (1") wide band of colored Scotch tape on ends of each conductor, or by coating a 3" band at the end of the cable and in each pull box with brilliant waterproof lacquer. 2.2 TERMINATIONS,SPLICES,AND TAPS A. Cable terminations, splices and taps for copper conductors shall be: 1. For Terminations-O. Z. Manufacturing Company or equal,Type XLH. WIRE AND CABLING—600 VOLTS AND UNDER 26 01 20-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2. Splices and Taps - O. Z. Manufacturing Company or equal, clamp-type solderless connectors except splices and taps for No. 8 AWG and smaller conductors may be Scotchlock Spring Connectors, Buchanan "B" cap, Ideal Wing Nuts or T & B "Piggy" connectors. 2.3 SUPPORTS A. Supports for wiring in cabinets, panels, pull boxes,wireway, and junction boxes shall be cable clamps and cable ties. B. Supports in vertical feeders shall be two-piece conduit type. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR SELECTION A. The minimum size of wire shall be No. 12 AWG except as noted otherwise on the Drawings or specified herein. All branch circuit home runs over 100 feet from panel, measured along the length of the raceway, shall be wired with No. 10 AWG minimum. B. The Drawings and Schedules generally indicate the number of wires in a conduit. Provide the proper number of wires in each conduit to complete the entire electrical system. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Route each conductor through an approved Electrical Raceway. Pull conductors into conduit only after all conduits and outlet boxes are permanently in place. Pull wires or strings shall be inserted only after the raceway installation is complete. B. Run feeders and mains continuously without splice from line to load terminals and identify phases in each pull box and in the clutters of each switchboard and panelboard in which they connect. Splices in feeders may be made only where designated on the Drawings or where specific prior approval is given. C. Neatly train, control and circuit wiring in cabinets, panels, pull boxes,wireways, and junction boxes and tie with T& B Ty-Rap nylon cable ties. Clamp or fasten control or circuit cabling in cabinets or other equipment with non-metallic nylon T&T Ty-Rap cable clamps and mounting brackets. D. Install cable supports per N.E.C. in all vertical feeders and in boxes provided for the feeders where not terminated in electrical panels or equipment within code distances. Supports shall be of the two-piece conduit type, which clamp each individual conductor firmly and tightens due to weight of cable. WIRE AND CABLING—600 VOLTS AND UNDER 26 01 20-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.3 TERMINATIONS,SPLICES,AND TAPS A. Connections of conductors to terminals shall be made by pressure connections. Solderjoints will be permitted only for low voltage controls. Joints and splices shall be made with clamp type solderless connectors and insulated with rubber and friction tape or Scotch No.33 plastic tape. Spring connectors may be used for splicing No. 8 AWG or smaller conductors. 3.4 SUPPORTS A. Install supports to hold conductors in place in each panelboard,cabinet, pull box,junction box and wire-way. B. Install cable supports in vertical runs of conductors in cabinets and pull boxes. END OF SECTION 26 0120 WIRE AND CABLING—600 VOLTS AND UNDER 26 01 20-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 26 01 31—JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install junction and pull boxes where indicated or where necessary for installation of the wiring systems. B. Secure prior approval of the Architects for locations of all boxes not specifically located on the drawings. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. See Section 26 0190 for Supporting Devices. C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. D. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted on each specifically fabricated junction or pull box. Section 0130 00—Submittal Procedures. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Junction and pull boxes shall be flush or surface type as indicated on the drawings or as required to fit into the building construction.Junction and pull boxes shall have screw covers. Small junction boxes, 100 cubic inches and smaller, for control or branch circuit wiring, shall be as specified for outlet boxes and with blank covers. B. Junction and pull boxes installed in walls and ceiling spaces shall be code-gauge galvanized steel with galvanized steel covers. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 26 01 31- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S C. Junction and pull boxes installed in floors shall be galvanized malleable cast iron with gasketed covers. D. Junction and pull boxes installed outdoors shall be weatherproof with watertight gasketed covers fastened with corrosion resistant screws. E. Except as otherwise indicated, boxes shall be not less than code requirements. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 MATERIAL SELECTION A. Install junction and pull boxes in a neat workmanlike manner and support in accord with the provisions set forth elsewhere for panelboards and for hangers and supports. B. Arrange for raceways to enter boxes only in places specifically planned for raceways in the sizing and construction of the cabinets. C. Provide auxiliary conductor supports in large boxes per NEC 370-18 where conductors must be supported. 3.2 LABELING A. Conductors passing through the boxes shall be marked as to phase. END OF SECTION 26 0131 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 26 01 31-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 26 0134—OUTLET BOXES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install suitable outlet boxes for lighting fixtures, devices, empty raceway devices, small junction boxes, and other locations as required by the installation. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specification data on each type of box and trim to be furnished to the job. Section 0130 00—Submittal Procedures. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Outlet boxes except where otherwise specifically indicated or required, shall be of one-piece or welded assembly construction. Outlet boxes shall be with covers of the same manufacture as the box and selected to meet the conditions of the installation. B. Outlet boxes shall be equal to the following Appleton types, unless noted otherwise. Where more conduits enter the boxes,structural conditions interfere,or wiring requires more space, larger boxes of similar construction shall be used. Multi-gang boxes for switches of different voltages shall be provided with interior barriers. 1. In dry walls for single and two-gang outlets,Type 4S and 4SD with No.846 and 847 covers not more than 1" high and boxes specified for masonry for 3 or more gangs.Where boxes serve one wiring device a single gang handy box may be used. OUTLET BOXES 26 01 34- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 2. In concrete block or similar masonry walls, No. M1-250, M2-250 or M3-250 for 1, 2 and 3 gang outlets in 4" thick walls, No. M1-350 for 1, 2 and 3 gang outlets in thicker walls and the same series for more gangs in common boxes in similar walls. 3. In poured concrete, plaster and similar masonry walls, No.4S and 4SD boxes with No. 846 covers for single gang outlets, No. 2G-5075 boxes with No. 2GC-75 covers for 2 gang outlets and corresponding G-5075 boxes and G C-75 covers for 3,4, 5 and 6 gang outlets. Covers shall be maximum of 1"high. 4. In concrete ceilings,Type O C R boxes and O C P covers. 5. In other ceilings, Type 4/0 and 4/01D boxes. Outlet boxes for surface or pendant lighting fixtures shall have 3/8" fixture studs. 6. In poured concrete floors, individual floor boxes shall be watertight,fully adjustable with threaded conduit openings, Wiremold 880CS series, cast iron box with brass 828R plate for receptacle and 829STC plate for Telcom outlets, brass carpet or tile flange as required by Architectural. Provide multiple gang boxes with multiple 1" conduit openings as required by drawings. 7. Combination floor boxes shall be cast iron floor box with two NEMA 5-20R normal ground ivory receptacle and 1" PVC conduit, two communication brackets with four RJ opening knockouts and 1 1/4" PVC conduits each, and access plate with flooring insert areas. Provide flanged plate with carpet inserts for carpeted floor areas and flangeless plates with ceramic tile inserts for ceramic tile areas. Wiremold: RFB4-CI-1/CI HT-D/CI HT-D/CI LT-4TKO/CI LT-4TI<O/S36CCTCAL (Aluminum Flanged Plate For Carpet) Wiremold: RFB4-CI-1/CI HT-D/CI HT-D/CI LT-4TKO/CI LT-4TKO/S37CCTCAL (Aluminum Flangeless Plate for Ceramic Tile) Refer to Architectural for exact location. 8. Combination boxes with Isolated Ground receptacle shall be cast iron floor box with one NEMA 5-20R normal ground ivory receptacle and 1" PVC conduit, one NEMA 5-20RIG isolated ground orange receptacle and 1" PVC conduit,two communication brackets with four RJ opening knockouts and 1 %" PVC conduits each, and access plate with flooring insert areas. Provide flanged plate with carpet inserts for carpeted floor areas and flangeless plates with ceramic tile inserts for ceramic tile areas. Wiremold: RFB4-CI-1/CI HT-D/CI HT-D/CI LT-4TKO/CI LT-4TKO/S36CCTCAL (Aluminum Flanged Plate for Carpet) OUTLET BOXES 26 01 34-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 Wiremold: RF B4-CI-1/CI HT-D/CI HT-D/CI LT-4TKO/CI LT-4TKO/S37CCTCAL (Aluminum Flangeless Plate for Ceramic Tile) Refer to Architectural for exact location. C. Exposed outlet boxes mounted in protected areas shall be solid gang switch boxes with flat covers. Boxes shall be of size and number or gang for device requirements except no box shall be smaller than 4"square. D. Outlet boxes exposed on exteriors of buildings, flush in non-waterproofed walls below grade or in wet locations shall be Type FS or FD threaded outlet cast boxes with suitable gasketed cast covers. E. Small junction boxes shall be the same as device boxes except shall be provided with blank plates. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 MATERIAL SELECTION A. Outlet boxes shall be of the standard stamped galvanized steel type except for exterior use where they shall be hot-dipped galvanized cast iron with gaskets. Boxes shall be of the proper size to accommodate the wiring and device for which they are provided. B. Ceiling outlet boxes shall generally be four inches (4") octagon, and wall outlet boxes shall switch boxes or be 4" square with covers to suit device to be mounted thereon, except that in masonry walls without applied finish, boxes shall be rectangular masonry boxes. C. Through-the-wall type boxes shall not be used. 3.2 LABELING A. Install and leave boxes in a neat,clean and workman like manner. Set plaster covers to within 1/8" of the finished surface. B. Determine exact locations of all outlets from the Architectural Scale Drawings or at the site by the Owner. Modify outlet locations from those shown on the Drawings to accommodate door swings or to fit other construction details without cost to the Owner. Set wall boxes in advance of wall construction and move where required for any outlets which are displaced during the operation of other trades without expense to the Owner. Boxes on opposite sides of a wall shall be spaced 12", except that light switch wall boxes on opposite sides of a wall shall be spaced 3". END OF SECTION 26 0134 OUTLET BOXES 26 01 34-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 26 0140—WIRING DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install wiring devices and cover plates of the type and kind as hereinafter indicated on the drawings. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete manufacturer's specification data on each wiring device proposed to be furnished to the job. Section 0130 00—Submittal Procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each wiring device shall be of design,type and configuration established by NEMA Standards for the application used. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Devices shall be Specification grade, UL and CSA certified, listed NEMA Standard,and suitable for the service required in the intended use of the device in this installation. B. Where devices manufactured by Arrow Hart, Bryant, Hubbell, P & S, Leviton, or Sierra are named, only equivalent devices by the other of these manufacturers will be acceptable. Unless otherwise indicated, devices shall be as follows: WIRING DEVICES 26 0140- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1. Wall Switches: 20 ampere, 120/277 volt AC. 2. Occupancy Sensor Switches: Dual Ultrasonic/PIR with On/Off switch. 3. Pilot Lighted Switches: 20 Ampere, 120/277 Volt AC, with red handle (glow when "on"). 4. Convenience Outlets: Duplex receptacles 20 Ampere, 125 Volts side and back wired with a pair of NEMA 5-20R Standard 3 contact grounded parallel slot contacts. 5. Convenience outlets designated as suspended from ceiling outlet boxes on flexible rubber cord:wire mesh holding grips sized to the cable with NEMA L5-20-C Locking connectors. 6. Isolated Ground receptacles "Orange" Duplex NEMA 5-20R. 3 contact Grounded parallel slot contacts. Provide matching "Orange" cover plate labeled "Isolated Ground". 7. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Convenience Outlets: side wired 120 Volt with appropriate wall plate. 8. Weatherproof convenience outlets: WP cover, stainless steel hinge pins, springs and screws with code compliant cast aluminum gasketed cover. 9. Special equipment outlets shall be furnished and installed to match the connecting plugs as provided by the Owner for Owner-furnished equipment. 10. Special 20 Ampere, 250 Volt outlets: NEMA 6-20R. 11. Manual Motor Starters Square D Class 2510 with overload heater sized to the motor nameplate rating. 12. Photocopy Machine: NEMA 5-20R, 3 contact grounded parallel slot contact, with appropriate cover plate. 13. Other receptacles: Other receptacles shall be of type and characteristics and NEMA configuration to provide service as indicated on the drawings. 14. Receptacles and switches shall be Ivory unless designated by Architect. 15. Receptacles and switches designated as "Emergency" or fed by circuits from an "Emergency" panel shall be red with red plates and circuit label. C. Cover plates 1. General: Opening in Plates shall properly fit the wiring Devices associated with the outlets. Plates shall overlap outlet box edges for installation over finished room surfaces and shall be the non-over hanging type to fit conduit boxes used with exposed conduit runs.All plates in finished rooms shall be as indicated below with matching screws, unless designated by architect. WIRING DEVICES 26 0140-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2. Telephone outlet: Smooth ivory nylon cover plate with telephone and data jacks. 3. Future or abandoned outlet: Smooth ivory nylon cover plates with matching screws. 4. Offices and Finished spaces: Smooth ivory nylon cover plates with matching screws. 5. Surface outlets in mechanical spaces:Standard steel device covers. 6. Outlets Installed in backsplashes and/or counter height:Smooth ivory nylon. 7. [iOOutlets installed in wet areas and all food preparation areas and food service counters: 302 Stainless steel. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Each device shall be suitable for the type of service for which it is installed. Device shall be of NEMA configuration and of Specification Grade and/or Hospital Grade for those services to which the device is installed where those standards are established. Devices indicated adjacent to each other shall be in the same box and set under a common plate. Suitable barriers shall be provided in the box for separation of each device from adjacent devices where required by code. B. Install suitable cover plates on all wiring devices. C. Device colors shall be Ivory unless selected and installed to match the decor of the occupancy and other standard colors as set forth elsewhere in these contract documents or as selected by the Architect. Other colors shall be provided when so directed by the Architect. D. Wire all devices with proper polarity and suitably grounded. Provide green head grounds screw and 6-inch pigtail in every box. END OF SECTION 26 0140 WIRING DEVICES 26 0140-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 26 0170— DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install a suitable disconnect switch where indicated on the Drawings, or where required by the Specifications or the Code. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete manufacturer's specification on each disconnect proposed to be furnished to the job. See Section 0130 00—Submittal Procedures. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Disconnect switches serving motor loads shall be properly NEMA rated for these motors. Disconnects shall be environmentally rated for the area where located with NEMA rain-tight construction for units located outdoors. B. Disconnects shall be Square D Company NEMA Type HD, quick-make, quick-break. Disconnects shall be fused type where so indicated. C. Where shown on the Plans, Furnish and Install Class "R" rejection type Fuse clipswithin the Designated Device. D. Disconnect switches shall conform to U.L. 98-1981 and shall be so labeled. E. Equipment as manufactured by GE, Eaton or Siemens are acceptable. DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 01 70- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnects for motors,controllers,transformers, electric heaters and all other devices where so indicated, specified or required by code where manual operating branch circuit protection devices are not within sight and within 50 feet of the device. B. Mount disconnects with the top at 80 inches maximum on walls, columns or free-standing rigid steel frames unless otherwise indicated to be mounted on the equipment. C. Where equipment is furnished to the job with a suitable disconnect as a part of the equipment an additional disconnect will not be required to be added at the equipment. D. Provide proper selection and sized fuses where disconnects are indicated to be fused. END OF SECTION 26 0170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 01 70-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 26 0190—SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install all necessary hangers, supports, bases and connections for properly installing all electrical equipment and materials. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. See Section 0160 00—Product Requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00—Submittal Procedures. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron one-hole pipe straps, beam clamps,or hang-on- steel rod hangers for single runs of conduit to be fastened to the structure. Rod hangers shall be selected for weight supported but shall not be smaller than No.8. B. Rod hangers and adjustable"J"pipe hangers shall be equal to KindorfType C-149 for conduits. Conduits two inches(2")and smaller may be fastened with pipe hangers equal to KindorfType 6H. SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 0190- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S C. Caddy spring steel clamps and hangers and steel one-hole snap straps may be used in lieu of above to fasten single runs of conduit up to one inch (1") size to steel structures and support rods where this conduit is run within the ceiling space. D. Continuous channel inserts or trapeze hangers made of galvanized steel strut channel and fastened with bolt channel pipe straps shall be provided to support multiple runs of conduit and other raceways. E. Galvanized U-bolts or Kindorf C-210 riser pipe clamps on channel iron bearing plates at intervals of at least one clamp per joint shall be provided for support of vertical runs of conduits of more than twelve feet(12'). F. Suitable galvanized angle iron or framing channel supports shall be used to support all panelboards, cabinets, junction and pull boxes where indicated as not mounted to the building structure. G. Exterior equipment racks shall be constructed of double unistrut frame bolted to 4" galvanized steel pipe columns with welded cap,set in 12"x36"concrete footings. Footing shall be 12"AFG, with beveled corner and trowel finish. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Securely fasten and support conduits and raceways of all types and all electrical boxes, devices, and equipment from the main building structure except as specifically indicated otherwise. Support conduits within three feet (3') of each end of each bend, of each termination and at intervals along the run that will maintain true raceway alignment,without sag or deformation either during pull-in of conductors or after conductors are in place. On exposed raceways, provide supports at per NEC and on each side of each bend. Vertical conduits shall be supported at not more than 10' on center in addition to the above. B. Maintain horizontal and vertical alignment of raceways so as not to adversely effect the building structure in strength or appearance. Cable, strap, or wire hangers or fasteners shall not be used. C. Place conduits running exposed on and adjacent to walls after wall surface is installed and on spacers to allow wall to be painted after conduit is installed. D. Support cabinets and boxes to the floor and to the structure above independent of all raceways entering the boxes. Structural walls or columns may be used to support these cabinets or boxes only after specific approval is given. E. Fasten cabinets, boxes, panelboards, disconnects, motor controls and similar devices indicated other than at walls on channel iron racks mounted to floor and structure above. SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 0190-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S Three-fourths inch (3/4") thick plywood backboards painted to match the equipment finish may be used as a part of the rack. F. Support outlet boxes and junction boxes 100 cubic inches and smaller as specified for raceways. Locate outlet and junction boxes above accessible ceilings so they will not interfere with the installation of a lay-in type lighting fixture in any space in the ceiling. G. Rust inhibit all supports by galvanizing or other approved means. Supports shall be job rust inhibited at all cuts, breaks, welds, or other points where rust inhibitor coating is broken. END OF SECTION 26 0190 SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 0190-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 26 04 50 -GROUNDING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install proper grounding systems for the entire electrical installation. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Special attention is directed to Article 250 and Article 517 National Electrical Code (NFPA-70) for sizing and connecting of the grounding systems; and to the requirements of the local inspection authority. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Grounding conductors shall be green colored insulated annealed copper sized, unless specifically indicated otherwise, with an ampacity of at least 50 percent of the feeder supplying the equipment to be grounded and no ground wire shall be small than No. 6 except, where the feeder supplying the equipment is small than No. 6, the grounding conductor in that case shall be the same size as the feeder conductor. Isolated ground conductors shall be green with white or yellow tracer. B. System Ground connections shall be Burndy Type GAR or equal. C. Cable connections shall be solderless, bolted pressure connectors. GROUNDING 260450- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 D. A grounding conductor shall be installed in every conduit. All conduit, boxes, fixtures, etc. shall be bonded to the common grounding bus. At boxes, provide Appleton or equal, green head, grounding screws. All fluorescent fixture ballast housings shall be securely bonded to the ground system. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The common Ground Bus is defined as the main Ground Bus located within the Building Service Entrance Ma B. in. This shall be the common Ground point for all ground connections. Stray grounds to the Building frame and/or structural members will not be permitted. A separate color-coded insulated grounding conductor shall be run in each and every Raceway as noted on the accompanying drawings and shown in the panel Schedules.The Grounding conductor shall be of the same insulation as the circuit conductors sized in accordance with Article 250 NEC and as illustrated on thedrawings. C. In the Lighting System, BX pigtails or Aluminum grounds will not be permitted. All such six- foot fixture pigtails shall be installed in flexible Steel conduit "Greenfield" utilizing green coded copper grounding conductors. Fluorescent fixture ballasts shall be grounded by bonding jumper from the fixture frame to the ballast retaining bolt. D. Testing: 1. At the completion of the Grounding System, Meggar test all grounding to the satisfaction of the Architect and Engineer.The Ground System shall Meggar5 OHMS or less. END OF SECTION 26 04 50 GROUNDING 260450-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 26 05 01— LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install interior and exterior lighting systems, including lighting fixtures, lamps, controls, and accessories for lighting outlets in accordance with the drawings for complete and operational systems. Furnish and install a lighting fixture of the same type as indicated for areas of similar usage wherever the type designation is omitted on the drawings. B. Furnish and install a plaster frame for each recessed fixture as required by the type of building construction. Furnish and install hangers, bolts, or other devices required to properly and adequately support each lighting fixture from the structure. Fixtures may be supported from the suspended ceiling where specifically permitted by the construction specified in other Divisions of Work. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the Work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. Each lighting fixture shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code as suitable for the location where they are indicated to be installed. C. Each lighting fixture shall bear the Underwriters' Label indicating the fixture is suitable for the application and installation location. D. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. E. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. Submit adequately descriptive data including published catalog data or shop drawings for each type listing of lighting fixture for review prior to purchases or installation. B. If a substitute for a fixture specified is proposed, submit, when so requested, photographs, laboratory test data and samples of both the specified and the proposed fixture to demonstrate that the proposed substitute is an acceptable equal to the specified fixture. Rejection of an offered substitute shall not be basis for work delay or extra compensation. LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 05 01- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 C. See Section 0130 00-Submittal Procedures. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Light fixtures shall be warrantied for one year subsequent to the final acceptance of the project. Integrated lighting controls shall be warrantied for three-year warranty subsequent to the final acceptance of the project. B. See Section 0170 00-Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Lighting fixtures shall be of the type, manufacturer, and construction as indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. B. Each fixture shall be complete with all proper components, connections, and accessories. C. Recessed fixtures for ceilings that have insulation shall be Type IC. D. Surface mounted fixtures shall have spacers and/or hangers to achieve required separation from low density ceilings construction. 2.2 LED LAMPS A. All LED products must be UL and/or CSA listed. B. OExterior and Wet Location fixtures must clearly state IP rating on fixture. C. LED products must have LM-79 and LM-80 testing noted on specification sheet by an independent test lab. Products should be identified as L70 and/or L90 ratings based on result from lab testing. D. Exterior pole mounted lighting shall have surge suppression within each fixture. 2.3 OTHER LAMPS A. Lamps shall be energy saving and suitable for the lighting fixture installed and in accordance with the schedules and shall be manufactured by General Electric, Sylvania, or North American Phillips Corporation. LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 05 01-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 B. Incandescent lamps shall be general service inside frosted type except as listed for specific application. C. Fluorescent lamps shall be with 4100 Kelvin color and minimum CRI of 70,except as scheduled on drawings. D. Other lamps shall be as specifically listed on drawings and be for the duty, lighting quality and application selected. 2.4 BALLASTS A. Each lighting fixture shall be equipped with a proper energy saving ballast in accordance with the operating requirements of the lighting fixture and the Fixture Schedule. Each ballast shall be UL listed and carry a UL label for the lighting fixture and installation specified. Ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance, GE,Jefferson, or Universal. B. Electronic fluorescent ballasts shall be physically interchangeable with a standard core/coil electromagnetic ballast or shall be specifically designed and constructed to operate T8 fluorescent lamps or compact fluorescent lamps as scheduled on the plans. 1. Electronic ballast leads shall be color coded to ANSI Standard C82.11 (latest version). 2. Electronic ballasts shall operate at a high power factor. 3. Electronic ballasts shall be designed to support a sustained short to ground or open circuit of any output leads without damage to the ballast. 4. Case temperatures shall not exceed ANSI C82.11. 5. Ballasts shall operate at both 50 Hz and 60 Hz frequencies and when operated in conjunction with dimming shall dim continuously between 100% and 20% light output and shall maintain full filament heat throughout the dimming range. Ballast dimming shall meet UL class 2. 6. Electronic ballasts shall meet: a. Requirements of Federal Communication Commission Regulations b. ANSI C82.11 c. ANSI C62.41 CRT A for harmonic distortion d. UL listed Class P and CSA certified. e. Shall contain no PCBs. LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 05 01-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 C. Fluorescent ballasts shall be CBM certified, high power factor type and sound rated for the lowest rating available for the application. Ballasts for lamps rated 430 ma and below shall be sound rating "A". Each ballast shall have the sound rating listed thereon. Ballasts shall be Premium Class P for those types where the requirements have been established. Other ballasts, where indicated, shall be energy saving type and shall be equal to Advance Mark III. Ballasts in fixtures which are installed in fire-rated assemblies shall be fire-rated. D. Other gaseous discharge lamp ballasts shall be high power factor constant wattage type. These ballasts for fixtures on building interior mounting shall be full enclosed in a metal housing which is filled with thermosetting sound absorbing and encapsulating material. The interior ballast shall, on recessed fixtures, be mounted separate from the reflector and socket but shall be removable without tools through the fixture ceiling opening. Each ballast shall be provided with a line disconnecting device and thermal protection. 2.5 CONTROLS A. Ceiling mounted occupancy sensors shall be Dual Ultrasonic/PIR type with power pack rated for the full load of the lighting circuit in each location. Operating range of sensor shall be selected based on the arrangement of the room. Leviton or equal. B. Wall mounted occupancy sensors shall be Dual Ultrasonic/PIR type with On/Off switch, rated for the full load of the lighting circuit in each location. Leviton or equal. C. Lighting Time Clock shall be Intermatic ET-70415 CR,four channel, astronomic time clock with Square D 8903 mechanically held lighting contactors with 30 amp contacts and quantity of contacts as required by drawings, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. D. Integrated lighting controls shall be as shown on the drawing and shall be manufactured by Sensor Switch. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Recessed lighting fixtures for mounting in lay-in type ceilings shall be provided with tee clamp lock-in supports when it is acceptable to support the fixtures from the tees. Recessed fixtures will have all required plaster frames, concrete inserts, gaskets, sight shields and similar accessory components required for the particular installations in this project. B. Lighting fixtures indicated to have integral battery, charger and inverterfrom emergency light shall have equipment specially designed for and installed in the fixture. Units shall be with test and 90-minute illumination capability. Units for fluorescent fixtures shall be Siltron Unit- Pak. C. Fixtures mounted in fire-rated assemblies shall be enclosed in fire-rated enclosures constructed of fire-rated material matching the rating of the ceiling. LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 05 01-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2.7 POLES A. Poles shall be manufactured by a manufacturer associated with the light fixture manufacturer. The pole shall be configured with all accessories required for a complete system. B. Poles shall be powder coated aluminum or steel,or fiberglass as shown on the drawing fixture schedule. C. Mounting anchor bolts shall be as specified by the manufacturer. D. The poles shall be rated for the wind load rating required by the local site conditions. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 FIXTURES A. Each lighting fixture shall be carefully installed in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and to fit the general construction of the walls, ceilings or other areas where the fixture is indicated. Refer to reflected ceiling plans, elevations and other details for the exact locations of fixtures. Where those details or other instructions do not indicate lighting fixture locations, position the fixtures proportionally in spaces using the arrangement indicated on the electrical drawings plus center, parallel and space the lighting fixtures and rows of fixtures on and with general construction lines. B. Install recessed lighting fixtures in accordance with the lighting fixture manufacturer's instructions for the application. Install above ceiling junction boxes to provide ready access through the ceiling opening. Install hangers to support fixtures independent of suspended ceilings unless the ceiling is specifically designed to support the fixture. In this case, provide clips in accordance with NEC. Above-ceiling insulation materials are prohibited to be within 3" of recessed lighting fixtures. C. Mount surface lighting fixtures to the ceiling in accordance with the lighting fixture manufacturer's instructions. Provide through ceiling to structure supports for each lighting fixture mounted on suspended ceiling unless the ceiling is specifically designed to support the lighting fixture. Narrow channel or box-mounted lighting fixtures on tee-bar type ceilings shall be connected through outlet boxes centered above the fixture and supported squarely on the tees. Provide auxiliary above-ceiling supports for the ceiling where tees must be cut. D. Securely anchor bracket mounted fixtures to maintain vertical and horizontal alignment. Provide that all mounting devices are concealed. E. Refer to the Architectural plans for locations of fire-rated assemblies. Fabricate and install the required fire-rated enclosures with the fixtures. LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 05 01-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 F. In remodeled spaces where fixtures shall remain or be relocated, provide new lenses for all fixtures which are damaged prior to construction. Verify such condition prior to bid. 3.2 LAMPS A. Each fixture shall be equipped with a set of new lamps of the size and type specified and left in a condition such that there is a new lamp in each receptacle in each fixture upon completion and acceptance of the work. Low-energy or energy-saving type lamps shall be furnished and installed where indicated and shall specifically match the fixture,socket and ballast selection. B. Use permanent fixtures with final lamps to allow final touch-up painting to be performed under completed building light. Permanent fixtures used for other temporary lighting shall have the lamps removed and not be reused for final lamping of the job. Specific approval by the Owner shall be obtained for time of installation of the final complement of lamps. C. Replace all lamps that fail or have blackened ends during the period of touch-up. Replace all lamps that have been used more that 1/4 of their rated life.This use time will be determined by the Owner's records. D. In remodeled spaces where existing fixtures shall remain or be relocated, provide new lamps in all such fixtures, unless noted otherwise on drawings. 3.3 TESTING,CLEANING,AIMING AND ADJUSTING A. Each fixture shall be placed in proper operating condition,equipped with the proper lamp and properly fitted and adjusted to aim,focus, and physically work in the spaces and construction where installed. Fixtures shall be left clean of all dust,dirt,grease and other foreign materials. Reflectors and lenses shall be clean and undamaged. Trims, finishes, and housings shall fit together and to the building construction and show no evidence of damage, handling, misalignment. END OF SECTION 26 0190 LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 05 01-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 32 3119 - DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Decorative aluminum fences. 2. Swing gates. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For fencing and gates. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, gate locations, post spacing, and attachment details. C. Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified. 1. Provide Samples 12 inches in length for linear materials. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Wind Loading: 1. Fence Height: 8 feet. 2. Design Requirements: Wind loads shall be determined from the pressures developed by a 120-mph wind velocity (ASD) (3 second gust) and an equivalent 155 mph wind velocity (LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category III, and appropriate shape factor from the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-16 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures". 2.2 DECORATIVE ALUMINUM FENCES A. Decorative Aluminum Fences: Fences made from aluminum extrusions. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ameristar Perimeter Security; ASSA ABLOY; Echelon II Classic Design Heavy Industrial Aluminum Ornamental Fence System or comparable product. a. 3-rail with rings style. B. Posts: Square extruded tubes. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Line Posts: As required for wind loading, minimum 3 by 3 inches with 0.125-inch wall thickness. 2. End and Corner Posts: As required for wind loading, 3 by 3 inches with 0.125-inch wall thickness. C. Post Caps:Aluminum castings that cover entire top of posts. D. Rails: Extruded-aluminum channels, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, with 0.100-inch-thick sidewalls and 0.070-inch-thick top. E. Pickets: Extruded-aluminum tubes, 1 inch square, with 0.062-inch wall thickness. 1. Extend pickets beyond top rail as indicated and press flat and trim to produce spear point shape. 2. Picket Spacing:4 inches clear, maximum. F. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard tamperproof, corrosion-resistant, color-coated fasteners matching fence components. G. Fabrication:Assemble fences into sections by fastening pickets to rails. 1. Fabricate sections with clips welded to rails for field fastening to posts. 2. Drill clips for fasteners before finishing. H. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coating. 1. Color: Bronze. 2.3 SWING GATES A. Gate Configuration:As indicated. B. Gate Frame Height: 8 feet. C. Gate Opening Width:As Indicated in Drawings. D. Frame Corner Construction: Welded or assembled with corner fittings. E. Additional Rails: Provide as indicated, complying with requirements for fence rails. F. Infill: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence. G. Picket Size, Configuration, and Spacing: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence. H. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges. Provide latch for Owner's padlock. I. Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use. 1. Function: 39- Full surface, triple weight, antifriction bearing. 2. Material: Wrought steel, forged steel, cast steel, or malleable iron;galvanized. J. Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel or powder coating. 1. Color: Bronze. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2.4 ALUMINUM A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloys and tempers with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated in paragraphs below for each aluminum form required. B. Extrusions:ASTM B 221,Alloy 6063-T5. C. Tubing:ASTM B 429/13 429M, Alloy 6063-T6. D. Plate and Sheet:ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6. E. Die and Hand Forgings:ASTM B 247,Alloy 6061-T6. F. Castings:ASTM B 26/13 26M,Alloy A356.0-T6. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for strength and compatibility in fabricated items. B. Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements in Section 03 30 00"Cast-in-Place Concrete"with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, 3-inch slump, and 1-inch maximum aggregate size. C. Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish:AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.Complywith coating manufacturer's written instructionsfor cleaning,conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color: Black. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.2 PREPARATION A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. 3.3 DECORATIVE FENCE INSTALLATION A. Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening rails and infill panels to posts. C. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at 8'-0" maximum spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. Cantilever support posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum depth of 48 inches. 1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. 2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. a. Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches above grade. Finish and slope top surface to drain water away from post. 3. Posts Set in Concrete: Extend post to within 6 inches of specified excavation depth, but not closer than 3 inches to bottom of concrete. 4. Space posts uniformly at 8 feet o.c. max. 3.4 GATE INSTALLATION A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range.Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. END OF SECTION 32 3119 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 32 84 23 - UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes but Not Limited to: 1. Furnish and install planting irrigation system as described in Contract Documents complete with accessories necessary for proper function. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation. 2. Section 32 92 23: Sodding. 3. Section 32 93 00: Plants. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits. 2. Non-Pressure Lateral Line: Downstream from electric control valves to pop-up spray heads and drip valve assemblies to emitters. Piping or tubing is under pressure during flow. In areas where potable or secondary water are used, pressure supply line shall be white. In areas where non-potable or reclaimed water are used, pressure supply line shall be purple. 3. Point of Connection:The location where the meter for the irrigation system is located. 4. Pressure Supply Line: Downstream from point of connection to electric control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure when activated by master valve or hydrometer. In areas where potable or secondary water are used, pressure supply line shall be white. In areas where non-potable or reclaimed water are used, pressure supply line shall be purple. 5. Hunter Controllers: Hunter controllers are irrigation clocks that automatically adjust irrigation run times in response to environmental changes using sensors and weather information to manage watering times and frequency. As environmental conditions vary, the controller increases or decreases irrigation. Hunter controllers have the ability to turn off your sprinklers automatically during rain, high wind or low temperature. 6. Static Water Pressure:The pressure at the point of connection when the system is not operable. 7. Working Pressure: The pressure at the point of connection when the system is operable. UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 84 23- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Provide Coordination for required tests and inspections. a. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide necessary manufacturer's field service. b. Pressure Test: In the presence of Landscape Architect provide a pressure test. C. Walk Through for Substantial Completion: In the presence of Landscape Architect, plan and provide walk through for Substantial Completion after Contractor has completed all Work. d. Final Walk Through: In the presence of the Landscape Architect, plan and provide final walk through after Contractor has completed all work listed on substantial completion walk through punch list provided by Architect. B. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre-installation conference before irrigation system installation begins. 2. In addition to review the following: a. Landscape architect or designated landscape consultant shall demonstrate or describe method to be used to maintain head spacing from concrete and to stabilize heads. b. Within the field yard, provide one installed example of each type of irrigation detail for review and approval by the architect and owner prior to beginning work in the field. C. Sequencing: 1. Install sleeves before installation of cast-in-place concrete site elements and paving. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's cut sheets for each element of system. b. Parts list for operating elements of system. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Acceptance certificate of irrigation system. UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 84 23-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1) Upon acceptance of irrigation system, reviewer will provide signed acceptance certificate. 2) Certificate will include name and signature of reviewer, reviewer's company, date of review, and reviewer's telephone number. 2. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Results of mainline service pressure test before beginning work on system should be submitted as a report following the testing and before burial of the mainline. b. Provide the following from Main Line Irrigation test and observation: 1) Record and submit documentation of Irrigation Main Line tests, issues, and measure taking to correct problems. 3. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Manufacturer's printed literature on operation and maintenance of operating elements of system. b. Instruction Manual: 1) Includes complete directions for system operation and maintenance, including winterizing, controller program worksheet and annual service and scheduling calendar based on local site-specific conditions. 4. Qualification Submittals: a. Irrigation Installer: 1) Provide documentation of the following: a) Firm experience in irrigation projects (minimum of five years) b) Financial stability. c) Comply with specifications and contract documents. d) Agree to complete reporting documents, including: (1) Assist landscape architect in completing the Watering Schedule C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual 1) Instruction Manual. 2) Manufacturer's printed literature. 3) Manufacturer's cut sheets for each element of system. 4) Manufacturer's parts list. 5) Main Line Irrigation observation report. 6) Controller Program Schedule: a) Watering Schedule. UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 84 23-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 b. Record Documentation: 1) Certificates: a) Acceptance certificate of irrigation system. 2) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Mainline Pressure Test. b) Main Line Irrigation test and observation. 3) Record drawings:As installation occurs, prepare accurate record drawing to be submitted before final inspection, including: a) Detail and dimension changes made during construction. b) Significant details and dimensions not shown in original Contract Documents. c) Field dimensioned locations of valve boxes, manual drains, quick-coupler valves, control wire runs not in mainline ditch, soil moisture sensors (soil moisture sensor technology are selected these improvements) and both ends of sleeves. d) Take dimensions from permanent constructed surfaces or edges located at or above finish grade. e) Take and record dimensions at time of installation. f) Reduced copy of record drawings to 11 by 17 inches with color key circuits and laminated both sides with 5 mil thick or heavier plastic. Mount on 12 x 18-inch hard board drilled with (2) two 1/2-inch holes at top of board and hang on hooks in Custodial Room or location designated by Owner's Representative. g) Two (2) additional reduced copies of record drawings to 11 by 17 inches with color key circuits, unlaminated, and unmounted to be given to Owner's Representative. D. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Tools: a. Furnish following items before Final Closeout Review: 1) Two quick coupler keys with brass hose swivels. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Work and materials shall be in accordance with latest rules and regulations, and other applicable state or local laws. UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 84 23-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 2. Nothing in Contract Documents is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. B. Qualifications: 1. Installer Qualifications: a. General: 1) Perform installation under direction of foreman or supervisor with five (5)years minimum experience in sprinkling system installations. b. Automatic controller: 1) Trained certified personnel familiar with required two wire irrigation system and controller installation procedures. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Storage and handling during installation: protect materials from damage and prolonged exposure to sunlight. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Standard one year guarantee stipulated in General Conditions shall include: a. Filling and repairing depressions and replacing plantings due to settlement of irrigation system trenches. b. Adjusting system to supply proper coverage of areas to receive water. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. 3M,Austin,TX www.3m.com/elpd. b. Carson Industries LLC, Glendora, CA www.carsonind.com. C. Hunter Industries, San Marcos, CA www.hunterindustries.com.. d. Nibco Inc, Elkhart, IN www.nibco.com. e. Paige Electric, Union, NJ www.paigewire.com.. B. Materials: 1. Rock-Free Soil: UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 84 23-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 a. Backfill soil around PVC pipe. b. Soil having rocks no larger than 1/2 inch in any dimension. 2. Pea Gravel: a. For use around drains,valves, and quick couplers. b. 1/2-inch maximum dimension, washed rock. 3. Native Material: Soil native to project site free of wood and other deleterious materials and rocks over 1 inches 4. Topsoil: Remove rocks, roots,sticks,clods,debris,and other foreign matter over 1-1/2 inches longest dimension encountered during trenching. 5. Pipe, Pipe Fittings, And Connections: a. Pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with Manufacturer's name,size, schedule, type, and working pressure. b. Pipe sizes shown on Drawings are minimum. Larger sizes may be substituted if at no additional cost to Owner. C. Zone Pipe: 1) Pressure Lines: Class 200. 2) Lateral Lines: Class 200 3) Backflow Assembly Piping: Schedule 40. 4) Quick Coupler Piping: PVC d. Fittings: Same material as pipe, except were detailed otherwise. e. Sleeves: 1) Under Parking Area, Driveway Paving and track:Schedule 40 PVC Pipe. 2) All Other: Class 200 PVC Pipe. 3) Sleeve diameter refer to irrigation plan. 6. Sprinkler Heads: a. Each type of head shall be product of single manufacturer. b. Spray Heads in Lawn Areas: 1) Category Four Approved Products. a) Hunter: Spray 4" Pop-up. C. Sprinklers: 1. Sprinkler Risers: a. All 3/4" inlet rotor pop-up sprinklers shall have an adjustable pre-assembled swing assembly riser. Swing assemblies shall be equal as approved by Landscape Architect UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 84 23-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 before installation. Swing assemblies shall be 3/4" x 12" and shall be threaded both ends. b. Pop-up sprinkler heads, shrub spray heads, bubbler heads, and stationary spray sprinkler heads.: 2. Automatic Irrigation Two Wiring And Controller: a. Communication wire between controller and valve. b. Hunter's controller: 1) Provide the specified controller see irrigation legend. C. Waterproof Wire Connectors: 1) Control wire connections shall consist of a properly-sized wire nut inserted in a waterproof grease cap. 2) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) DBY or DBR by 3M b) 'One Step' 20111SP by King Innovation c) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. d. Automatic controllers: Refer to Legend e. Automatic Rain Sensors: 1) Hunter: MINI-CLIK, Wireless. 3. Valves: f. Automatic Valves: 1) Category Four Approved Products. a) Hunter: ICV series. g. Isolation Valves: 1) PVC ball valves, size to match pipe size 2) Nibco T-113 non-rising stem gate valve, size to match pipe size (use in cold, northern climates-eco-regions 6.0, 9.1 and 10.1). 3) Class Quality Standards. a) Salco h. Backflow Preventer: Make and Model shown on Drawings or as required by local code. i. Pressure Reducing Valve: Make and model shown on Drawings or as required by local code. UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 84 23-7 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S j. Quick Coupling Valves and Keys: 1) Category Four Approved Products. a) Hunter: HQ-3, HQ4 Series with HK-3, HK-4 key and HS-100 hose swivel. k. Valve Boxes and Extensions: 1) Lid Colors: a) Green: Lawn areas and in gravel use brown lids. 2) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Rainbird or Nelson Series,1" I. Valve: 1) Type Acceptable Products: a) Hunter,Amex or approved equal. b) Valve Box Supports: Standard size fired clay paving bricks without holes or compacted gravel base. 3. Other Components: a. Recommended by Manufacturer and subject to Architect's review and acceptance before installation. b. Provide components necessary to complete system and make operational. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS A. Approved Irrigation System Installers. 1. Irrigation company with Five Year experience minimum. B. Category Three National Account Approved Two Wire Controller Installers. 1. Provide Qualification documentation as described under Informational Submittals in Part 1 GENERAL: C. Approved irrigation system installers shall be pre-approved and included in Construction Documents 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Perform pressure test at stub-out on main water line provided for irrigation system, or at near-by fire hydrant. 2. Notify Architect if pressures over 70 psi or under 50 psi are found to determine if some re-design of system is necessary before beginning work on system. UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 84 23-8 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 3.3 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Protection Of In-Place Conditions: a. Repair or replace work damaged during course of the Work at no additional cost to Owner. If damaged work is new, installer of original work shall perform repair or replacement. b. Do not cut existing tree roots measuring over 2 inches in diameter in order to install irrigation lines. Hand dig within the drip lines of all existing trees. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Layout of Irrigation Heads: a. Location of heads and piping shown on Drawings is approximate. Actual placement may vary slightly as is required to achieve full, even coverage without spraying onto buildings, sidewalks, fences, etc. b. During layout, consult with Landscape Architect to verify proper placement and make recommendations, where revisions are advisable. C. Minor adjustments in system layout will be permitted to avoid existing fixed obstructions. d. Make certain changes from Contract Documents are shown on record drawings. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Trenching and Backfilling: 1. Pulling of pipe is not permitted. 2. Excavate trenches to specified depth. Remove rocks larger than 1-1/2 inch in any direction from bottom of trench. Separate out rocks larger than 1-1/2 inch in any direction uncovered in trenching operation from excavated material and remove from areas to receive landscaping. 3. Cover pipe both top and sides with 2 inches of rock-free soil as specified. 4. Do not cover pressure main, irrigation pipe, or fittings until Architect has inspected and approved system. 3.5 PIPING A. Sleeving: 1. Sleeve water lines and control wires under walks and paving. Extend sleeves 18-24" inches minimum beyond walk or pavement edge. Cover sleeve ends until pipes and wires are installed to keep sleeve clean and free of dirt and debris. UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 84 23-9 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 2. Position sleeves with respect to buildings and other obstructions so pipe can be easily removed. B. Installation of Pipe: 1. Install pipe in manner to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, install main lines and lateral lines connecting pop-up rotor and impact sprinklers with minimum cover of 18 inches based on finished grade. Install remaining lateral lines, including those connecting drip tubing, with minimum of 12 inches of cover based on finish grade. 3. Install pipe and wires under driveways or parking areas in specified sleeves 18-24 inches below finish grade or as shown on Drawings. 4. Locate no sprinkler head closer than 3 inches from building foundation. Heads immediately adjacent to mow strips, walks, or curbs shall be one inch below top of mow strip,walk, or curb and have one to 3 inches clearance between head and mow strip,walk, or curb. 5. Cut plastic pipe square. Remove burrs at cut ends before installation so unobstructed flow will result. 6. Make solvent weld joints as follows: a. Do not make solvent weld joints if ambient temperature is below 35 deg F b. Clean mating pipe and fitting with clean, dry cloth and apply one coat of P-70 primer to each. c. Apply uniform coat of 711 solvent to outside of pipe. d. Apply solvent to fitting in similar manner. e. Give pipe or fitting a quarter turn to insure even distribution of solvent and make sure pipe is inserted to full depth of fitting socket. f. Allowjoints to set at least 24 hours before applying pressure to PVC pipe. 7. Tape threaded connections with Teflon tape C. Control Valves and Controller 1. Install valves in plastic boxes with reinforced heavy duty plastic covers. Locate valve boxes within 12 inches of sidewalks and shrub bed edges with tops at finish grade. Do not install more than one valve in single box. 2. Place 3 inches minimum of pea gravel below bricks supporting valve boxes to drain box. Set valve boxes over valve so all parts of valve can be reached for service. Set cover of valve box even with finish grade. Valve box cavity shall be reasonably free from dirt and debris. 3. Wiring: UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 84 23-10 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 a. Install Two Wire below the mainline. D. Backflow Preventer: 1. As directed by the Landscape Architect and coordinate with Project Manager. E. Sprinkler Heads: 1. Set sprinkler heads and quick-coupling valves perpendicular to finish grade. 2. Do not install sprinklers using side inlets. Install using base inlets only. 3. Set sprinkler heads at a consistent distance from existing walks, curbs, and other paved areas and to grade by using specified components or other method demonstrated in Pre-Construction Conference. 4. All sprinklers to be on swing joints. F. Before installation of sprinkler heads and drip lines, open control valves and use full head of water to flush out system. G. Arrange valve stations to operate in an easy-to-view progressive sequence around building. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Main Line: a. Before backfilling main line,test make certain there are no leaks. Pressure Test. 1) A report of the test results along with photographs of the testing process are to be provided by the landscape architect or his authorized representative at completion of testing. 2) This report shall be included in the Operations and Maintenance Manual along with the acceptance certificate at the end of the project. B. Field Inspections: 1. Architect's irrigation design consultant, or certified water auditor recommended by consultant and approved in writing by Architect, will review irrigation system before substantial completion. 2. Upon acceptance of irrigation system, reviewer will provide signed acceptance certificate. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Adjust sprinkler heads to proper grade when turf is sufficiently established to allow walking on it without appreciable harm. Such lowering and raising of sprinkler heads shall be part of original contract with no additional cost to Owner. B. Adjust sprinkler heads for proper distribution and trim so spray does not fall on building. C. Adjust watering time of valves to provide proper amounts of water to plants. UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 84 23-11 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 3.8 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Training: 1. After system is installed and approved, instruct Owner's designated personnel in complete operation and maintenance. END OF SECTION 32 84 23 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 32 84 23-12 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 32 90 01 -COMMOM PLANTING REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL SUMMARY Includes but Not Limited To: 1. Common procedures and requirements for landscaping work. 2. Provide maintenance for new landscaping as described in Contract Documents. Related Requirements: 3. Section 32 84 23: Underground Sprinklers. 4. Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Pre-Installation Conference: 5. Schedule pre-installation conference. 6. Schedule planting pre-installation conference after completion of Fine Grading before beginning landscape work. 7. In addition to agenda items to be reviewed: a. Establish responsibility for maintenance of new landscaping during all phases of construction period. b. Prepare two typical landscape planting excavations and conduct percolation test to verify that water drains away within two hours. Discuss results of percolation tests with Architect and Owner's representative. SUBMITTALS B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations and Maintenance Manual a. Operations and Maintenance Data: COMMON PLANING REQUIREMENTS 32 90 01- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1) At completion of landscape work, submit two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work for one full year after contract maintenance period ends. QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualifications: Requirements but not limited to the following: 2. Installer: a. Use trained personnel familiar with required planting procedures and with Contract Documents. b. Planting shall be performed under direction of foreman or supervisor with minimum five years' experience in landscape installations. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Storage and Handling Requirements: 3. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of Manufacturer. 4. Deliver plants, shrubs, palms and shrubs in healthy and vigorous condition. 5. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery. Storage and Handling Requirements: 6. Store in location on site where they will not be endangered and where they can be adequately watered and kept in healthy and vigorous condition. 7. Protect materials from deterioration while stored at site. PART 2-PRODUCTS POST-EMERGENT WEED CONTROL Type Two Acceptable Products: 1. Treflan or Surflan by Dow Agrosciences. 2. Eptan by Syngenta. COMMON PLANING REQUIREMENTS 32 90 01-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 3. Equal as approved by Architect before use. PART 3-EXECUTION INSTALLERS Acceptable Installers: 1. Landscape contractors that have experience in successful landscape installation in this region. Approved landscaping installers shall be pre-approved and included in Construction Documents by Addendum. EXAMINATION Verification of Conditions: 2. Inspect site and Contract Documents to become thoroughly acquainted with locations of irrigation,ground lighting, and utilities. 3. Repair damage to irrigation, ground lighting, and utilities and other items adjacent to landscaping caused by work of this Section or replace at no additional cost to Owner. PREPARATION Before proceeding with work, verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations between Drawings and site to Landscape Architect before proceeding with landscape work. 4. Plant totals are for convenience of Contractor only and are not guaranteed. Verify amounts shown on Drawings. 5. All planting indicated on Drawings is required unless indicated otherwise. Protection: 6. Take care in performing landscaping work to avoid conditions that will create hazards. Post signs or barriers as required. 7. Provide adequate means for protection from damage through excessive erosion, flooding, heavy rains, etc. Repair or replace damaged areas. 8. Keep site well drained and landscape excavations dry. COMMON PLANING REQUIREMENTS 32 90 01-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 INSTALLATION Interface with Other Work: 9. Do not plant palms and shrubs until major construction operations are completed. Do not commence landscaping work until construction work has been completed and approved. Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required. Hand excavates as required. Maintain grade stakes until parties concerned mutually agree upon removal. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, high water table or adverse drainage conditions, notify Landscape Architect before planting. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field Inspection: 10. Landscape Architect will inspect landscaping installation approximately two weeks before Substantial Completion. 11. Replace landscaping that is dead or appears dead as directed by Architect within 10 days of notification and before Substantial Completion. CLEANING Waste Management: 12. Immediately cleanup soil or debris spilled onto pavement and dispose of deleterious materials. CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES Instruction of Owner: 13. Replace damaged plantings at no additional cost to Owner. COMMON PLANING REQUIREMENTS 32 90 01-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S PROTECTION Protect planted areas against traffic or other use immediately after planting is completed by placing adequate warning signs and barricades. Provide adequate protection of planted areas against trespassing, erosion, and damage of any kind. Remove this protection after Landscape Architect has accepted planted areas. MAINTENANCE General: 14. Before beginning maintenance period (during construction), plants shall be in at least as sound, healthy,vigorous, and in approved condition as when delivered to site, unless accepted by Architect in writing at final landscape inspection. 15. Maintain landscaping until final acceptance. 16. Replace landscaping that is dead or appears unhealthy or non-vigorous as directed by Architect before end of maintenance period. Make replacements within 10 days of notification. Lawn that does not live and has to be replaced shall be guaranteed and maintained an additional 30 days from date of replacement. END OF SECTION 32 90 01 COMMON PLANING REQUIREMENTS 32 90 01-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 32 9113 -SOIL PREPARATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes but Not Limited To: 1. Perform soil preparation work as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and apply soil amendments as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 3105 01: Common Site Construction Requirements. 2. Section 31 22 13: 'Rough Grading' and pre-installation conference held in conjunction with the specifications. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM D1557-09 'Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort'. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre-installation conference. 2. In addition to agenda items, review the following: a. Review soil amendments and fertilizer requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Product literature and chemical / nutrient analysis of soil amendments and fertilizers. 2. Samples: a. Sample of soil conditioner for approval before delivery to site. Include product analysis list. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Field Quality Control Submittals: SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 a. Submit top soil sample: 1) Before installing,topsoil get Landscape Architect's approval of subbase. 2) If necessary, submit proposed amendments and application rates necessary to bring topsoil up to minimum specified requirements. b. Submit report stating location of source of imported topsoil and account of recent use. 2. Installer Reports: a. Delivery slips indicating amount of soil conditioner/planting mix. delivered to Project site. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: 1. Topsoil used in landscaped areas, new imported shall be fertile, loose, friable, brown in color,soil meeting following criteria: a. Chemical Characteristics: 1) Acidity/alkalinity range: pH 6.5 to 7.5. 2) Soluble Salts: less than 5.0 mmhos/cm. 3) Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR): less than 10.0. 4) Organic Matter: greater than one percent. b. Physical Characteristics: 1) Gradation as defined by USDA triangle of physical characteristics as measured by hydrometer. a) Sand: 15 to 60 percent. b) Silt: 10 to 60 percent. c) Clay: 5 to 30 percent. 2) Clean and free from toxic minerals and chemicals, noxious weeds, rocks larger than 1-1/2 inch in any dimension, and other objectionable materials. 3) Soil shall not contain more than 2 percent by volume of rocks measuring over 3/32 inch in largest size. B. Soil Amendments: 1. Incorporate following soil amendments into topsoil used for Project: SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 a. Acceptable Soil Amendments, Soil Conditioners,And Application Rates. 1) 'Soil Pep:' See Topsoil Testing Report. 2) EPA Class 'A' co-compost or compost with SAR less than 3.0, EC less than 4.0, and CN ratio of 15 to 25:1 passing through 1/2-inch mesh screen:Apply compost at 6 cubic yards per 1000 sq.ft. for every three inches of soil depth. b. Acceptable Fertilizers and Application Rates: 1) Apply a NP and iron fertilizer at label rate. Submit brand and analysis for approval. 2) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Soil Amendments: 1. Lawn areas to have 3". of topsoil. 2. Roto-till beds with soil mix amendments evenly into 8 inches of topsoil. 3. Incorporate and leach soil amendments which require leaching, such as gypsum, within such time limits that soil is sufficiently dry to allow proper application of fertilizer and soil conditioners. END OF SECTION 32 9113 SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S SECTION 32 92 23 -SODDING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes but Not Limited to: 1. Furnish and install sodded lawn as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 84 23: Irrigation system. 2. Section 32 90 01: Common Planting Requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Eco-Region Irrigation Design:A bio-regional approach to irrigation and planting design that is relevant to the geographic area for which the planting plan and irrigation system is designed. 2. Hardiness Zone:A hardiness zone is a more precisely geographically-defined zone within an Eco-Region in which a specific category of plant life is capable of growing, as defined by temperature hardiness, or ability to withstand the minimum temperatures of the zone. Hardiness Zones may be defined by one of two sources: a. Sunset Western Garden Book Maps. b. USDA Hardiness Zone Map. Plant Hardiness zone sources shall be listed by the architect through the planting and irrigation design process. 3. Hydro-Zone: Plants grouped by water needs (similar Crop Coefficients (Kc), organized into one irrigation zone. 4. Reference Evapotranspiration (ETo):The total water lost from the soil (evaporation) and from the plant surface (transpiration) over some period. SODDING 32 92 23- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: 2. Sustainable Design Submittals: a. Product Data 1) For water efficient landscape. b. Product Data 1) For water use reduction. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations and Maintenance Manual. 2. As Bulti's 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1. Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod in accordance with requirements of Turfgrass Producers International (TPI) (formally American Sod Producers Association) Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and Transplanting/Installing. 2. Schedule deliveries to coincide with topsoil operations and laying. Keep storage at job site to minimum without causing delays. a. Deliver, unload, and store sod on pallets within 24 hours of being lifted. b. Do not deliver small, irregular, or broken pieces of sod. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Cut sod in pieces approximately 3/4 to one inch thick. Roll or fold sod so it may be lifted and handled without breaking or tearing and without loss of soil. 2. During wet weather, allow sod to dry sufficiently to prevent tearing during lifting and handling. SODDING 32 92 23-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 3. During dry weather, protect sod from drying before installation. Water as necessary to ensure vitality and to prevent excess loss of soil in handling. Sod that dries out before installation will be rejected. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Description: 1. Superior sod grown from certified, high quality, seed of known origin or from plantings of certified grass seedlings or stolons: a. Assure satisfactory genetic identity and purity. b. Assure over-all high quality and freedom from noxious weeds or an excessive amount of other crop and weedy plants at time of harvest. 2. Sod shall be 100%Common Bermuda weed free and 2-year-old sod. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Do not commence work of this Section until work of Sections 32 91 13 and 32 93 00 has been completed and approved. B. Tolerances: 1. Final grade of soil after sodding of lawn areas is complete shall be one inch below top of adjacent pavement of any kind. C. Laying of Sod: 1. Lay sod during within 48 hours of being lifted. 2. Lay sod while top 6 inches of soil is damp, but not muddy. 3. Lay sod in rows perpendicular to slope with joints staggered. Butt sections closely without overlapping or leaving gaps between sections. Cut out irregular or thin sections with a sharp knife. SODDING 32 92 23-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 4. Lay sod flush with adjoining existing sodded surfaces. D. After Laying of Sod Is Complete: 1. Roll horizontal surface areas in two directions perpendicular to each other. 2. Repair and re-roll areas with depressions, lumps, or other irregularities. Heavy rolling to correct irregularities in grade will not be permitted. 3. Water sodded areas immediately after laying sod to obtain moisture penetration through sod into top 6 inches of topsoil. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: 1. Sodded areas will be accepted at Project closeout if: a. Sodded areas are properly established. b. Sod is free of bare and dead spots and is without weeds. C. No surface soil is visible when grass has been cut to height of 2 inches 2. Sodded areas have been mowed a minimum of twice and at final acceptance. END OF SECTION 32 92 23 SODDING 32 92 23-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 SECTION 32 93 00- PLANTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes but Not Limited to: 1. Furnish and install landscaping plants as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 84 23: Irrigation system. 2. Section 32 90 01: Common Planting Requirements. 3. Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Hardiness Zone:A hardiness zone is a more precisely geographically-defined zone within an Eco-Region in which a specific category of plant life is capable of growing, as defined by temperature hardiness,or ability to withstand the minimum temperatures of the zone. Hardiness Zones may be defined by one of two sources: a. Sunset Western Garden Book Maps. b. USDA Hardiness Zone Map. Plant Hardiness zone sources shall be listed by the architect through the planting and irrigation design process. 2. Hydro-Zone: Plants grouped by water needs(similar Crop Coefficients(Kc),organized into one irrigation zone. 3. Reference Evapotranspiration (ETo): The total water lost from the soil (evaporation) and from the plant surface (transpiration) over some period. B. Reference Standards: 1. American Nursery& Landscape Association/American National Standards Institute: a. ANLA/ANSI Z60.1-2004, 'American Standard for Nursery Stock.' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Top dressing mulch and/or gravel for approval before delivery to site. B. Informational Submittals: PLANTS 32 93 00- 1 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1. Sustainable Design Submittals: a. Product Data: 1) For water efficient landscape. 2) For water use reduction. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual:. a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Installer Instructions: a) Provide written instructions covering maintenance requirements by Owner for one year beyond Contract maintenance period. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include final, executed copy of warranty. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver trees, shrubs,ground covers, and plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. 2. Do not prune before delivery, except as approved by Landscape Architect. 3. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. 4. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape. 5. Provide protective covering during delivery. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Handle balled stock by root ball or container. Do not drop trees and shrubs during delivery. 2. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set planting materials in shade and protect from weather and mechanical damage. 3. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, saw dust, or other acceptable material approved by Architect. Do not place on pavement. 4. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 5. Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with fine spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in moist condition. Do not allow plant foliage to dry out. PLANTS 32 93 00-2 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Provide written warranties as follows: a. Guarantee shrubs, ground covers, and vines to live and remain in strong, vigorous, and healthy condition for one year from date landscape installation is accepted as complete. b. Guarantee shrubs and trees to live and remain in strong, vigorous, and healthy condition for one year from date landscape installation is accepted as complete. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Plants: 1. Conform to requirements of Plant List and to ANLA/ANSI Z60.1. 2. Nomenclature: a. Plant names used in Plant List conform to 'Standardized Plant Names' by American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature except in cases not covered. In these instances, follow custom of nursery trade. Plants shall bear a tag showing the genus, species, and variety of at least 10 percent of each species delivered to site. 3. Quality: a. Plants shall be sound, healthy,vigorous,free from plant disease, insect pests or their eggs, noxious weeds, and have healthy, normal root systems. Container stock shall be well established and free of excessive root-bound conditions. b. Do not prune plants or top trees prior to delivery. C. Plant materials shall be subject to approval by Landscape Architect as to size, health, quality, and character. d. Provide plant materials from licensed nursery or grower. 4. Measurements: a. Measure height and spread of specimen plant materials with branches in their normal position as indicated on Drawings or Plant List. b. Measurement should be average of plant, not greatest diameter. C. Plants properly trimmed should be measured same in every direction. d. Where caliper or other dimensions of plant materials are omitted from Plant List, plant materials shall be normal stock for type listed. PLANTS 32 93 00-3 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S e. Plant materials larger than those specified may be supplied, with prior written approval of Landscape Architect, and: 1) If complying with Contract Document requirements in all other respects. 2) If at no additional cost to Owner. 3) If sizes of roots or balls are increased proportionately. 5. Shape and Form: a. Plant materials shall be symmetrical or typical for variety and species and conform to measurements specified in Plant List. b. Well grown material will generally have height equal to or greater than spread. However, spread shall not be less than 2/3's of height. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Planting Mix: 1. Mixture of one part topsoil mix as specified and one part compost & 1/3 bark mulch, or approved commercial landscape mix.. B. Planting Tablets: 1. 21 gram Agriform 20-10-5. C. Pre-Emergent Herbicide: 1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 016200 for definitions of Categories. a. Chipco Dimension Granular by The Andersons Inc, Maumee, IL www.andersonsinc.com. b. Elanco XL2G granular by Crop Data Management Systems, Marysville, CA www.cdms.net. C. Ronstar G granular by Bayer Crop Science, Monheim, Germany www.bayercropscience.com. d. Surflan AS liquid by United Phosphorous Inc,Trenton, NJ www.upi-usa.com. e. Oryzalin 4 A.S. liquid by FarmSaver, Seattle, WA www.farmsaver.com. D. Weed Barrier: 1. Acceptable Products: a. DeWitt Pro 5, woven polypropylene weed barrier. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Evaluation and Assessment: PLANTS 32 93 00-4 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 1. Before proceeding with work, check and verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations between Drawings and site to Architect before proceeding with work of this Section. 2. Plant totals are for convenience only and are not guaranteed. Verify amounts shown on Drawings.All planting indicated on Drawings is required unless indicated otherwise. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Layout individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations and outline areas. Secure Architect's acceptance before planting. Make minor adjustments as may be requested. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Do not commence work of this Section until site work of has been completed and approved. B. Excavation: 1. If underground construction work or obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting holes, Landscape Architect will select alternate locations. 2. Plant Excavation Size: a. Diameter:Twice diameter of root ball or container minimum. b. Depth: Equal to container or root ball depth. See landscape details. 3. Unless excavated material meets topsoil requirements as specified in Section 32 9113, remove from landscape areas and do not use for landscaping purposes. 4. Roughen sides and bottoms of excavations. C. Planting: 1. Removing Binders And Containers: a. Remove top one/third of wire basket and burlap binders. b. Remove plastic and twine binders from around root ball and tree trunk. C. Remove wood boxes from around root ball. Remove box bottoms before positioning plant in hole. After plant is partially planted, remove remainder of box without injuring root ball. 2. Plant immediately after removing binding material and containers. Place tree and shrub root balls on undisturbed soil. After watering and settling, top of tree root balls shall be approximately one inches higher than finished grade and trunk flare is visible. Shrub root balls shall be approximately one inch higher than finished grade 3. Properly cut off broken or frayed roots. PLANTS 32 93 00-5 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 2025 4. Center plant in hole, remove remaining wire basket, and backfill with specified planting mix. Make ring of mounded soil around hole perimeter to form watering basin. 5. Add planting tablets in plant pit as follows. Place tablets in relation to root ball as recommended by Manufacturer. a. One Gallon (4.5 L) Shrub: 1 tablet. b. 5 Gallon (23 L) Shrub/Tree: 3 tablets. C. 15 Gallon (68 L) Tree:4 tablets. d. 24 inches600 mm) Box Tree or greater: 6 Tablets. 6. Fill landscape excavations tamped planting mix. Settle by firming and watering to ensure top of ball one inch higher than surrounding soil. 7. Do not use muddy soil for backfilling. 8. Make adjustments in positions of plants as directed by Landscape Architect. 9. Thoroughly water palms and shrubs immediately after planting. D. Ground Covers: 1. Container-grown unless otherwise specified on Drawings. Space evenly to produce a uniform effect, staggered in rows and intervals shown. E. Post Planting Weed Control: 1. Apply specified pre-emergent herbicide to shrub and ground cover planting areas and grass-free areas at tree bases after completion of planting. 2. Areas shall be free of existing weed growth before application of herbicide. 3. Protect existing trees to remain. F. Weed Barrier Fabric: 1. After planting and application or herbicide in shrub beds,apply covering of specified weed barrier fabric. 2. Achieve 100 percent coverage over ground areas. 3. Overlap seams 6 inches minimum. 4. Staple at 5 feet on center each way and within 3 inches of edge of shrub bed,with two at each corner. END OF SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTS 32 93 00-6 La Retama Central Library Exterior Renovations-#23181 January 10, 202S • GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING • MATERIALS ENGINEERING &TESTING • SOILS • ASPHALT • CONCRETE e 9y A UES Company GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED LA RETAMA LIBRARY EXTERIOR RENOVATION 805 COMANCHE STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ROCK ENGINEERING REPORT NUMBER: G124133 PREPARED FOR: TURNER RAMIREZ ARCHITECTS 3751 S. ALAMEDA STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78411 MAY 7, 2024 PREPARED BY: ROCK ENGINEERING & TESTING LABORATORY, LLC 6817 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78409 . ,•. P: (361) 883-4555; F: (361) 883-4711 w TBPE FIRM NO. 2101 rI ' u + ,nw sw• • w'ti s- 1 ��,�`� y'tio • GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING • CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ENGINEERING& TESTING aAgTa ��� • SOILS •ASPHALT•CONCRETE qy A UES Company May 7, 2024 Turner Ramirez Architects 375' S. Alameda St. Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 Attention: Ms. Kira Bonesteel SUBJECT: SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION, LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM, AND GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED LA RETAMA LIBRARY EXTERIOR RENOVATION 805 Comanche Street Corpus Christi, Texas Rock Engineerinq Job No. — G124133 Dear Ms. Bonesteel, In accordance with our agreement, we have conducted a subsurface investigation, laboratory testing program, and geotechnical evaluation for the above referenced project. The results of this investigation, together with our recommendations, are to be found in the accompanying report, one electronic copy of which is being transmitted for your records and for distribution to the project design team. Often, because of design and construction details that occur on a project, questions arise concerning soil conditions and Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, LLC (TBPE Firm No. 2101), would be pleased to continue its role as the Geotechnical Engineer during project implementation. Rock Engineering also has great interest in providing materials testing and observation services during the construction phase of this project. If you will advise us of the appropriate time to discuss these engineering services, we will be pleased to meet with you at your convenience. Sincerely, James P Bauer, P.E. Corpus Christi Branch Manager ROCK ENGINEERING& TESTING LABORATORY,LLC Corpus Christi San Antonio Round Rock Office:361.883.4555 Office:210.495.8000 Office:512.284.8022 Fax:361.883.4711 Fax:210.495.8015 Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St. 10856 Vandale 7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi,TX 78409 San Antonio,TX 78216 Round Rock,TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION, LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM, AND GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED LA RETAMA LIBRARY EXTERIOR RENOVATION 805 COMANCHE STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ROCK ENGINEERING REPORT NUMBER: G124133 PREPARED FOR: TURNER RAMERIZ ARCHITECTS 3751 S. ALAMEDA STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78411 MAY 7, 2024 PREPARED BY: ROCK ENGINEERING AND TESTING LABORATORY, LLC 6817 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78409 PHONE: (361) 883-4555; FAX: (361) 883-4711 TEXAS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING FIRM REGISTRATION NO. 2101 •ce o F rF h /*: '. / n %�� �JAMES'p��BAUER % /i 12920 ' 01 fA ,<M O:°4�: AL James P. Bauer, P.E. Karl G. Crenwelge, P.E. Corpus Christi Branch Manager Senior Project Engineer I C,1 6 oR'ro y�o Ay A UES Company TABLE OF CONTENTS Page INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................................................... 1 Authorization........................................................................................................................................................ 1 Purposeand Scope............................................................................................................................................. 1 General................................................................................................................................................................ 1 SITEDESCRIPTION...............................................................................................................................................2 FIELDEXPLORATION...........................................................................................................................................2 Scope...................................................................................................................................................................2 Drilling and Sampling Procedures....................................................................................................................... 3 FieldTests and Observations.............................................................................................................................. 3 LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM ..................................................................................................................4 SUBSURFACECONDITIONS................................................................................................................................4 General................................................................................................................................................................4 SoilConditions..................................................................................................................................................... 5 GroundwaterObservations.................................................................................................................................. 5 OSHASoil Type Classification............................................................................................................................ 5 SeismicSite Classification................................................................................................................................... 6 GEOTECHNICALDISCUSSION............................................................................................................................6 ProjectDescription............................................................................................................................................... 6 PVRDiscussion................................................................................................................................................... 7 FOUNDATION TYPES CONSIDERED ..................................................................................................................7 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS..................................................................................................................8 Stiffened Slab-on-Grade Foundation Recommendations....................................................................................8 FloorSlabs........................................................................................................................................................... 9 Straight Shaft Drilled Pier Foundations Recommendations............................................................................. 10 Floor Slabs used with Drilled Piers.................................................................................................................... 11 LateralPier Analysis.......................................................................................................................................... 11 SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS ....................................................................................................................... 12 Drainage and Flatwork Construction Considerations........................................................................................ 12 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS................................................................................................................ 13 SitePreparation................................................................................................................................................. 13 SelectFill ........................................................................................................................................................... 13 Drilled, Cast-in-Place, Pier Construction Considerations.................................................................................. 14 Earthwork and Foundation Acceptance............................................................................................................. 15 VaporRetarder.................................................................................................................................................. 15 Utilities............................................................................................................................................................... 16 Expansionand Control Joints............................................................................................................................ 16 GENERALCOMMENTS....................................................................................................................................... 16 APPENDIX: Site Vicinity Map Boring Location Plan Boring Logs B-1 and B-2 Key to Soil Classification and Symbols May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of soil exploration and geotechnical analysis for the proposed La Retama Library Exterior Renovation project located at 805 Comanche Street in Corpus Christi, Texas. The project includes the construction of a new two-story open patio addition, with a balcony, to the existing library. Authorization The scope of work for this project was performed in accordance with a Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, LLC, Proposal No. CGP031424B, Revision 2, dated March 25, 2024. The scope of work and fee was approved by Ms. Kira Bonesteel representing Turner Ramirez Architects, on March 25, 2024. The signed proposal was delivered to Rock Engineering via email transmission. Purpose and Scope The purpose of this exploration was to evaluate the soil and groundwater conditions at the site and to provide geotechnical recommendations for the proposed La Retama Library Exterior Renovation project. The scope of the exploration and analysis included the subsurface exploration, field and laboratory testing, engineering analysis and evaluation of the subsurface soils, provision of geotechnical recommendations, and preparation of this report. The scope of work for this project was determined by Turner Ramirez Architects. The scope of services did not include an environmental assessment. Any statements in this report, or on the boring logs, regarding odors, colors, unusual or suspicious items or conditions are strictly for the information of the client. General The exploration and analysis of the subsurface conditions reported herein are considered sufficient in detail and scope to provide geotechnical recommendations for the proposed project. The information submitted for the proposed project is based on project details provided by Turner Ramirez Architects, as well as the soil information obtained at the boring locations. If the designers require additional soil parameters to complete the design and this information can be obtained from the soil data and laboratory tests performed within the scope of work included in our proposal for this project, then Rock Engineering will provide the additional information requested as a supplement to this report. The Geotechnical Engineer states that the findings, recommendations, specifications or professional advice contained herein have been presented after being prepared in a manner consistent with that level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by reputable members of the Geotechnical Engineer's profession practicing contemporaneously under similar conditions in the locality of the project. Page 1 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas Rock Engineering operates in general accordance with, "Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction, (ASTM D3740)." No other representations are expressed or implied, and no warranty or guarantee is included or intended. This study was conducted for Turner Rameriz Architects and the design team for the specific application to the proposed La Retama Library Exterior Renovation project located at 805 Comanche Street in Corpus Christi, Texas. SITE DESCRIPTION The site of the planned La Retama Library Exterior Renovation project is located at 805 Comanche Street in Corpus Christi, Texas. Specifically, the site is located at the southwest corner of the intersection of Comanche Street and S. Tancanua Street,just north of the Blucher Nature Park. A Site Vicinity Map is presented in the Appendix. The site slopes considerable downward away from the south side of the existing library building. The ground surface is covered with grass and there are various trees around the area. Overhead utilities were also observed around the site as was evidence of underground utilities. At the time of our field investigation the condition of the ground surface was firm and did not pose any significant difficulties to the drill crews moving their equipment. FIELD EXPLORATION Scope The field exploration performed to evaluate the engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials included reconnaissance of the project site, performing the boring operations, and obtaining disturbed split-spoon samples and relatively undisturbed Shelby tube samples. During the sample recovery operations, the soils encountered were classified and recorded on the boring logs in accordance with "Standard Guide for Field Logging of Subsurface Exploration of Soil and Rock, (ASTM D5434)." Two (2) borings were performed for the purpose of providing geotechnical recommendations for the La Retama Library Exterior Renovation project. The following table provides the boring identification, general boring location, boring depths and GPS coordinates. Boring Identification Boring Depth (ft) GPS Coordinates B-1 35 N 27.792440 W 97.399120 B-2 35 N 27.79251 0 W 97.398860 Page 2 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas The number and locations of the borings were determined by the client, while Rock Engineering determined the boring depths, the final boring locations, and performed the drilling operations. The GPS coordinates were obtained at boring locations using a Garmin GPS model eTrex and are provided in this report and on the boring logs. It should be noted that the borings were relocated about 25 feet south of their originally planned location due to the presence of utilities. Upon completion of the drilling operations and obtaining the groundwater observations, the borings were backfilled with excess soils obtained during drilling operations. A Boring Location Plan is provided in the Appendix of this report. The borings performed for this project were used to determine the classification, strengths and plasticity of the subgrade soils. The information provided on the boring logs includes boring location, boring depth, soil classification, soil strengths, and laboratory test results. The boring logs are included in the Appendix. Drilling and Sampling Procedures The test borings were performed using a drilling rig equipped with a rotary head turning hollow stem augers to advance the boreholes. Disturbed soil samples were obtained employing split- barrel sampling procedures in general accordance with the procedures for, "Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils, (ASTM D1586)." Relatively undisturbed soil samples were obtained using thin-wall tube sampling procedures in general accordance with, "Thin Walled Tube Sampling of Soils, (ASTM D1587)." The samples obtained by this procedure were extruded by a hydraulic ram in the field. The samples were visually classified, placed in plastic bags, marked according to boring number, depth and any other pertinent field data, stored in special containers and delivered to the laboratory for testing. Field Tests and Observations Standard Penetration Tests (SPTs)— During the sampling procedures, SPTs were performed to obtain the standard penetration value of the soil at select intervals. The standard penetration value (N) is defined as the number of blows of a 140-pound hammer, falling 30 inches, required to advance the split-barrel sampler 1-foot into the soil. The sampler is lowered to the bottom of the previously cleaned drill hole and advanced by blows from the hammer. The number of blows is recorded for each of three successive 6-inch penetrations. The "N" value is obtained by adding the second and third 6-inch increment number of blows. An automatic hammer was utilized when performing SPTs. An automatic hammer is usually taken as having an efficiency of one. The results of standard penetration test indicate the relative density of cohesionless soils and comparative consistency of cohesive soils, thereby providing a basis for estimating the relative strength and compressibility of the soil profile components. Water Level Observations — Water level observations were obtained during the test boring operations. Water level observations are noted on the boring logs provided in the Appendix. In relatively pervious soils, such as sandy soils, the indicated depths are usually reliable groundwater levels. In relatively impervious soils, such as clayey soils, a suitable estimate of the groundwater depth may not be possible, even after several days of observation. Seasonal variations, temperature, land-use, proximity to large water bodies, tidal fluctuations and recent Page 3 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas rainfall conditions may influence the depth to the groundwater. The amount of water in open boreholes largely depends on the permeability of the soils encountered at the boring locations. Ground Surface Elevations — The ground surface elevations at the boring locations were not provided at the time of this report. Therefore, depths referred to in this report are from the ground surface at the boring locations during the time of our field investigation, unless otherwise noted. LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM In addition to the field investigation, a laboratory testing program was conducted to determine additional pertinent engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials necessary in analyzing the behavior of the subgrade soils and supported improvements for the proposed project. The laboratory testing program included supplementary visual classification (ASTM D2487) and water content tests (ASTM D2216) on the samples. In addition, selected samples were subjected to Atterberg limits tests (ASTM D4318)and percent material finer than the#200 sieve tests (ASTM D1140). The estimated soil strengths of the cohesive samples were obtained using a hand penetrometer. The laboratory testing program was conducted in general accordance with applicable ASTM Specifications. The results of these tests are to be found on the accompanying boring logs provided in the Appendix. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS General The types of soil materials encountered in the test borings have been visually classified and are described in detail on the boring logs. The results of the standard penetration tests, hand penetrometer values, water level observations, and laboratory tests are presented on the boring logs. Representative samples of the soils were placed in polyethylene bags and are now stored in the laboratory for further analysis, if desired. Unless notified to the contrary, the samples will be disposed of three months after issuance of this report. The stratification of the soil, as shown on the boring logs, represents the soil conditions at the actual boring locations. Variations may occur between, or beyond, the boring locations. Lines of demarcation represent the approximate boundary between different soil types, but the transition may be gradual, or not clearly defined. It should be noted that, whereas the test borings were drilled and sampled by experienced drillers, it is sometimes difficult to record changes in stratification within narrow limits. In the absence of foreign substances, it is also difficult to distinguish between discolored soils and clean soil fill. Page 4 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas Soil Conditions The generalized soil conditions encountered have been summarized and soil properties including soil classification, strength, and plasticity are provided in the following tables. Soil Profile Borings B-1 and B-2 D Description LL PI C Ye 4200 P N 0-6 CLAYEY Sand 33 18 750 -- 115 33 -- 7-12 6-11 CLAYEY Sand 32 19 1,100 -- 120 33 -- 11-23 11-13 Fat CLAY 57 39 1,700 -- 120 88 -- 17 13-18 Fat CLAY and Lean 31 47 1,500 -- 120 99 4.5 12 CLAY with Sand 18-35 Fat CLAY and Lean/Fat 43-50 27-34 2,800 -- 120 77-78 3.0-4.5 -- CLAY with Sand Where: D = Depth in feet below existing grade LL = Liquid Limit(%) PI = Plasticity Index NP = Non plastic C = Soil Cohesion, psf(undrained) � =Angle of Internal Friction, deg. (undrained) ye = Effective soil unit weight, pcf 4200 = Material passing #200 sieve, % P = Hand penetrometer value range, tsf N = Standard Penetration Test value, blows per foot Exceptions to the above generalized profiles do exist and are shown in detail on the Boring logs. Most notable is the presence of silty sand from 3 to 8 feet in Boring B-2 and poorly graded sand from 10 to 13 feet in Boring B-1. Detailed descriptions of the soils encountered at the boring locations are provided on the boring logs included in the Appendix. Groundwater Observations Groundwater was not observed in the borings at the time of this investigation. It should be noted that the water level in open boreholes may require several hours to several days to stabilize depending on the permeability of the soils and that groundwater levels at this site may be subject to seasonal conditions, recent rainfall, drought or temperature effects. OSHA Soil Type Classification The table below provides a summary of the OSHA Soil Type Classification based on the soils encountered at the boring locations. Depth OSHA Soil Type (feet) Description Classification 0-3 & Cohesive Soil Above the Water Table Type B 13-20 (Average Undrained Shear Strength is equal to or greater than 500 psf) 3-13 Non-Cohesive Soil (Sand) Type C Page 5 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas It should be noted that the contractor's "competent person" shall make the final determination of the OSHA Soil Type during excavation of the soils at the jobsite. During excavation operations, any soil from which water is freely seeping should be downgraded to Type C soil. Slope protection for excavations greater than 20 feet need to be designed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Texas. The maximum allowable slopes during construction for soil OSHA soil types are provided in the following table. Guidelines for Maximum Allowable Slopes Soil or Rock Type Max. Allow. Slopes for Excavations < Than 20' Deep Type B 1 Horizontal : 1 Vertical Type C 1'/ Horizontal : 1 Vertical Guidelines for maximum allowable slopes were obtained from OSHA documents, but do not take into account any recent revisions or the stability of long-term unprotected slopes. Long term unprotected slopes will likely require much flatter slopes. The guidelines presented herein for slopes do not imply Rock Engineering is taking responsibility for construction site safety; this responsibility falls entirely upon the contractor and his responsible person. The contractor shall comply with all rules, ordinances and other requirements to comply with safe construction practices. Seismic Site Classification In accordance with the International Building Code (IBC), "When the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the site class, Site Class D shall be used unless it is determined that Site Class E or F soil is likely to be present at the site." Since our field investigations have not included a 100-foot deep boring, by definition the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail. Site Class D soils should have a Standard Penetration Resistance of 15 to 50, or an undrained shear strength between 1,000 and 2,000 pounds per square foot (psf). The predominate soil strengths at this site generally meet or exceed the typical strength range above and therefore the site should be classified as Seismic Site Class D. GEOTECHNICAL DISCUSSION Project Description Based on information provided to Rock Engineering, the project will include the construction of a new two-story patio addition and balcony with an anticipated footprint on the order of approximately 1,400 square feet. The patio is planned to be constructed on the south side of the existing library structure. Page 6 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas Rock Engineering has not been provided with existing topographic information, grading plans or finished floor slab elevations, or estimated structural loading information. Once this information becomes available, it should be provided to Rock Engineering so that we can review our recommendations and provide additional recommendations as necessary. PVR Discussion The laboratory test results indicate that the subsoils in the active zone at this site are low in plasticity. The calculated total potential vertical rise (PVR) at this site is estimated to be on the order of about 1 to V/2 inches. This PVR value was calculated using the Texas Department of Transportation Method TEX-124E and took into account the average depth of active zone, estimated to extend to a depth of approximately 15 feet and the Atterberg limits test result of the soils encountered within the active zone. It is important to note that the PVR value provided herein was calculated using the Texas Department of Transportation Method TEX-124E and represents the vertical rise that can be experienced by relatively dry subsoils subjected to increases in soil moisture content resulting from capillary or surface water. The TEX-124E method is widely used in Texas for predicting expansive soil movements and has been found to be reasonably accurate for moisture variations resulting from normal seasonal and climatic controlled conditions (environmental conditions). The actual movement of the subsoils is dependent upon their change in moisture content. Conditions that allow the soils to become saturated or significantly exceed typical moisture variations resulting from environmental conditions or exceed the dry and wet boundary conditions established by the TEX-124E method, such as poor drainage and/or broken utilities may result in 2 to 3 times or more the magnitude of moisture related soil movements than estimated by the PVR provided herein. Differential vertical movements may occur over a distance equal to the depth of the active zone and can potentially be equal to the expected total movements. The estimated PVR value provided above are based on the floor systems applying a sustained surcharge load of approximately 1.0 pound per square inch on the subgrade soils resulting in a 4 to 6-inch concrete finished floor slab elevation 11/2 feet above the average grade elevation at the site. FOUNDATION TYPES CONSIDERED Rock Engineering has evaluated various potential foundation alternatives in consideration of the type of structure proposed, the desired foundations systems for use, and the soil and groundwater conditions present at this site. Either a shallow foundation system foundation system consisting of either a stiffened slab-on-grade, or a deep foundation consisting of drilled piers are feasible to support the proposed structure. These types of foundation are briefly described below. Page 7 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas Slab-on-Grade Foundation — A stiffened grid type beam and slab foundation (waffle slab) is used to support relatively light structures where the soil conditions are relatively uniform, and where uplift and settlement can be tolerated. The intent of a waffle slab is to allow the structure and foundation to move up and down freely with soil movements while providing sufficient stiffness to limit differential movements within the superstructure. Straight Sided Drilled Piers — Drilled pier foundations can be used for support of the new structure. Due to the presence of non-cohesive soil layers, temporary casing or the slurry displacement method will need to be utilized to successfully install drilled piers. Recommendations for a stiffened slab-on-grade and deep foundation system are provided in this report. A stiffened slab-on-grade system may be feasible to support the planned building structure at this site provided that the site is prepared as recommended in the "Building Pad Preparation" section of this report. FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS Stiffened Slab-on-Grade Foundation Recommendations A stiffened slab-on-grade foundation (waffle slab) may be feasible to support the proposed structure. It should be noted that rigid exterior walls and interior partitions are subject to distress with the slightest soil related foundation movements, even differential movements as small as inch. Grade beams should be founded within properly compacted select fill soils or native sand soils, at a minimum depth of 2'/2 feet below the finished floor slab elevation. Perimeter grade beams should be founded at least 2 feet below the final exterior grade and can be designed for a net allowable unit soil bearing pressure of 1,300 psf. The net allowable unit soil bearing pressure provided utilizes an approximate design safety factor of 3. Concentrated loads should be placed at widened grade beam locations, at intersection of grade beams or where haunches can be constructed if loading conditions warrant increased bearing area. The beams should be a minimum of 12 inches wide to reduce the potential for localized shear failure and the beams should be spaced at a maximum distance of 20 feet, in both directions. The Structural Engineer may vary beam depths and spacing based on experience designing and constructing similar type structures on sites with similar subsurface soil conditions. Page 8 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas The "Design of Slab-On-Ground Foundations,"published by the Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc. (Aug., 1981), utilizes the design criteria provided in the table below: WRI Design Criteria Climatic Rating (Cw) 17 Effective Plasticity Index 21 Soil/Climatic Rating Factor(1-C) 0.07 Maximum Beam Spacing, Both Directions (ft) 20 WRI slab design criteria provided above considers that the earthwork described in the "Site Preparation" section of this report is performed. A soil supported floor slab is subject to vertical movements as discussed earlier in this report. Even slight differential movements on the order of '/2 inch can cause distress to interior wall partitions and rigid exterior walls or facades supported by a shallow waffle slab foundation, resulting in cosmetic damage. This amount of movement should be understood and addressed during the design phase of the proposed structure planned for construction at this site. Floor Slabs It is feasible to use a grade supported concrete floor slab in conjunction with footings supporting the building structure. It is recommended that the site improvement recommendations provided in the "Building Pad Preparation" section of this report be performed. Soil supported floor slabs are subject to vertical movements. It should be understood that grade-supported floor slabs and shallow foundations are subject to differential movements resulting in potential distress and cosmetic damage to rigid interior walls, floor coverings and partitions. Potential foundation movements and the likelihood that cosmetic damage could occur should be understood and addressed during the design phase of this project. Interior wall partitions should be allowed to move freely with movements of the floating floor slab. Grade supported floor slabs may be separated from the footing supported foundation elements by a permanent expansion joint that allows free vertical movement of the slab. If the floor slabs are separated from the footing supported foundation elements, differential vertical movements may cause problems at critical points such as doors and where interior walls are supported by the interior floor slab and connected to footing supported building components. The floor slabs could alternatively be attached to the footing supported foundation elements. If the floor slabs or interior walls or partitions that are supported on a floating floor slab are connected to footing supported foundation elements, a plastic hinge crack may develop approximately 3 to 10 feet away from and parallel to the foundation elements. Installing a joint parallel to the footing supported foundation element can assist with controlling the location of the plastic hinge crack. Typically, the joint should be constructed 5 to 7 feet away from the connection. Page 9 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas Straight Shaft Drilled Pier Foundations Recommendations If it is essential to demand the highest level of performance from the foundation, then Rock Engineering recommends that a deep foundation system with a suspended structural slab be utilized. Straight shaft drilled piers may require the slurry displacement method, steel casing, or a combination of temporary steel casing and slurry displacement, to properly install the piers. The structural designer can utilize the allowable unit skin friction values for the range in depths included in the following table for straight shaft drilled piers to resist the axial loads given the strengths of the subsurface soils encountered. Allowable Unit Skin Friction Values Depth Below Existing Grade (ft) Allowable Unit Skin Friction (psf) 0-6 Neglect 6-11 265 11-13 455 13-18 390 18-30 700 All depths are referenced from the existing ground surface elevations at the boring locations during the time of our field investigation. The allowable unit skin friction values provided above are based on the strengths of the in-situ soils and utilize a design safety factor of 2 against shear failure. The straight shaft drilled piers should be proportioned to resist axial loads, including uplift forces due to expansive soils and live loading conditions, as well as lateral loading conditions. The piers should be proportioned to be founded at depths between 15 and 30 feet. The piers will be subject to swell uplift forces resulting from adhesion of the expansive soils along the perimeter of the shafts. The swell uplift force can be estimated (in kips) by multiplying the diameter of the pier (in feet) by 10. Uplift can be resisted utilizing the dead load on the pier and the weight of the pier itself. If additional resistance to expansive soil induced uplift is required, the allowable skin friction values below a depth of 15 feet may be utilized in the design. Settlement of a properly designed and constructed straight shaft drilled pier is estimated to be on the order of 1 percent of the shaft diameter of the pier and differential settlements of equally loaded same size drilled shafts should experience differential settlements on the order of '/2 percent of the pier shaft diameters. Straight shaft drilled piers should be spaced no closer than three pier diameters apart measured center to center, to avoid capacity reductions for closely spaced piers. If groups of piers are required to support concentrated loads, the supporting capacity of a group of vertically loaded drilled piers closely spaced could be considerably less than the sum of the capacities Page 10 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas of the individual members comprising the group. The capacity of the group varies as a function of change in size, spacing and stiffness. Axial group capacity may be estimated from the equation below, where E is the group efficiency, N is the number of piers in the group and Q is the single drilled pier capacity. P = E * N * Q Values of group efficiency E increase from about 0.8 at a spacings of 2.5 diameters and then decreases to about 1.0 at a spacing of 3 diameters, where the deep foundations act individually. Detailed analyses of foundation-soil interaction for a specific group spacing would be necessary to define actual efficiency. Floor Slabs used with Drilled Piers If drilled piers are used for supporting the proposed building, a suspended structural floor slab is recommended to be used in conjunction with the drilled piers. The structural slab shall have a minimum 8-inch void space below the bottom of the structural slab and grade beams spanning between the piers. Soil retainers shall be used to ensure that the void space is maintained after construction is completed. All beams spanning between piers shall be structurally connected to the piers. Carton forms may be utilized to create the minimum 4-inch void space, or a crawl space can be constructed. A crawl space will allow for hanging of underfloor utilities such that differential movements between the underfloor soils and the relatively fixed floor slabs, and the associated differential movements between buried underfloor utilities and the structures, should not pose potential future issues at utility penetrations. In addition, a crawl space will allow for future maintenance beneath the structures, if necessary. If a crawl space is utilized, a mud slab should be used in the underfloor area and provisions should be made to remove any water that enters the crawl space and not allow water to accumulate. Lateral Pier Analysis Drilled pier foundations may be subjected to lateral loads. Lateral pier analysis programs such as L-pile will require the following soil parameters for this site: L-Pile Design Criteria— Drilled Piers in Building Area K D Description C(clay only) (sand only) 'Ye clay sand E50(clay only) 0-6 CLAY/SAND Neglect 6-11 CLAY or SAND 1,100 30 120 500 90 0.007 11-13 CLAY or SAND 1,300 30 120 500 90 0.007 13-18 CLAY 1,500 -- 120 500 -- 0.007 18-30 CLAY 2,800 -- 120 1,000 -- 0.005 Page 11 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas Where: D = depth (ft) yE = effective unit weight, pcf C = shear strength, psf K= modulus of subgrade reaction (pci) = angle of internal friction, deg. E50 = 50% strain value K and E50 values were estimated from known correlations. The structural engineer should analyze both sand and clay cases and utilize more conservative results. SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS Drainage and Flatwork Construction Considerations The change in moisture content of the plastic clay soils is the primary mechanism resulting in the volumetric changes of the supporting soils. Provisions in the site development should be made in order to maintain relatively uniform moisture contents of the supporting soils. A number of measures may be used to attain a reduction in subsoil moisture content variations. Some of these measures are outlined below: • During construction, positive drainage schemes should be implemented to prevent ponding of water on the subgrade. • Positive drainage should be maintained around the structures and site flatwork through roof/gutter systems connected to piping or directed to paved surfaces, transmitting water away from the foundation perimeters and site flatwork. In addition, positive grades sloping away from the foundations and site flatwork should be designed and implemented. • We recommend that an effective site drainage plan be devised by others prior to commencement of construction to provide positive drainage away from the site improvements and off the site, both during, and after construction. • The top 2 feet of utility trenches should be backfilled with low plasticity clays to assure the trenches do not serve as aqueducts that could transport water beneath the structures and flatwork due to excessive surface water infiltration. Clay plugs or collars should also be installed in utility trenches just outside of the building pads and/or underfloor areas to prevent water from moving laterally into the select fill pad or underfloor areas, whichever is applicable, of the buildings. • Vegetation placed in landscape beds that are adjacent to the structure and site flatwork should be limited to plants and shrubs that will not exceed a mature height of 3 feet. Large bushes and trees should be planted away from the foundation and flatwork at a distance that will exceed their full mature height and canopy width. Page 12 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas • Individual concrete panels of site flatwork should be dowelled together to minimize trip hazards as a result of differential movements within the flatwork. • Site flatwork should be designed to drain quickly with a minimum positive slope of 1 percent. All project features beyond the scope of those discussed above should be planned and designed similarly to attain a region of relatively uniform moisture content within the foundation and flatwork areas. Poor drainage schemes are generally the primary cause of foundation and flatwork problems in South Texas. CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS Site Preparation In areas where flatwork is to be constructed and where slabs will be cast on grade, soil, vegetation, or excessively organic materials should be completely removed to a minimum depth of 6 inches or as needed for complete removal below the existing site grades. Upon completion of stripping, the upper 3 feet of the dry native clayey sand soils should be removed, stockpiled, moisture conditioned and recompacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698) with the moisture content maintained at or above the optimum moisture content. If any soft areas are identified on the exposed subgrade layer, those soils should be removed and recompacted in place. The excavation should extend laterally a minimum distance of 5 feet outside the perimeter of the proposed slab area (and associated appurtenances) and/or flatwork. Upon completion of the subgrade preparation operations, properly compacted "Select Fill" shall be placed to provide a finished floor slab elevation at least 1'/2 feet above the existing surrounding grade elevation. The fill shall be placed in such a manner to provide a uniform fill pad thickness supporting the proposed structure. Select Fill Imported select fill material used at this site should be homogenous, free from organics and other deleterious materials and should have a maximum liquid limit of 40 percent and a plasticity index (PI) between 7 and 18. The select fill soils shall have a minimum of 35 percent passing the #200 sieve and no soil particles exceeding 1'/2 inches will be permitted. The fill should be placed in no greater than 8-inch thick loose lifts and then compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698), and at, or above, the optimum moisture content. The native soils extending to a depth of 3 feet appear to meet the select fill requirements. Page 13 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas In addition to the minimum density requirements listed above, the soil must be stable, i.e., not "pumping" or rutting excessively under construction traffic, prior to placing additional fill or constructing foundations, floor slabs, or flatwork. Field density tests should be performed on each lift of fill to document that proper compaction is achieved. Drilled, Cast-in-Place, Pier Construction Considerations For deep drilled pier construction at this site, temporary steel casing may be required. The appropriate method or combination of methods should be determined by the pier installation contractor. Proper installation methods will also depend on the final foundation design depths and the site and groundwater conditions at the time of construction. The groundwater conditions at the site at the time of pier installation should be verified by the contractor. Care must be taken during concrete placement and casing removal to ensure that sufficient concrete head is maintained inside the casing to prevent soil intrusions in the pier concrete. Concrete should be placed as soon as possible after all loose material has been removed, the pier excavation inspected and reinforcing steel installed. A relatively high slump concrete mix (6 to 7-inches) is suggested to minimize problems related to the concrete adhering to the casing as the casing is removed and to minimize aggregate segregation caused by the reinforcing steel. Free fall of concrete into the pier excavation is permitted provided the concrete can be placed into the pier excavation without striking the sides of the excavation or hitting the rebar. It should be noted that research has shown that free fall concrete guided at the top of the excavation to avoid contact with the sides of the pier excavation and reinforcing steel can drop more than 80 feet without any measurable segregation and the strength of the concrete was not adversely affected as long as the concrete was falling through air. In situations where it is impossible for the concrete to fall freely without striking the rebar cage or sides of the pier excavation the free fall should be limited to 10 feet or placed with a tremie. Pier excavations should not be allowed to stay open overnight. The successful placement of a pier foundation is dependent on the expertise of the drilled pier foundation contractor. It is recommended that a test pier excavation be performed at the site to verify groundwater conditions at the specific location and time, and to ensure that the proper method of pier installation is being performed. The Geotechnical Engineer, or his designated representative, should be present to witness the test pier operations as well as all of the production pier installation activities. Page 14 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas Earthwork and Foundation Acceptance Exposure to the environment may weaken the soils at the foundation bearing levels if the excavations remain open for long periods of time. Therefore, it is recommended that the foundation excavations be extended to final grade and that the foundation and flatwork be constructed as soon as possible to minimize potential damage to the bearing soils. The foundation bearing levels should be free of loose soil, ponded water or debris and should be observed prior to concreting or placing flatwork constituents by the Geotechnical Engineer, or his designated representative. Foundation concrete or flatwork constituents should not be placed on soils that have been disturbed by rainfall or seepage. If the bearing soils are softened by surface water intrusion, or by desiccation, the unsuitable soils must be removed from the foundation or flatwork excavations and be replaced with properly compacted fill prior to placement of concrete or flatwork constituents per Engineer's direction. The Geotechnical Engineer, or his designated representative, should monitor subgrade preparation and placement of fill. As a guideline, a minimum of one in-place density test shall be performed on the subgrade soils and each subsequent lift of fill for each 3,000 square feet, or a minimum of three in-place density tests per testing interval, whichever is greater. Any areas not meeting the required compaction should be recompacted and retested until compliance is met. Vapor Retarder A vapor retarder with a permeance of less than 0.3 US perms (ASTM E96) should be placed under the concrete floor slabs on carton forms or prepared building pad materials, as applicable, to reduce the transmission of water vapor from the supporting soil through the concrete slab and to function as a slip sheet to reduce subgrade drag friction. Polyethylene film, or polyolefin, with a minimum thickness of 10 mils (0.25 mm) is typically used for reduced vapor transmission and durability during and after its installation. The vapor retarder should be installed according to the ASTM E1643, "Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs." All penetrations through the vapor retarder should be sealed to ensure its integrity. The vapor retarder should be taped around all openings to ensure the effectiveness of the barrier. Grade stakes should not be driven through the barrier and care should be taken to avoid punctures during reinforcement and concrete placement. Placement of slab concrete directly on the vapor retarder increases the risks of surface dusting, blistering and slab curling making good concrete practice critical. A low water to cement ratio concrete mix design, combined with proper and adequate curing procedures, will help ensure a good quality slab. Page 15 of 16 May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas Where vapor transmission is not a concern, elimination of the vapor retarder may provide improvements in finishing characteristics and reductions in the risks of surface dusting, blistering and slab curling. However, exposure of portions of the subgrade or granular layer, such as at blockouts for columns or utility penetrations to inclement weather during construction may create excessive or deficient moisture conditions beneath portions of the slab that have already been placed. Blockouts for slab penetrations should be protected if a vapor retarder is omitted. ACI 302.1 R- 96 "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction," recommends that a vapor retarder or vapor barrier be used only when required by the specific application. Utilities Utilities that project through slabs, foundations or walls should be designed with either some degree of flexibility, or with sleeves, in order to prevent damage to these lines should vertical movement occur. Expansion and Control Joints Expansion and control joints should be designed and placed in various portions of the structures. Properly planned placement of these joints will assist in controlling the degree and location of material cracking that normally occurs due to material shrinkage, thermal affects, soil movements and other related structural conditions. GENERAL COMMENTS If significant changes are made in the character or location of the proposed La Retama Library Exterior Renovation project, a consultation should be arranged to review any changes with respect to the prevailing soil conditions. At that time, it may be necessary to submit supplementary recommendations. It is recommended that the services of Rock Engineering be engaged to test and evaluate the soils in the foundation and pavement excavations in order to verify that the subgrade soils are consistent with those encountered in the borings. Rock Engineering cannot accept any responsibility for any conditions that deviate from those described in this report, nor for the performance of the foundations or pavements if not engaged to also provide construction observation and testing for this project. If it is required for Rock Engineering to accept any liability, then Rock Engineering must agree with the plans and perform observation during construction as we recommend. All sheeting, shoring and bracing of trenches, pits and excavations should be made the responsibility of the contractor and should comply with all current and applicable local, state and federal safety codes, regulations and practices, including the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Page 16 of 16 APPENDIX ROCK . . . . � Sei�r`Center,,� I + j o; it ■ - Holiday Inn Corpus-♦ it ' ' - • I.1... r.r �oc*oastalfBehd Real'Estate � i 'earHomes,foy ' fD : �ena emo is a04 C:Bus-SM1txationLN r eo ardSt. _ r• .w. .r w 0 NlilsodPlar;�•t" � +� R 10 _ C ♦r WArIB—d WIIO S♦ - •`oastal Be it tY ,.. "wdddadx �+ Corpus Christi Cathedr,l"+ • ` /Water Street�0 ster Bar d ,II Lip3nrSt r t4•• anUSt # �jBestlYestern, lf�Afrhl" • r�r' � � _ �'in �mdxsr*' ♦•Corp"u Ghris'ti •: 'r T� i r Ir= r� 'i L etama Comanche St _ .,j r •/ ■ � ;1 ComancheS r GE lira Yib�ary tJ�rr, ••. y_ r ♦T•H�'. �. c �� ` WRO";urger"♦ �riJ•i/ swm / i r ,1[lTG Allen fl a� ergo dale• my owers (;,� A Center Elememta�ry't�chool) E !; r/4 K. ,_ 1 ♦ Corpus Christi �L'P'' a r' r, T 1 t, II•{' ` 55ett$t ' .. Ay' Y r� F.. CopQFi ° s'agey ,,� ►,bus :r � I Steak an Se foo 3 Sherrill Park• s""s-e't?St. / 'wi •� - A ♦' �JtC` P t''.' A� i• _ dIIt . ■American Cab'Company-. Amer In Uab Com,, es Wuec P=;ving e •anBar am automotive ti +�" _ r 7�Eleve �io�E arya Arts $3 Big Meal Dea ���`� r'tie • GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING ' I • CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ENGINEERING& TESTING �g4To ��� • SOILS •ASPHALT•CONCRETE Ay A UES Company BORING LOCATION PLAN _ a-7e' -t ' ice•t; '. ,' �U �I I 1 • I _ :1 r May 7, 2024 LA RETAMA LIBRARY EXTERIOR RENOVATION Attn: Ms. Kira Bonesteel 805 Comanche Street Rock Engineering Job Number G124133 Corpus Christi, Texas ROCK ENGINEERING& TESTING LABORATORY, LLC. Corpus Christi San Antonio Round Rock Office:361.883.4555 Office:210.495.8000 Office:512.284.8022 Fax:361.883.4711 Fax:210.495.8015 Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St. 10856 Vandale 7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi,TX 78409 San Antonio,TX 78216 Round Rock,TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com LOG OF BORING B-1 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLC. PROJECT: La Retama Library Exterior Renovation Corp Leopard Street LOCATION: 805 Comanche Street, Corpus Christi, Texas Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 P °04 Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124133 Fax: A UES Company DATE(S) DRILLED: 4/9/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Hollow Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: z wQ > Groundwater encountered at 30 feet during drilling. w � - ? � Dry and caved at 25 feet upon completion. CID z g J H F LL O J H } LL O O `W C7 U U t� ~L N m Z 0 (n(n U)(n K 0 � (n z (n co 0 0 3 <n') > > Q Q W o 0Z - z a o 0 0 Ln o a a r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A ° o ai uai z a 0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM Ss 8-1 N=8 4 CLAYEY SAND,dark brown, dry, stiff. SSN=7 6 Same as above,firm. 5 SS N=19 8 32 13 19 33 S-3 Same as above, very stiff. (SC) SS N=11 7 S-4 Same as above, dark brown and brown, stiff. 10 ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ SS N=17 10 S S POORLY GRADED SAND WITH SILT, brown, moist, medium dense. Ss FAT CLAYCH ,with calcareous N=12 31 71 24 47 99 deposits, brown, moist, stiff. 15 S-6 ( ) ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ ST P=4.5+ 18 S-p FAT CLAY WITH SAND, greenish gray, moist, hard. 20 ST P=4.5+ 21 50 16 34 78 S_8 Same as above, brown and greenish gray. (CH) N 25 N N V J W ll s 9 P=4.0 24 Same as above, brown, very stiff. °� 30 a L? K ST M S-10 P—3.5 29 Same as above. M 35 N Boring terminated at 35 feet. c� Z o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qe- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations performed by Rock Engineering at GPS coordinates p N 27.79244 W 97.39912 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 J LOG OF BORING B-2 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects Rock Engineering and Testing Labratory, LLC. PROJECT: La Retama Library Exterior Renovation Corp Leopard Street LOCATION: 805 Comanche Street, Corpus Christi, Texas Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 P °qqr `mac Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124133 °qr Fax: A UES Company DATE(S) DRILLED: 4/9/2029 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Hollow Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Z wLu Q > Groundwater(GW)not encountered during drilling. w ? � Dry and caved at 25 feet upon completion. J CoF Z r > C) 3.5 hour delayed reading:GW at 19 feet and caved at 22 feet. p D �LLC7 U U U N m Z 0 (n(n U)(n K (� U) Z (n co 0 0 ��(nZ > > Q ¢ w 0 � Z Z a 2 o 0 0 ° a ii r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A ° o ai uai z a 0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM SS N=12 9 33 15 18 33 8_1 CLAYEY SAND(SC), dark brown, dry, stiff. --------------------- ---- -- -------------------------------- SS N=12 4 S-2 SILTY SAND, brown, dry, medium dense. 5 SS N=19 2 S-3 Same as above. ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- —————————————————————————————— SS N=23 8 S_4 CLAYEY SAND brown, dry, very stiff. 10 ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ ss S 5 N=17 19 57 18 39 88 FAT CLAY(CH),with calcareous deposits, greenish gray and brown, moist,very stiff. ST P=4.5+ 16 LEAN CLAY WITH SAND with calcareous de osits, brown, 15 S-6 p moist, hard. ST 20 P=4.5+ 20 43 16 27 77 8_7 Same as above, greenish gray. ST p=3.0 15 8-8 Same as above,very stiff. N 25 N N V UJ 0 s 9 P=4.5+ 27 FAT CLAY, brown, moist, hard. °� 30 a K ST M S-10 P—4.5+ 17 Same as above. M 35 N Boring terminated at 35 feet. c� o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qc- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations performed by Rock Engineering at GPS coordinates p N 27.79251 W 97.39886 0 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 0 J ,a s Rock Engineering&Testing Laboratory 6817 Leopard Street Engineering&Testing Corpus Christi,TX 78409-1703 <, Laboratory, LLC Telephone: 361-883-4555 9a Fax: 361-883-4711 4y A UES Company KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND SYMBOLS UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM TERMS CHARACTERIZING SOIL MAJOR DIVISIONS SYMBOL NAME STRUCTURE GW .'0 Well Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures, SLICKENSIDED-having inclined planes of little or no fines weakness that are slick and glossy in appearance GRAVEL GP o 3° Poorly Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures, AND o p little or no fines FISSURED-containing shrinkage cracks, GRAVELLY frequently filled with fine sand or silt; usually SOILS GM o more or less vertical Silty Gravels, Gravel-Sand-Silt mixtures LAMINATED(VARVED)-composed of thin layers of varying color and texture, usually grading from COARSE GC WE Clayey Gravels, Gravel-Sand-Clay Mixtures sand or silt at the bottom to clay at the top GRAINED CRUMBLY-cohesive soils which break into small SOILS Well Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands,little or no SW fines blocks or crumbs on drying Poorly Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands,little or CALCAREOUS-containing appreciable quantities of calcium carbonate,generally nodular SAND SP no fines AND SANDY WELL GRADED-having wide range in grain sizes SOILS SM Silty Sands, Sand-Silt Mixtures and substantial amounts of all intermediate particle sizes SC Clayey Sands,Sand-Clay mixtures POORLY GRADED-predominantly of one grain size uniformly graded)or having a range of sizes with some intermediate size missing(gap or skip ML Inorganic Silts and very fine Sands, Rock Flour, graded) Silty or Clayey fine Sands or Clayey Silts SILTS AND Inorganic Clays of low to medium plasticity, SYMBOLS FOR TEST DATA CLAYS CL Gravelly Clays,Sandy Clays,Silty Clays, Lean ILL<50 Clays — Groundwater Level Organic Silts and Organic Silt-Clays of low - (Initial Reading) FINE �L plasticity GRAINED 1 — Groundwater Level SOILS MH Inorganic Silts, Micaceous or Diatomaceous fine (Final Reading) SILTS Sandy or Silty soils, Elastic Silts ' — Shelby Tube Sample AND CLAYS CH Inorganic Clays of high plasticity, Fat Clays ILL>50 — SPT Samples OH Organic Clays of medium to high plasticity, Organic Silts m — Auger Sample HIGHLY ORGANIC PT „ Peat and other Highly Organic soils — Rock Core SOILS TERMS DESCRIBING CONSISTENCY OF SOIL COARSE GRAINED SOILS FINE GRAINED SOILS DESCRIPTIVE NO. BLOWS/FT. DESCRIPTIVE NO. BLOWS/FT. UNCONFINED STANDARD PEN. STANDARD PEN. COMPRESSION TERM TEST TERM TEST TONS PER SQ. FT. Very Loose 0-4 Very Soft <2 <0.25 Loose 4-10 Soft 2-4 0.25-0.50 Medium 10-30 Firm 4-8 0.50-1.00 Dense 30-50 Stiff 8-15 1.00-2.00 Very Dense over 50 Very Stiff 15-30 2.00-4.00 Hard over 30 over 4.00 Field Classification for"Consistency"is determined with a 0.25"diameter penetrometer